Laminate(s) comprising beamed elastics and absorbent article(s) comprising said laminate(s)

ABSTRACT

The present disclosure relates to one or a combination of an absorbent article&#39;s chassis, inner leg cuffs, outer leg cuffs, ear panels, side panels, waistbands, and belts that may comprise one or more pluralities of tightly spaced (less than 4 mm, less than 3 mm, less than 2 mm, and less than 1 mm) and/or very fine (less than 300, less than 200, less than 100 dtex) and/or low strain (less than 300%, less than 200%, less than 100%) elastics to deliver low pressure less than 1 psi (according to the conditions defined by the Pressure-Under-Strand method below) under the elastics, while providing adequate modulus of (between about 2 gf/mm and 15 gf/mm) to make the article easy to apply and to comfortably maintain the article in place on the wearer, even with a loaded core (holding at least 50 mls of liquid), to provide for the advantages described above.

CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS

This application is a continuation of U.S. patent application Ser. No.15/846,341, filed on Dec. 19, 2017, which claims the benefit, under 35USC 119(e), to U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 62/436,589, filedon Dec. 20, 2016 (P&G 14618P); U.S. Provisional Patent Application No.62/483,965, filed on Apr. 11, 2017 (P&G 14778P); U.S. Provisional PatentApplication No. 62/553,149, filed on Sep. 1, 2017 (P&G 14917P); U.S.Provisional Patent Application No. 62/553,171, filed on Sep. 1, 2017(P&G 14918P); U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 62/553,538, filedon Sep. 1, 2017 (P&G 14921P); and U.S. Provisional Patent ApplicationNo. 62/581,278, filed on Nov. 3, 2017 (P&G 15007P); each of which areherein incorporated by reference in their entirety.

FIELD OF THE INVENTION

The present disclosure relates to absorbent articles, more particularly,to disposable absorbent articles comprising elastic laminates configuredto perform in various components of the disposable absorbent articles.

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

The present disclosure details elastomeric laminates comprising agreater number of elastic strands having a greater fineness and a closerspacing than has been previously disclosed or practiced in disposableabsorbent articles. Further, the present disclosure details combinationsof these elastic elements in groupings, including groupings withtraditional elastics (e.g., strands, films, extruded strands, scrims,elastomeric nonwovens, etc.) that have not been previously disclosed.

These improved elastomeric laminates can be used as disposable absorbentarticle (for, example, taped diapers, pants, pads, and liners)components for fit and gasketing at the waist, legs, crotch and sides ofthe wearer to generally provide the greatest level of extensibility, themost comfortable wearing conditions, improved leakage protection and abetter fit.

More particularly, these improved elastomeric laminates offer severaladvantages, including improved textures and less pressure of the elasticelements on the wearer's skin at a given modulus versus traditionalelastomeric laminates known today. These improvements result inenhancing application (e.g., making pant articles easier to open fordonning), fit, comfort and reduced marking of the wearer's skin. Theinventive elastomeric laminates disclosed in this application performbetter than traditional stranded and film versions of laminates knowntoday.

Elastic laminates of the prior art have a number of consumer negativesthat vary based on the laminate structure. For example, traditionalstranded laminates used in absorbent articles known today typicallycomprise elastic elements of relatively high decitex (also referred toherein as “dtex”) and relatively large elastic spacing, which whencombined result in high pressure imparted by each elastic on the skinand large uncontrolled rugosities in the laminate both of which leads toincreased skin marking, reduced comfort and a non-garment likeappearance. Traditional stranded laminates typically comprise elementsspaced at least 4 mm apart primarily due to manufacturing limitationsand handling of individual strands of elastics via separate materialinfeeds. With regard to extruded strands and/or extruded scrimmaterials, they are similar to many elastomeric films in that theytypically comprise thermoplastic materials that undergo significantstress relaxation over time and thus do not maintain the proper forcesat the waist and legs to provide proper initial and sustained fit andgasketing over the entire wearing time.

Regarding elastic film laminates, they are significantly more occlusive(i.e., less breathable, very low or no air permeability), resulting ingreater hydration of the skin and as a result significantly reducedcomfort and increased marking associated with the susceptibility of thehydrated skin to marking. Also, film based elastic laminates in generaltend to have a higher modulus versus stranded elastic laminates,therefore being more difficult to apply to a wearer (making it difficultto open for donning), therefore requiring more sizes to cover a givenfit range of wearers. It is also very difficult to create a forceprofile across the elastic film laminate or scrim based elastic laminateas they are typically formed via webs with relatively uniformproperties.

There has therefore been a long standing unmet consumer need which is tocreate a product that delivers very low pressure on the skin, high levelof breathability, adequate force for sustained fit, low modulus, highextensibility and a smooth uniform texture. Such an absorbent articlewould provide improved skin condition, skin marking, skin hydration,ease of application, ease of removal, improved sustained fit, improvedgasketing, as well as improved body conformity and wearer comfort.

To deliver against all of the unmet consumer needs requires a completestructural redesign of the elastomeric laminates used in the absorbentarticle. The balance of elastic decitex, elastic strand spacing, numberof elastics and elastic pre-strain required to deliver such a uniqueblend of properties requires elastic decitex that are very low, wellbelow that of the prior art, disposed at elastic to elastic spacing thatare also very low, also well below the prior art, which in turn requiresa larger number of elastics well above that known in the prior art, andelastic strains that are also low and well below nearly all of the knownprior art. In addition to the very specific combinations of decitex,spacing, number of elastics and pre-strain required to deliver againstthe range of unmet consumer needs an additional factor of nonwovenchoice, basis weight, composition, etc. is also critical to creating theoverall desired structure.

Elastomeric laminates of the present disclosure have higher body contactand improved textures versus the prior art as demonstrate by the SurfaceTopography Method and less pressure of the elastic elements on thewearer's skin at a given modulus and reduced marking of the wearer'sskin versus traditional elastic laminates known today as demonstrated bythe Pressure-Under-Strand method. These improvements result in enhancingapplication (e.g., making pant articles easier to open for donning),fit, comfort as evidenced by the Product Measurement Test. Theseinventive elastomeric laminates also provide a very high level ofbreathability as evidenced by the WVTR Method and by the AirPermeability method. The inventive elastomeric laminates disclosed inthis application perform better than traditional stranded and filmversions of laminates known today.

The specific set of criteria required to deliver against all of theaforementioned unmet consumer needs with a single product not onlyrequires unique elastomeric laminate structures but it requires a newprocess, beamed elastic (a plurality of elastics formed on and deliveredfrom a beam or spool), for delivery of such a large number of lowdecitex elastics, at low pre-strain and low spacing in order to achievethe right balance of laminate properties. Such an approach to the bestof our knowledge has never before been disclosed or attempted in thefield of absorbent articles; hygiene articles, taped diapers, diaperpants, adult incontinence articles, menstrual products, etc.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

In one disclosed example, the absorbent article may comprise a chassisand an elastic laminate. The chassis may comprise a topsheet, abacksheet and an absorbent core may be disposed between the topsheet andthe backsheet. The elastic laminate may comprise a first plurality ofelastics between inner and outer nonwovens. The elastic laminate mayform at least a portion of at least one of the group consisting of abelt, a side panel, a topsheet, a backsheet, an ear panel, a waistband,a waistcap, an inner leg cuff, an outer leg cuff, and a transversebarrier. The first plurality of elastics may have anAverage-Strand-Spacing from about 0.25 mm to about 4 mm. TheAverage-Dtex of the first plurality of elastics may be from about 10 toabout 500. The Pressure-Under-Strand of the first plurality of elasticsmay be from about 0.1 to about 1 psi.

The elastic laminate may form at least a portion of at least one of thegroup consisting of a belt, a side panel, a topsheet, a backsheet, andan ear panel, and the first plurality of elastics may comprise fromabout 40 to about 1000 elastic strands.

The elastic laminate may form at least a portion of at least one of thegroup consisting of a waistband, a waistcap, an inner leg cuff, an outerleg cuff, and a transverse barrier, and the first plurality of elasticsmay comprise from about 10 to about 400 elastic strands.

The first plurality of elastics may have an Average-Strand-Spacing fromabout 0.5 mm to about 3 mm; where the Average-Dtex of the firstplurality of elastics may be from about 30 to about 400; where thePressure-Under-Strand of the first plurality of elastics may be fromabout 0.2 to about 0.8 psi.

The elastic laminate may have a Pressure-Under-Strand from about 0.2 toabout 0.9 psi, and the elastic laminate may have an open area from about80% to about 90%.

In another disclosed example, an absorbent article may comprise achassis, a back belt, a lateral axis and a longitudinal axis. Thechassis may comprise a topsheet, a backsheet and an absorbent core maybe disposed between the topsheet and the backsheet. The chassis maycomprise a front waist region and a back waist region. The back belt maybe disposed in the back waist region overlapping and extending outboardof the back waist region of the chassis. The back belt may comprise afirst plurality of elastics comprising greater than about 40 elasticstrands. The back belt may be divided into 4 equal sections, whereSection 4 may comprise a proximal end edge of the back belt. Section 1may comprise a distal end edge of the back belt. Section 2 may beproximate to Section 1 and Section 3 may be proximate to Section 4,where at least two of the sections each have greater than 10 elasticstrands. The first plurality of elastics may have anAverage-Strand-Spacing of less than 4 mm.

A front belt may be disposed in the front waist region overlapping andextending outboard of the front waist region of the chassis. The frontbelt may be divided into 4 equal sections, where Section 4 may comprisea proximal end edge of the front belt. Section 1 may comprise a distalend edge of the front belt. Section 2 may be proximate to Section 1 andSection 3 may be proximate to Section 4, where at least one of thesections may have greater than 10 elastic strands. The front belt maycomprise a second plurality of elastics comprising greater than about 40elastic strands.

At least three of the sections of the back belt each have greater than10 elastic strands. And at least two of the sections of the front belteach have greater than 10 elastic strands.

At least one of the sections of the first plurality of elastics and atleast one of the sections of the second plurality of elastics have adifferent Section-Modulus. And, an area of the back belt may comprisethe first plurality of elastics may have an open area greater than about75%.

The back belt may have a greater longitudinal distance than the frontbelt along the longitudinal axis. The front and back belts may besubstantially co-terminus at the waist opening, and the back belt maycomprise one or more sections having a section modulus of between about4 gf/mm and 10 gf/mm.

In another disclosed example, an absorbent article may comprise achassis comprising a topsheet, a backsheet and an absorbent core may bedisposed between the topsheet and the backsheet. Side edges of first andsecond panels may be joined to opposing lateral side edges of thechassis in a back waist region of the absorbent article. A longitudinalaxis may extend from the midpoint of the front waist edge to themidpoint of the back waist edge. A lateral axis may extend perpendicularto the longitudinal axis through the midpoint of the longitudinal axis.The first panel may comprise a first plurality of elastics comprisinggreater than about 20 elastic strands. The second panel may comprise asecond plurality of elastics comprising greater than about 20 elasticstrands. The first panel may be divided into 4 equal sections, whereSection 4 may comprise a proximal end edge of the first panel. Section 1may comprise a distal end edge of the first panel. Section 2 may beproximate to Section 1 and Section 3 may be proximate to Section 4,where at least two of the sections each have 5 or more elastic strands.

The second panel may be divided into 4 equal sections, where Section 4may comprise a proximal end edge of the first panel. Section 1 maycomprise a distal end edge of the second panel, Section 2 may beproximate to Section 1 and Section 3 may be proximate to Section 4,where at least two of the sections each have 5 or more elastic strands.The first plurality of elastics may have an Average-Strand-Spacing ofless than 4 mm. The second plurality of elastics may have anAverage-Strand-Spacing of less than 4 mm.

A waistband may be may be disposed between the first and second panels,and the waistband may comprise a third plurality of elastics comprisinggreater than about 10 elastic strands having an average elastic strandspacing of less than 4 mm, and each of the first and second panelscomprise one or more sections having a section modulus of less thanabout 12 gf/mm.

Third and fourth panels may be joined to opposing lateral side edges ofthe chassis in a front waist region of the absorbent article, and thethird and fourth panels may be joined to the first and second panels toform leg openings and a waist opening, to form a closed-form absorbentarticle.

In another disclosed example, an absorbent article may comprise achassis and an elastic laminate. The chassis may comprise a topsheet, abacksheet and an absorbent core may be disposed between the topsheet andthe backsheet. The elastic laminate joined to or form a portion of thechassis. The elastic laminate may comprise a first plurality of elasticsbetween inner and outer nonwovens. The first plurality of elastics mayhave an Average-Strand-Spacing of less than about 3 mm. The Average-Dtexof the first plurality of elastics may be less than about 600, and theAverage-Pre-Strain of the strands of the first plurality of elastics maybe less than about 350%.

The first plurality of elastics may comprise from about 125 to about 625elastic strands, and the Average-Pre-Strain of the first plurality ofelastics may be less than about 150%.

The first plurality of elastics may have an Average-Strand-Spacing fromabout 0.375 mm to about 2.7 mm.

The Average-Dtex of the first plurality of elastics may be from about 20to about 350, and the Average-Dtex of the first plurality of elasticsmay be less than about 155.

The Average-Pre-Strain of the first plurality of elastics may be fromabout 75% to about 300%, and the elastic laminate may have aPressure-Under-Strand of less than about 1.0 psi.

The elastic laminate may form at least a portion of at least one of thegroup consisting of a belt, a side panel, a topsheet, a backsheet, andan ear panel having a first plurality of elastics comprising greaterthan about 40 elastic strands, where the elastic laminate may have anopen area greater than about 75%.

The elastic laminate may form at least a portion of at least one of thegroup consisting of a waistband, a waistcap, an inner leg cuff, an outerleg cuff, and a transverse barrier, and may have a first plurality ofelastics comprising greater than about 10 elastic strands.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

FIG. 1 is a side view of a pant comprising side panels with refastenableside seams.

FIG. 2 is a plan view of a pant comprising side panels with refastenableseams.

FIG. 3 is a cross section view of a refastenable seam taken along line3-3 of the pant of FIG. 1.

FIG. 4A is a perspective view of a pant comprising apertures fitted on awearer.

FIG. 4B is a perspective view of a pant comprising apertures fitted on awearer.

FIG. 5A is a front view of a pant comprising texture fitted on a wearer.

FIG. 5B is a front view of a pant comprising texture fitted on a wearer.

FIG. 6A is a front view of a pant comprising concentrated zones ofelastics, the pant fitted on a wearer.

FIG. 6B is a perspective view of a pant comprising concentrated zones ofelastics, the pant fitted on a wearer.

FIG. 7 is a plan view of pant comprising integral side panels.

FIG. 8A is a perspective front view of pant with multiple beam zones.

FIG. 8B is a perspective back view of pant with multiple beam zones.

FIG. 9 is a plan view of a pant with multiple beam zones disposed in thelow motion zones of the wearer.

FIG. 10 is a perspective front view of a belt pant comprising discretebelts having both continuous and discontinuous elastics.

FIG. 11 is a plan view of the belt pant of FIG. 10.

FIG. 12 is a cross section view of the belt pant of FIG. 11 taken alongthe longitudinal axis 42, showing the longitudinally opposing discretebelts.

FIG. 13A is a cross section view of an alternate embodiment of the beltpant of FIG. 11 taken along the longitudinal axis 42, showinglongitudinally opposing discrete belts.

FIG. 13B is a cross section view of an alternate embodiment of the beltpant of FIG. 11 taken along the longitudinal axis 42, showinglongitudinally opposing discrete inner belt layers 432 and a commonouter belt layer 434.

FIG. 14A is a cross section view of an alternate embodiment of the beltpant of FIG. 11 taken along the longitudinal axis 42, showinglongitudinally opposing discrete belts.

FIG. 14B is a cross section view of an alternate embodiment of the beltpant of FIG. 11 taken along the longitudinal axis 42, showing a commoninner belt layer 432 and a common outer belt layer 434.

FIG. 15A is a partial cross section view of an alternate embodiment ofthe belt pant of FIG. 11 taken along the longitudinal axis 42.

FIG. 15B is a partial cross section view of an alternate embodiment ofthe belt pant of FIG. 11 taken along the longitudinal axis 42, showingan outer belt layer 434 extending to wrap over a topsheet 124 of thechassis 200.

FIG. 15C is a partial cross section view of an alternate embodiment ofthe belt pant of FIG. 11 taken along the longitudinal axis 42.

FIG. 16A is a partial cross section view of an alternate embodiment ofthe belt pant of FIG. 11 taken along the longitudinal axis 42, showingan inner belt layer 432 and an outer belt layer 434 and an intermediatebelt layer 433 therebetween.

FIG. 16B is a partial cross section view of an alternate embodiment ofthe belt pant of FIG. 11 taken along the longitudinal axis 42, showingan inner belt layer 432 and an outer belt layer 434 and an intermediatebelt layer 433 therebetween.

FIG. 16C is a partial cross section view of an alternate embodiment ofthe belt pant of FIG. 11 taken along the longitudinal axis 42, showingan inner belt layer 432 and an outer belt layer 434 and an intermediatebelt layer 433 therebetween, and showing a portion of elastics 316 abeing immediately sandwiched between the outer belt layer 434.

FIG. 16D is a partial cross section view of an alternate embodiment ofthe belt pant of FIG. 11 taken along the longitudinal axis 42, showingan inner belt layer 432 and an outer belt layer 434 and first and secondintermediate layers 433 and 433′ therebetween.

FIG. 16E is a partial cross section view of an alternate embodiment ofthe belt pant of FIG. 11 taken along the longitudinal axis 42, showingan inner belt layer 432 and an outer belt layer 434 and an intermediatebelt layer 433 therebetween, and showing a portion of elastics 316 abeing immediately sandwiched between the outer belt layer 434, andshowing tighter spacing between elastics 316 a sandwiched between theouter belt layer 434 and the intermediate belt layer 433 than thespacing of the elastics 316 a between the intermediate belt layer 433and the inner belt layer 432 and also tighter than the elastics 316 b.

FIG. 16F is a partial cross section view of an alternate embodiment ofthe belt pant of FIG. 11 taken along the longitudinal axis 42, showingan inner belt layer 432 and an outer belt layer 434 and first, second,and third intermediate layers 433, 433′, and 433″ therebetween.

FIG. 16G is a partial cross section view of an alternate embodiment ofthe belt pant of FIG. 11 taken along the longitudinal axis 42, showingan inner belt layer 432 and an outer belt layer 434 and first, second,third, and fourth intermediate layers 433, 433′, 433″, and 433′″therebetween, where outer belt layer 433 a is longitudinally separatedfrom outer belt layer 433 b and the intermediate belt layer 433 a islongitudinally separated from intermediate belt layer 433 b.

FIG. 16H is a partial cross section view of an alternate embodiment ofthe belt pant of FIG. 11 taken along the longitudinal axis 42, showingan inner belt layer 432 and an outer belt layer 434 and an intermediatebelt layer 433 therebetween.

FIG. 16I is a partial cross section view of an alternate embodiment ofthe belt pant of FIG. 11 taken along the longitudinal axis 42, showingan inner belt layer 432 and an outer belt layer 434 and an intermediatebelt layer 433 therebetween, showing elastics 316 b between the outerbelt layer 434 and inner belt layer 432.

FIG. 16J is a partial cross section view of an alternate embodiment ofthe belt pant of FIG. 11 taken along the longitudinal axis 42, showingan inner belt layer 432 and an outer belt layer 434 and an intermediatebelt layer 433 therebetween, showing elastics 316 b between the outerbelt layer 434 and inner belt layer 432.

FIG. 16K is a partial cross section view of an alternate embodiment ofthe belt pant of FIG. 11 taken along the longitudinal axis 42, showingan inner belt layer 432 and an outer belt layer 434 and an intermediatebelt layer 433 therebetween, showing tighter spacing between elastics316 a sandwiched between the inner belt layer 432 and the intermediatebelt layer 433 than the spacing of the elastics 316 b between theintermediate belt layer 433 and the outer belt layer 434.

FIG. 17 is a side view of a pant donned on a wearer showing low motionzone anchoring zones 61 a and 61 b.

FIG. 18 is a partial side view of a pant showing low motion zoneanchoring zones 61 a and 61 b.

FIG. 19 is a perspective front view of pant with multiple beam zonesdisposed in the low motion zones of a potential wearer, showing theelastics responsible for anchoring forces 61 a and b.

FIG. 20 is a perspective back view of the pant of FIG. 19, showingmultiple beam zones disposed in the low motion zones of a potentialwearer, showing the elastics responsible for anchoring forces 61 a andb.

FIG. 21A is a partial cross section view of the front belt 430 f of thepant of FIG. 19 taken along line 21A-21A of FIG. 19.

FIG. 21B is a partial cross section view of the back belt 430 b of thepant of FIG. 20 taken along line 21B-21B of FIG. 20.

FIG. 22 is a perspective front view of a pant comprising a refastenableside seam 174.

FIG. 23 is a plan view of a pant of FIG. 22.

FIG. 24 is a cross section of belt pants being made, showing aconfiguration of a refastenable seams of a first pant (to the left ofcut line 191) and a second pant (to the right of cut line 191).

FIG. 25 is a cross section of belt pants being made, showing aconfiguration of a refastenable seams of a first pant (to the left ofcut line 191) and a second pant (to the right of cut line 191).

FIG. 26 is a cross section of belt pants being made, showing aconfiguration of a refastenable seams of a first pant (to the left ofcut line 191) and a second pant (to the right of cut line 191).

FIG. 27 is a cross section of belt pants being made, showing aconfiguration of a refastenable seams of a first pant (to the left ofcut line 191) and a second pant (to the right of cut line 191).

FIG. 28 is a cross section of belt pants being made, showing aconfiguration of a refastenable seams of a first pant (to the left ofcut line 191) and a second pant (to the right of cut line 191).

FIG. 29 is a cross section of belt pants being made, showing aconfiguration of a refastenable seams of a first pant (to the left ofcut line 191) and a second pant (to the right of cut line 191).

FIG. 30A is a simplified view of the apparatus for measuring the belthoop force.

FIG. 30B is a simplified view of the apparatus of FIG. 30A with a pantplaced on the apparatus.

FIG. 31 is a plan view of the belt pant of FIG. 32.

FIG. 32 is a perspective side view of a belt pant showing differinglongitudinal lengths of a front belt and a back belt at a side seam 172.

FIG. 33 is a perspective front view of a belt pant showing aconcentration of elastic gathers at the waist and leg openings.

FIG. 34 is a plan view of a continuous web of belt pants comprisingshaped front and back belts at the leg openings 192.

FIG. 35 is a perspective side view of a belt pant showing an outer beltlayer 434 and an intermediate belt layer 433.

FIG. 36 is a plan view of a belt pant comprising a shaped,non-rectangular back belt.

FIG. 37 is a perspective side view of the belt pant of FIG. 36.

FIG. 38 is a plan view of a taped diaper comprising a rectangularchassis, a pair of shaped discrete elastomeric ear panels 530 and a pairof shaped discrete non-elastomeric ear panels 540.

FIG. 39 is a plan view of a taped diaper comprising a rectangularchassis, a pair of shaped discrete elastomeric ear panels 530 and a pairof shaped discrete non-elastomeric ear panels 540.

FIG. 40 is a plan view of a taped diaper comprising a rectangularchassis, a pair of shaped discrete elastomeric ear panels 530 and a pairof shaped discrete non-elastomeric ear panels 540.

FIG. 41 is a plan view of a taped diaper.

FIG. 42 is a perspective front view of a taped diaper comprising a beltdisposed in the back waist region 38 and fastened to the front waistregion 36, and showing an elasticized chassis.

FIG. 43 is a plan view of a taped diaper comprising a shaped,non-rectangular, belt in the back waist region 38.

FIG. 44 is a plan view of a taped diaper comprising a pair of discreteelastomeric ear panels 530 and a rectangular chassis 200.

FIG. 45 is a plan view of a taped diaper comprising a pair of discreteelastomeric ear panels in the front and back waist regions, showingwaist bands overlapping the elastics of the elastomeric ear panels.

FIG. 46 is a plan view of a taped diaper comprising a pair of discreteelastomeric ear panels and a pair of non-elastomeric ear panels and ashaped chassis.

FIG. 47 is a plan view of a taped diaper comprising a pair of integralelastomeric ear panels in the back waist region and a pair of integralnon-elastomeric ear panels in the front waist region.

FIG. 48 is a perspective front view of a pant-style absorbent article.

FIG. 49A is a schematic side view of a second configuration of aconverting apparatus joining elastic strands between a first substrateand a second substrate, wherein the elastic strands drawn from differentbeams are stretched to have different elongations.

FIG. 49B is a view of the converting apparatus of FIG. 49A taken alongline 49B-49B.

FIG. 50A is a schematic side view of a converting apparatus adapted tomanufacture an elastomeric laminate including a first plurality ofelastic strands positioned between a first substrate and a secondsubstrate.

FIG. 50B is a view of the converting apparatus of FIG. 50A taken alongline 50B-50B.

FIG. 50C is a view of the converting apparatus of FIG. 50A taken alongline 50C-50C.

FIG. 51 is a schematic side view of an alternative configuration of aconverting apparatus adapted to manufacture an elastomeric laminate.

FIG. 52 is a cross section view of an inner leg cuff 150 and outer legcuff 140 structure formed by a folded nonwoven web.

FIG. 53 is a cross section view of an absorbent article comprising apair of opposing inner leg cuff and outer leg cuff structures bonded toa topsheet layer 124.

FIG. 54 is a cross section view of the pant of FIG. 55 comprising a pairof opposing inner leg cuff and outer leg cuff structures, and showingchannels 129 through the absorbent core 129.

FIG. 55 is a plan view of a belt pant comprising an absorbent corecomprising longitudinally extending core channels.

FIG. 56 is a plan view of a belt pant comprising an absorbent corecomprising laterally extending core channels and longitudinallyextending core channels.

FIG. 57A is a cross section view of the absorbent core comprising anacquisition layer 130 and a storage layer comprising core channels.

FIG. 57B is a cross section view of the pant of FIG. 56 taken along thetransverse axis, illustrating the elasticized topsheet (showing aplurality of elastics 316 oriented parallel with the longitudinal axis42) and the elasticized backsheet (showing a plurality of elastics 316oriented parallel with the longitudinal axis 42).

FIG. 57C is a cross section view of an alternate embodiment of the pantof FIG. 56 taken along the transverse axis, wherein the core wrapcompletely surrounds the core 128, wherein a plurality of elastics 316are oriented parallel with the longitudinal axis 42 between the corewrap 74 and the backsheet 125 and oriented parallel with thelongitudinal axis 42 between the core wrap 74 and the topsheet 124, andwherein the core 128 comprises AGM 51 mixed with pulp 53.

FIG. 57D is a cross section view of an alternate embodiment of the pantof FIG. 55 taken along the longitudinal axis 42, showing longitudinallyopposing discrete belts, wherein elastics 316 are oriented parallel tothe lateral axis 44 between the core wrap 74 and the topsheet 124 andoriented parallel to the lateral axis 44 between the backsheet film 126and the backsheet nonwoven 127.

FIG. 57E is a cross section view of an alternate embodiment of the beltpant of FIG. 55 taken along the longitudinal axis 42, showinglongitudinally opposing discrete inner belt layers 432 and a commonouter belt layer 434, and showing elastic strands 316 extendingcontinuously across the core.

FIG. 57F is a cross section view of an alternate embodiment of the pantof FIG. 55 taken along the longitudinal axis 42, showing alongitudinally continuous elastomeric laminate comprising longitudinallyopposing belt portions and an elasticized crotch portion between thebelt portions, wherein elastics 316 are oriented parallel to the lateralaxis 44 between inner belt layer 432 and outer belt layer 434 andwherein the elastics extend laterally across the core.

FIG. 57G is a cross section view of an alternate embodiment of the beltpant of FIG. 55 taken along the longitudinal axis 42, forming a wearablearticle having a longitudinally continuous elastomeric laminatecomprising longitudinally opposing belt portions and an elasticizedcrotch portion between the belt portions, wherein elastics 316 areoriented parallel to the lateral axis 44 between inner belt layer 432and outer belt layer 434.

FIG. 58 is a plan view of a pant comprising transversely extendingelastics 316 in the front and back belts 430F and B and longitudinallyextending elastics 316 in the chassis 200 extending to the belt proximalbelt edges.

FIG. 59A is cross-sectional view of the pant of FIG. 58 along line59-59.

FIG. 60 is cross-sectional view of the pant of FIG. 58 along line 60-60,showing an additional nonwoven 800, sandwiching chassis elastics againstthe backsheet nonwoven 127.

FIG. 61A is a plan view of a pant comprising transversely extendingelastics 316 in the front and back belts 430F and B and longitudinallyextending elastics 316 in the chassis 200 extending to the end edges ofthe chassis, but not overlapping the elastics of the belts.

FIG. 61B is cross-sectional view of the pant of FIG. 61A along line61B-61B, showing the chassis elastics sandwiched between the backsheetfilm 126 and backsheet nonwoven 127.

FIG. 62A is a plan view of a pant comprising transversely extendingelastics 316 in the front and back belts 430F and B and longitudinallyextending elastics 316 in the chassis 200 terminating prior to theproximal edges of the belts.

FIG. 62B is cross-sectional view of the pant of FIG. 62A along line62B-62B, showing the chassis elastics sandwiched between the backsheetfilm 126 and an additional nonwoven 800.

FIG. 63A is a plan view of a pant comprising transversely extendingelastics 316 in the front and back belts 430F and B and transverselyextending elastics 316 in the chassis 200.

FIG. 63B is cross-sectional view of the pant of FIG. 63A along line63B-63B, showing the chassis elastics sandwiched between the backsheetfilm 126 and backsheet nonwoven 127.

FIG. 64 is a plan view of a pant comprising transversely extendingelastics 316 in the front and back belts 430F and B and transverselyextending elastics 316″ in the chassis 200, as well as longitudinallyextending elastics 316′ in the chassis which overlap with thetransversely extending elastics 316 in the front and back belts.

FIG. 65A is a plan view of a pant comprising transversely extendingelastics 316 in the front and back belts 430F and B and transverselyextending elastics 316″ in the chassis 200, as well as longitudinallyextending elastics 316′ in the chassis which extend to the proximaledges of the front and back belts and do not overlap with thetransversely extending elastics 316 in the front and back belts.

FIG. 65B is a plan view of a pant comprising transversely extendingelastics 316 in the front and back belts 430F and B and transverselyextending elastics 316″ in the chassis 200, as well as elastic-freezones proximate to the proximal edges of the front and back belts.

FIG. 66A is a plan view of a pant comprising transversely extendingelastics 316 in the front and back waist regions 36 and 38 andlongitudinally extending elastics 316 in the crotch region 37, which donot overlap with the transversely extending elastics 316 in the frontand back waist regions.

FIG. 66B is a plan view of a pant comprising transversely extendingelastics 316 in the front and back waist regions 36 and 38 and thecrotch region 37.

FIG. 66C is a cross sectional view of the pant of FIG. 66B along thelongitudinal axis 42 including a chassis 200 comprising a topsheet 124,backsheet film 126 and an absorbent core 128 disposed between thetopsheet 124 and backsheet film 126.

FIG. 66D is a cross sectional view of the pant of FIG. 66B along thelongitudinal axis 42 forming a wearable article without a chassis 200joined thereto.

FIG. 67 is a plan view of a pant comprising transversely extendingelastics 316 in the front and back side panels 330 in the front and backwaist regions and longitudinally extending elastics 316 in the chassis200.

FIG. 68 is a plan view of a pant comprising transversely extendingelastics 316 in the elastomeric ear panels 530 and longitudinallyextending elastics 316 in the chassis 200.

FIG. 69 is cross-sectional view of the pant of FIG. 65B along line69-69, showing the chassis elastics sandwiched between the backsheetfilm 126 and additional nonwoven 800.

FIG. 70A is a side view of a comparative absorbent article fitted onto amannequin, the absorbent article comprising a comparative discrete sidepanel 330. The discrete side panel 330 of FIG. 70A shows stress linesindicative of less even and higher elastic stress that will result inhigher pressure on the wearer's skin (versus the discrete side panel 330of FIG. 70B).

FIG. 70B is a side view of an inventive absorbent article fitted onto amannequin, the absorbent article comprising an inventive discrete sidepanel 330 comprising an inventive elastomeric laminate 302. Theinventive texture zone 318 of the discrete side panel 330 in FIG. 70B ismeant to be directly compared to same areas of the discrete side panel330 in FIG. 70A.

FIG. 71A is a side view of a comparative absorbent article fitted onto amannequin, the absorbent article comprising a comparative discrete sidepanel 330. The discrete side panel 330 of FIG. 71A shows stress linesindicative of less even and higher elastic stress that will result inhigher pressure on the wearer's skin (versus the discrete side panel 330of FIG. 71B).

FIG. 71B is a side view of an inventive absorbent article fitted onto amannequin, the absorbent article comprising an inventive discrete sidepanel 330 comprising an inventive elastomeric laminate 302. Theinventive texture zone 318 of the discrete side panel 330 in FIG. 71B ismeant to be directly compared to same areas of the discrete side panel330 in FIG. 71A.

FIG. 72A is a side view of a comparative absorbent article fitted onto amannequin, the absorbent article comprising a comparative belt 430comprising an existing elastic profile of strands. The belt 430 of FIG.72A shows groupings of large uncontrolled gathers indicative of lessuniform and higher elastic stress that will result in higher pressure onthe wearer's skin (versus the belt 430 of FIG. 72B).

FIG. 72B is a side view of an inventive absorbent article fitted onto amannequin, the absorbent article comprising an inventive belt 430comprising an inventive elastomeric laminate 302. The inventive texturezone 318 of the belt 430 in FIG. 72B is meant to be directly compared tosame areas of the belt 430 in FIG. 72A.

FIG. 73A is a side view of a comparative absorbent article fitted onto amannequin, the absorbent article comprising a comparative belt 430comprising an existing elastic profile of strands. The belt 430 of FIG.73A shows oversized groupings of large uncontrolled gathers indicativeof less uniform and higher elastic stress that will result in higherpressure on the wearer's skin (versus the belt 430 of FIG. 73B).

FIG. 73B is a side view of an inventive absorbent article fitted onto amannequin, the absorbent article comprising an inventive belt 430comprising an inventive elastomeric laminate 302. The inventive texturezone 318 of the belt 430 in FIG. 73B is meant to be directly compared tosame areas of the belt 430 in FIG. 73A.

FIG. 74A is a front view of a comparative waistband 122 comprising anexisting elastic profile of strands showing a grouping of largeirregular and uncontrolled gathers indicative of less uniform and higherelastic stress that will result in higher pressure on the wearer's skin(versus the waistband 122 of FIG. 74B).

FIG. 74B is a front view of an inventive waistband 122 comprising aninventive elastomeric laminate 302. The inventive texture zone 318 ofthe waistband 122 in FIG. 74B is meant to be directly compared to sameareas of the waistband 122 in FIG. 74A.

FIG. 75A is a front view of a comparative waistband 122 comprising anexisting elastic profile of strands showing a grouping of largeirregular and uncontrolled gathers indicative of less uniform and higherelastic stress that will result in higher pressure on the wearer's skin(versus the waistband 122 of FIG. 75B).

FIG. 75B is a front view of an inventive waistband 122 comprising aninventive elastomeric laminate 302. The inventive texture zone 318 ofthe waistband 122 in FIG. 75B is meant to be directly compared to sameareas of the waistband 122 in FIG. 75A.

FIG. 76A is a perspective side view of a comparative outer leg cuff 140comprising an existing elastic profile of strands showing a grouping oflarge irregular and uncontrolled gathers indicative of less uniform andhigher elastic stress that will result in higher pressure on thewearer's skin (versus the outer leg cuff of FIG. 76B).

FIG. 76B is a perspective side view of an inventive outer leg cuff 140comprising an inventive elastomeric laminate 302. The inventive texturezone 318 of the outer leg cuff in FIG. 76B is meant to be directlycompared to same areas of the outer leg cuff in FIG. 76A.

FIG. 77A is a perspective side view of a comparative outer leg cuff 140comprising an existing elastic profile of strands showing a grouping oflarge irregular and uncontrolled gathers indicative of less uniform andhigher elastic stress that will result in higher pressure on thewearer's skin (versus the outer leg cuff of FIG. 77B).

FIG. 77B is a perspective side view of an inventive outer leg cuff 140comprising an inventive elastomeric laminate 302. The inventive texturezone 318 of the outer leg cuff in FIG. 77B is meant to be directlycompared to same areas of the outer leg cuff in FIG. 77A.

FIG. 78 is an exterior plan view of a feminine hygiene article 801,specifically a liner.

FIG. 79 is an interior plan view of the feminine hygiene article 801 ofFIG. 78 illustrating leg cuffs 52.

FIG. 80 is a cross section view of the feminine hygiene article 801,along line 80-80 of the feminine hygiene article 801 of FIG. 78.

FIG. 81 is an interior plan view of a feminine hygiene article 801,specifically a pad, illustrating elasticized wings 802.

FIG. 82 is an exterior plan view of the feminine hygiene article 801 ofFIG. 81 illustrating elasticized wings 802.

FIG. 83A is a cross section view of the feminine hygiene article 801,along line 83A/B-83A/B of the feminine hygiene article 801 of FIG. 81,illustrating strands between the layers making up the wings.

FIG. 83B is a cross section view of an alternative embodiment of thefeminine hygiene article 801, along line 83A/B-83A/B of the femininehygiene article 801 of FIG. 81, illustrating strands between the layersmaking up the wings, as well as strands underlying or forming a portionof the topsheet 124.

FIG. 84 is a perspective interior top view of a taped article comprisinga transverse barrier.

FIG. 85 illustrates the Donning-Ratio.

FIG. 86 shows a perspective front view of a closed-form pant product inits laid out, relaxed, and unfolded state.

FIG. 87 is a chart showing the relationship between a wearer's waistcircumference and hip circumference, and that the hip circumference isthe larger of the two for over 90% all wearers.

FIG. 88 is a chart showing the relationship between a wearer's bodyweight and waist circumference, and that the average weight versus waistcan be reasonably predicted, especially for larger wearers.

FIG. 89 is a chart showing the relationship between a wearer's hipcircumference and body weight, and that the average hip circumferenceversus weight can be reasonably predicted.

FIG. 90 shows a flat, unfolded closed-form pant.

FIG. 91A is a chart showing the relationship between strand spacing,modulus and Donning-Ratio for a stranded belt having a constant hoopforce and constant strand decitex.

FIG. 91B is a chart showing the relationship between strand spacing,modulus and Pressure-Under-Strand for a stranded belt having a constanthoop force and constant strand decitex.

FIG. 92 illustrates Pressure-Under-Strand.

FIG. 93 Illustrates the SECTION-MODULUS.

FIG. 94 shows Body Length and Waist Width against a body shape.

FIG. 95 is a chart which shows how the Body Length-to-Waist Silhouetteand Average Body Length-to-Waist Silhouette changes as body weightincreases.

FIG. 96 is a chart which shows examples of existing product arrays, andhow their Product Length-to-Waist Silhouettes compare to the BodyLength-to-Waist Silhouettes for the weight range each product istargeted to fit.

FIG. 97 shows illustrates the Product Hip-to-Waist Silhouette andProduct Waist-to-Crotch Silhouette

FIG. 98 is a chart which shows how the Body Hip-to-Waist Silhouette andAverage Body Hip-to-Waist Silhouette changes as body weight increases.

FIG. 99 is a chart which shows examples of existing product arrays andhow their Product Hip-to-Waist Silhouettes compare to the BodyHip-to-Waist Silhouettes for the weight range each product is targetedto fit.

FIG. 100 is an image of inventive elastomeric laminate 150 of thepresent disclosure showing the contact area taken from the SurfaceTopography Method.

FIG. 100A is an image of inventive elastomeric laminate 120 of thepresent disclosure showing the contact area taken from the SurfaceTopography Method.

FIG. 101 is an image of current market product 6 of the presentdisclosure showing the contact area taken from the Surface TopographyMethod.

FIG. 101A is an image of current market product 7 of the presentdisclosure showing the contact area taken from the Surface TopographyMethod.

FIG. 102 is an exterior view of an article in an extended state, thearticle comprising an inventive elastomeric laminate 302 forming a belt430 with the scribed line (1001 (extended)) for graphic distortiontesting.

FIG. 102A is an exterior view of the article of FIG. 102 in a contractedstate, the article comprising an inventive elastomeric laminate 302forming a belt 430 with the scribed line (1001′ (contracted)) forgraphic distortion testing.

FIG. 103 is an exterior view of an article in an extended state, thearticle comprising a comparative (non-inventive) elastic belt of theprior art with the scribed line (1002 (extended)) for graphic distortiontesting.

FIG. 103A is an exterior view of the article of FIG. 103 in a contractedstate, the article comprising an elastic belt of the prior art with thescribed line (1002′ (contracted)) for graphic distortion testing.

FIG. 104 is a chart showing force relaxation over time for variouselastomeric laminates.

FIG. 105 illustrates packaged articles with a sizing indicia.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION

The following term explanations may be useful in understanding thepresent disclosure:

“Disposable,” in reference to absorbent articles, means that theabsorbent articles, are generally not intended to be laundered orotherwise restored or reused as absorbent articles (i.e., they areintended to be discarded after a single use and, preferably, to berecycled, composted or otherwise discarded in an environmentallycompatible manner). Disposable absorbent articles often compriseadhesive between the layers and/or elements to hold the article together(e.g., ear panels, side panels, and belts are joined to the chassis viaadhesive and the layers of the ear panels, side panels, belts, andchassis are joined together using adhesive). Alternatively, heat and/orpressure bonding are used with the adhesive or in place of the adhesive.In such instances portions of the material layers may become partiallymelted and pressed together such that once cooled they are physicallybonded together. Nonwovens (including, for example, polypropylene,polyethylene, etc.) adhesives (including, for example, styrenic blockcopolymers (e.g., SIS, SBS)), and absorbent gelling material (AGM 51—seeFIG. 57A-C) make up more than 50%, more than 75%, and often more than90% of the disposable absorbent article weight. And, a core comprisingthe AGM 51 is often held within the chassis in a manner that would causeripping and tearing of the other layers of the chassis (e.g. topsheet,backsheet, core wrap, etc.) to remove it under normal conditions. Suchdisposable absorbent articles typically have an absorbent capacity ofgreater than about 100 mL of fluid and can have capacities of up toabout 500 mL of fluid or more. Stitching (including the use of thread)and/or woven materials are typically not used to make a disposableabsorbent article. If stitching or woven materials are used, they makeup an extremely small percentage of the disposable absorbent article.Some landing zones of disposable absorbent articles for fasteners cancomprise a woven material, but no other part of a disposable absorbentarticle typically comprises woven materials.

“Absorbent article” refers to devices, which absorb and contain bodyexudates and, more specifically, refers to devices, which are placedagainst or in proximity to the body of the wearer to absorb and containthe various exudates discharged from the body. Exemplary absorbentarticles include diapers, training pants, pull-on pant-type diapers(i.e., a diaper having a pre-formed waist opening and leg openings suchas illustrated in U.S. Pat. No. 6,120,487), refastenable diapers orpant-type diapers, incontinence briefs and undergarments, diaper holdersand liners, feminine hygiene garments such as panty liners, absorbentinserts, menstrual pads and the like.

“Proximal” and “Distal” refer respectively to the location of an elementrelatively near to or far from the longitudinal or lateral centerline ofa structure (e.g., the proximal edge of a longitudinally extendingelement is located nearer to the longitudinal axis than the distal edgeof the same element is located relative to the same longitudinal axis).

“Body-facing” and “garment-facing” refer respectively to the relativelocation of an element or a surface of an element or group of elements.“Body-facing” implies the element or surface is nearer to the wearerduring wear than some other element or surface. “Garment-facing” impliesthe element or surface is more remote from the wearer during wear thansome other element or surface (i.e., element or surface is proximate tothe wearer's garments that may be worn over the disposable absorbentarticle).

“Longitudinal” refers to a direction running substantially perpendicularfrom a waist edge to an opposing waist edge of the article and generallyparallel to the maximum linear dimension of the article. Directionswithin 45 degrees of the longitudinal direction are considered to be“longitudinal.”

“Lateral” refers to a direction running from a longitudinally extendingside edge to an opposing longitudinally extending side edge of thearticle and generally at a right angle to the longitudinal direction.Directions within 45 degrees of the lateral direction are considered tobe “lateral.”

“Disposed” refers to an element being located in a particular place orposition.

“Joined” encompasses configurations whereby an element is directlysecured to another element by affixing the element directly to the otherelement, and configurations whereby an element is indirectly secured toanother element by affixing the element to intermediate member(s),which, in turn are affixed to the other element.

“Water-permeable” and “water-impermeable” refer to the penetrability ofmaterials in the context of the intended usage of disposable absorbentarticles. Specifically, the term “water-permeable” refers to a layer ora layered structure having pores, openings, and/or interconnected voidspaces that permit liquid water, urine, or synthetic urine to passthrough its thickness in the absence of a forcing pressure. Conversely,the term “water-impermeable” refers to a layer or a layered structurethrough the thickness of which liquid water, urine, or synthetic urinecannot pass in the absence of a forcing pressure (aside from naturalforces such as gravity). A layer or a layered structure that iswater-impermeable according to this definition may be permeable to watervapor, i.e., may be “vapor-permeable.”

“Elastic,” “elastomer,” or “elastomeric” refers to materials exhibitingelastic properties, which include any material that upon application ofa force to its relaxed, initial length can stretch or elongate to anelongated length more than 10% greater than its initial length and willsubstantially recover back to about its initial length upon release ofthe applied force. Elastomeric materials may include elastomeric films,scrims, nonwovens, ribbons, strands and other sheet-like structures.

“Pre-strain” refers to the strain imposed on an elastic or elastomericmaterial prior to combining it with another element of the elastomericlaminate or the absorbent article. Pre-strain is determined by thefollowing equation Pre-strain=((extended length of the elastic-relaxedlength of the elastic)/relaxed length of the elastic)*100.

“Decitex” also known as Dtex is a measurement used in the textileindustry used for measuring yarns or filaments. 1 Decitex=1 gram per10,000 meters. In other words, if 10,000 linear meters of a yarn orfilament weights 500 grams that yarn or filament would have a decitex of500.

“Substrate” is used herein to describe a material which is primarilytwo-dimensional (i.e. in an XY plane) and whose thickness (in a Zdirection) is relatively small (i.e. 1/10 or less) in comparison to itslength (in an X direction) and width (in a Y direction). Non-limitingexamples of substrates include a web, layer or layers of fibrousmaterials, nonwovens, films and foils such as polymeric films ormetallic foils. These materials may be used alone or may comprise two ormore layers laminated together. As such, a web is a substrate.

“Nonwoven” refers herein to a material made from continuous (long)filaments (fibers) and/or discontinuous (short) filaments (fibers) byprocesses such as spunbonding, meltblowing, carding, and the like.Nonwovens do not have a woven or knitted filament pattern.

“Machine direction” (MD) is used herein to refer to the direction ofmaterial flow through a process. In addition, relative placement andmovement of material can be described as flowing in the machinedirection through a process from upstream in the process to downstreamin the process.

“Cross direction” (CD) is used herein to refer to a direction that isgenerally perpendicular to the machine direction.

“Taped diaper” (also referred to as “open diaper”) refers to disposableabsorbent articles having an initial front waist region and an initialback waist region that are not fastened, pre-fastened, or connected toeach other as packaged, prior to being applied to the wearer. A tapeddiaper may be folded about the lateral centerline with the interior ofone waist region in surface to surface contact with the interior of theopposing waist region without fastening or joining the waist regionstogether. Example taped diapers are disclosed in various suitableconfigurations U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,167,897, 5,360,420, 5,599,335,5,643,588, 5,674,216, 5,702,551, 5,968,025, 6,107,537, 6,118,041,6,153,209, 6,410,129, 6,426,444, 6,586,652, 6,627,787, 6,617,016,6,825,393, and 6,861,571; and U.S. Patent Publication Nos. 2013/0072887A1; 2013/0211356 A1; and 2013/0306226 A1.

“Pant” (also referred to as “training pant”, “pre-closed diaper”,“diaper pant”, “pant diaper”, and “pull-on diaper”) refers herein todisposable absorbent articles having a continuous perimeter waistopening and continuous perimeter leg openings designed for infant oradult wearers. A pant can be configured with a continuous or closedwaist opening and at least one continuous, closed, leg opening prior tothe article being applied to the wearer. A pant can be pre-formed orpre-fastened by various techniques including, but not limited to,joining together portions of the article using any refastenable and/orpermanent closure member (e.g., seams, heat bonds, pressure welds,adhesives, cohesive bonds, mechanical fasteners, etc.). A pant can bepre-formed anywhere along the circumference of the article in the waistregion (e.g., side fastened or seamed, front waist fastened or seamed,rear waist fastened or seamed). Example diaper pants in variousconfigurations are disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,940,464; 5,092,861;5,246,433; 5,569,234; 5,897,545; 5,957,908; 6,120,487; 6,120,489;7,569,039 and U.S. Patent Publication Nos. 2003/0233082 A1; 2005/0107764A1, 2012/0061016 A1, 2012/0061015 A1; 2013/0255861 A1; 2013/0255862 A1;2013/0255863 A1; 2013/0255864 A1; and 2013/0255865 A1, all of which areincorporated by reference herein.

“Closed-form” means opposing waist regions are joined, as packaged,either permanently or refastenably to form a continuous waist openingand leg openings.

“Open-form” means opposing waist regions are not initially joined toform a continuous waist opening and leg openings but comprise a closuremeans such as a fastening system to join the waist regions to form thewaist and leg openings before or during application to a wearer of thearticle.

“Channel,” as used herein, is a region or zone in an absorbent materiallayer that has a substantially lower basis weight (e.g., less than 50%,less than 70%, less than 90%) than the surrounding material in thematerial layer. The channel may be a region in a material layer that issubstantially absorbent material-free (e.g., 90% absorbentmaterial-free, 95% absorbent material-free, or 99% absorbentmaterial-free, or completely absorbent material-free). A channel mayextend through one or more absorbent material layers. The channelgenerally has a lower bending modulus than the surrounding regions ofthe absorbent material layer, enabling the material layer to bend moreeasily and/or rapidly distribute more bodily exudates within the channelthan in the surrounding areas of the absorbent material layer. Thus, achannel is not merely an indentation in the material layer that does notcreate a reduced basis weight in the material layer in the area of thechannel.

Absorbent Articles

Products comprising elastomeric laminates 302 of the present disclosuremay comprise absorbent articles 100 of differing structure and/or formthat are generally designed and configured to manage bodily exudatessuch as urine, menses and/or feces, such as disposable taped diapers andpants, including baby and adult disposable absorbent articles andmenstrual pads.

As shown in FIGS. 2, 9, 11, 31, 38-41, 43-47, and 55-56 the absorbentarticles 100 of the present disclosure may comprise a chassis 200comprising a topsheet 124, a backsheet 125, and an absorbent core 128disposed at least partially between the topsheet 124 and the backsheet125. The chassis 200 may further comprise an inner leg cuff 150 and anouter leg cuff 140 (the cuffs generally referred to as 52). Variouschassis embodiments are shown in the figures, including FIGS. 7, 11, 39,41, 43, 46, and 47.

FIG. 2 is a simplified plan view of the precursor structure of the pantshown in FIG. 1. Referring to FIG. 2, one end portion of an absorbentarticle 100 may be configured as a front waist region 36 and thelongitudinally opposing end portion may be configured as a back waistregion 38. An intermediate portion of the absorbent article 100extending longitudinally between the front waist region 36 and the backwaist region 38 may be configured as a crotch region 37. Although notillustrated as such, the length of each of the front waist region 36,the back waist region 38 and the crotch region 37 may be about ⅓ of thelength of the absorbent article 100, for example (see, for example,FIGS. 39, 44, and 46). Alternatively, the length of each of the frontwaist region 36, the back waist region 38, and the crotch region 37 mayhave other dimensions (e.g., defined by the belt or ear panel or sidepanel dimensions—see for example FIGS. 2, 7, and 11). The absorbentarticle 100 may have a laterally extending front waist end edge 136 inthe front waist region 36 and a longitudinally opposing and laterallyextending back waist end edge 138 in the back waist region 38.

Referring further to FIG. 2, a chassis 200 of the absorbent article 100may comprise a first longitudinally extending side edge 237 a and alaterally opposing and second longitudinally extending side edge 237 b.Both of the side edges 237 may extend longitudinally between the frontwaist end edge 136 and the back waist end edge 138. The chassis 200 mayform a portion of the laterally extending front waist end edge 136 inthe front waist region 36 and a portion of the longitudinally opposingand laterally extending back waist end edge 138 in the back waist region38. Furthermore, the chassis 200 may comprise a chassis interior surface202, a chassis exterior surface 204 (see FIG. 8A), a longitudinal axis42, and a lateral axis 44. The longitudinal axis 42 may extend through amidpoint of the front waist end edge 136 and through a midpoint of theback waist end edge 138, while the lateral axis 44 may extend through amidpoint of the first side edge 237 a and through a midpoint of thesecond side edge 237 b.

Referring to FIG. 11, the chassis 200 may have a length measured alongthe longitudinal axis 42 that is less than the length of the absorbentarticle 100. Both of the side edges 237 of the chassis 200 may notextend longitudinally to one or both of the front waist end edge 136 andthe back waist end edge 138. The chassis 200 may not form a portion ofone or both of the laterally extending front waist end edge 136 in thefront waist region 36 and the longitudinally opposing and laterallyextending back waist end edge 138 in the back waist region 38.Furthermore, the chassis 200 may comprise a chassis interior surface202, a chassis exterior surface 204, a longitudinal axis 42, and alateral axis 44.

Referring to FIG. 55, often true for belted absorbent articles, thechassis 200 may have a length measured along the longitudinal axis 42that is less than the length of the absorbent article 100. Both of theside edges 237 of the chassis 200 may not extend longitudinally to oneor both of the front waist end edge 136 and the back waist end edge 138.The chassis 200 may not form a portion of one or both of the laterallyextending front waist end edge 136 in the front waist region 36 and thelongitudinally opposing and laterally extending back waist end edge 138in the back waist region 38.

Referring to FIG. 57B, the chassis 200 may comprise elastics 316oriented parallel to the longitudinal axis 42 between the backsheetnonwoven 127 and backsheet film 126. FIG. 57C shows an alternateembodiment than FIG. 57B, where the chassis 200 has elastics 316oriented parallel to the longitudinal axis 42 between the core wrap 74and the backsheet 125. Still further, FIG. 57D shows another alternativeembodiment where the chassis 200 comprises elastics 316 orientedparallel with the lateral axis 44 between the backsheet film 126 and thebacksheet nonwoven 127. FIG. 57B also shows elastics 316 orientedparallel with the longitudinal axis 42 between a first topsheet layer124 a and a second topsheet layer 124 b, whereas FIG. 57C shows analternate embodiment where the elastics 316 are between the topsheet 124and the core wrap 74. Still further, FIG. 57D shows elastics 316oriented parallel with the lateral axis 44 between the topsheet 124 andthe core wrap 74.

Particularly regarding belts 430, as illustrated in FIG. 57E, the innerbelt layer 432 and/or the outer belt layer 434 of the first and secondelastomeric belts 430 may be formed by a common belt layer as shown inFIG. 57E. When the first and second elastomeric belts 430 have a commonbelt layer, the common belt layer may extend from a first waist edge ina first waist region to a longitudinally opposing second waist edge in asecond waist region, i.e. front waist edge 136 to back waist edge 138.Referring to FIGS. 57F and 57G, the plurality of elastics 316 orientedparallel to the lateral axis 44 may extend continuously from a firstwaist edge in a first waist region to a longitudinally opposing secondwaist edge in a second waist region, i.e. front waist edge 136 to backwaist edge 138. FIG. 57G shows an auxiliary article or a wearablearticle that may be used in conjunction with an absorbent insert, pad,or liner—it does not comprise a chassis 200 nor does it comprise anabsorbent core 128. It is envisioned that the article shown in FIG. 57Gcan be washed and/or dried several times before being discarded.

Still regarding an elasticized chassis 200, FIGS. 81, 82, 83A and 83B,show an elasticized chassis 200, where elastics 316 are disposed betweenlayers of the wings 120. FIG. 81 shows elastics 316 oriented at about 45degrees relative to the longitudinal axis 42 and the lateral axis 44.FIG. 82 is an alternate embodiment of FIG. 81, showing the wing elastics316 oriented parallel with the longitudinal axis 42. FIG. 83A shows twolayers of elastics 316 in the wings 120, both oriented parallel with thelongitudinal axis 42, the lower layer of elastics 316 being spaced withgaps between groupings, and separated by a nonwoven wing layer 121. FIG.83B is an alternate embodiment of FIG. 83A, where there is only onelayer of elastics and no nonwoven wing layer 121. FIG. 83B also showselastics 316 oriented parallel to the longitudinal axis 42 between thetopsheet 124 and secondary topsheet 124′ (which may alternatively beoriented parallel to the lateral axis 44—not shown), and elastics 316oriented parallel to the longitudinal axis 42 between the backsheet film126 and the backsheet nonwoven 127 (which may alternatively be orientedparallel to the lateral axis 44—not shown).

A portion or the entirety of the absorbent article 100 may be made to belaterally elastically extensible. The extensibility of the absorbentarticle 100 may be desirable in order to allow the absorbent article 100to conform to a body of a wearer during movement by the wearer. Theextensibility may also be desirable, for example, in order to allow thecaregiver to extend the front waist region 36, the back waist region 38,the crotch region 37, and/or the chassis 200 to provide additional bodycoverage for wearers of differing size, i.e., to tailor the fit of theabsorbent article 100 to the individual wearer and to aide in ease ofapplication. Such extension may provide the absorbent article 100 with agenerally hourglass shape, so long as the crotch region 37 is extendedto a relatively lesser degree than the waist regions 36 and/or 38. Thisextension may also impart a tailored appearance to the absorbent article100 during use.

The chassis 200 may be substantially rectangular and may have discreteside panels 330, extensible ear panels 530 and/or non-extensible earpanels 540 joined to the chassis 200 at or adjacent the chassis sideedges 237 in one or both of the front waist region 36 and back waistregion 38. As shown in FIGS. 1, 2, 10, 19, 32, 33, 38, 42 and 47, thetexture of portions of one or both of the surfaces of the side panels330, extensible ear panels 530, belts 430 and/or non-extensible earpanels 540 may be substantially the same visibly as the texture of oneor both of the surfaces of one or more of the center chassis 200, innerleg cuff 150, the outer leg cuff 140, backsheet 125, topsheet 124, andwaistband 122. Portions of one or more of the chassis side edges 237,the chassis front end edge 236 and the chassis back end edge 238 may bearcuate or curved either convexly or concavely as shown in FIG. 47. Whenthe chassis 200 is non-rectangular, shaped, the chassis 200 may compriseintegral side panels 330, integral extensible ear panels 530, integralbelts 430 or integral non-extensible ear panels 540 formed by one ormore of the outer cover nonwoven, backsheet film, leg cuff material,topsheet or core wrap disposed in one or both of the front and backwaist regions (see, for example, FIG. 7). Alternatively, the chassis 200may comprise discrete side panels 330, discrete extensible ear panels530 discrete non-extensible ear panels 540, or discrete belts 430 (seeFIGS. 2, 11, 36, 38-40, 44-46, etc.). The chassis may be shaped ornon-rectangular, in one waist region and substantially rectangular inthe opposing waist region. Alternatively, the chassis may besubstantially rectangular in one or both of the waist regions andnon-rectangular in the crotch region.

As shown in FIG. 66B, an absorbent article of the present disclosure maycomprise a plurality of laterally extending elastic elements wherein theelastic elements are present in a first waist region, the crotch regionand the opposing second waist region and wherein the maximumdisplacement between any adjacently disposed pair of laterally extendingelastics measured parallel to the longitudinal axis may be less than 75mm, less than 50 mm, less than 25 mm, less than 10 mm, less than 5 mm,alternatively less than 4 mm and may be less than 3 mm.

A wearable article of the present disclosure may comprise one or moreelastomeric laminates 302 having a plurality of laterally extendingelastic elements wherein the one or more elastomeric laminates 302 maybe present in a first waist region, the crotch region 37 and/or in theopposing second waist region and wherein the elastomeric laminate 302disposed in one or both of the first and second waist regions maycomprise a first plurality of elastics 316 having one or more of ahigher Average-Dtex, higher Average-Pre-Strain and smallerAverage-Strand-Spacing than a second plurality of elastics 316 of theelastomeric laminate 302 disposed in the crotch region 37. Such awearable article may comprise one or more elastomeric laminates 302having a first plurality of elastics 316, the first plurality ofelastics 316 of the elastomeric laminate 302 comprising from about 100to about 1500 elastic strands with an Average-Strand-Spacing from about0.25 mm to about 4 mm, a Average-Dtex from about 10 to about 500, anAverage-Pre-Strain from about 50% to about 400% and a first substrate306 and/or second substrate 308 wherein one or both of the first andsecond substrate have a basis weight from about 6 grams per square meterto about 30 grams per square meter.

An absorbent article of the present disclosure may have an elastomericlaminate 302 forming at least a portion of one or more of a belt 430,side panel 330, ear panel 530, chassis 200, topsheet 124 and backsheet125. The elastomeric laminate 302 may comprise a plurality of elastics316 having a specific Average-Dtex, nonwoven type, nonwoven basisweight, Average-Strand-Spacing and Average-Pre-Strain and the articlefurther comprising an inner leg cuff 150 and/or an outer leg cuff 140comprising an elastomeric laminate 302 having one or more identical orsubstantially identical laminate elements, e.g. Average-Dtex, nonwoventype, nonwoven basis weight, Average-Strand-Spacing andAverage-Pre-Strain as one or more of a belt 430, side panel 630,elastomeric ear 530, chassis 200, topsheet 124 and backsheet 125.

When the elastomeric laminate 302 forms at least a portion of one ormore of the group of article components consisting of a belt 430, a sidepanel 330, a chassis 200, a topsheet 124, a backsheet 125, and an earpanel 530 and comprises a first plurality of elastics 316, the firstplurality of elastics 316 of the elastomeric laminate 302 may comprisefrom about 40 to about 1000 elastic strands with anAverage-Strand-Spacing from about 0.25 mm to about 4 mm, an Average-Dtexfrom about 10 to about 500, an Average-Pre-Strain from about 50% toabout 400% and a first substrate layer 306 and/or second substrate layer308 wherein one or both of the first and second substrate layers have abasis weight from about 6 grams per square meter to about 30 grams persquare meter.

It is also to be appreciated that one or more of the absorbent articlecomponents including a belt 430, side panel 330, ear panel 530,waistband 122, chassis 200, topsheet 124 and backsheet 125 may comprisean elastomeric laminate 302 formed from multiple beams of elastic. Forexample, one beam may form a first portion of one or more absorbentarticle components including a belt 430, side panel 330, ear panel 530,waistband 122, chassis 200, topsheet 124 and backsheet 125, and a secondbeam may form a second portion of one or more of an absorbent articlecomponent including a belt 430, side panel 330, ear panel 530, chassis200, topsheet 124 and backsheet 125 wherein the separate beams maycomprise a different number of elastics 316, the beams may have elasticshaving different Average-Dtex, the elastics 316 of the two beams may bedisposed at different Average-Strand-Spacing and/or the separate beamsmay deliver elastics 316 having different Average-Pre-Strain and/or thedifferent beams may deliver elastics having different orientations inthe product, e.g. liner, arcuate, angled, etc. The resultant portions ofbelt 430, side panel 630, elastomeric ear 530, chassis 200, topsheet 124and/or backsheet 125 created from such a multi-beam approach may havedifferent texture, garment-like appearance, breathability,Section-Modulus and/or different force.

Alternatively, the elastomeric laminate 302 comprising a first pluralityof elastics 316 forming one or more of a belt 430, side panel 330,elastomeric ear 530, chassis 200, topsheet 124 and/or backsheet 125 maycomprise from about 50 to about 825 elastic strands. In anotherembodiment, the first plurality of elastics 316 or the elastomericlaminate 302 may comprise from about 100 to about 650 elastic strands.In yet another embodiment, the first plurality of elastics 316 of theelastomeric laminate 302 may comprise from about 150 to about 475elastic strands.

In certain embodiments, the elastomeric laminate 302 comprising a firstplurality of elastics 316 forming one or more of a belt 430, side panel330, elastomeric ear 530, chassis 200, topsheet 124 and/or backsheet 125may have an Average-Strand-Spacing from about 0.5 mm to about 3.5 mm. Inalternative embodiments, the first plurality of elastics of theelastomeric laminate 302 may have an Average-Strand-Spacing from about0.75 mm to about 2.5 mm.

In one embodiment, the elastomeric laminate 302 forming one or more of abelt 430, side panel 330, elastomeric ear 530, chassis 200, topsheet 124and/or backsheet 125 may have an Average-Dtex of the first plurality ofelastics 316 from about 30 to about 400. Alternatively, the elastomericlaminate 302 may have an Average-Dtex of the first plurality of elastics316 from about 50 to about 250.

In some embodiments of the elastomeric laminate 302 forming one or moreof a belt 430, side panel 330, elastomeric ear 530, chassis 200,topsheet 124 and/or backsheet 125 may comprise elastics 316 having anAverage-Pre-Strain which may be from about 75% to about 300%.Alternatively, the elastomeric laminate 302 may comprise elastics 316with an Average-Pre-Strain from about 100% to about 250%.

When the elastomeric laminate 302 forms at least a portion of one ormore of the group of article components consisting of a waistband 122,waistcap 123, inner leg cuff 150, outer leg cuff 140 and a transversebarrier 165 and comprises a first plurality of elastics 316, the firstplurality of elastics 316 may comprise from about 10 to about 400elastic strands with an Average-Strand-Spacing from about 0.25 mm toabout 4 mm, a Average-Dtex from about 10 to about 500, anAverage-Pre-Strain from about 50% to about 400% and a first substratelayer 306 and/or second substrate layer 308 each of the first and secondsubstrate layers having a basis weight from about 6 grams per squaremeter to about 30 grams per square meter.

It is also to be appreciated that one or more of a waistband 122,waistcap 123, inner leg cuff 150, outer leg cuff 140 and/or a transversebarrier 165 may be formed from multiple beams of elastic, for exampleone beam may form a first portion of one or more of a waistband 122,waistcap 123, inner leg cuff 150, outer leg cuff 140 and/or a transversebarrier 165 and a second beam may form a second portion of one or moreof a waistband 122, waistcap 123, inner leg cuff 150, outer leg cuff 140and/or a transverse barrier 165 wherein the separate beams may comprisea different number of elastics, the beams may have elastics havingdifferent decitex, the elastics of the two beams may be disposed atdifferent spacing and/or the separate beams may deliver elastics havingdifferent pre-strain and/or the different beams may deliver elasticshaving different orientations in the product, e.g. liner, arcuate,angled, etc. The resultant portions of the waistband 122, waistcap 123,inner leg cuff 150, outer leg cuff 140 and/or transverse barrier 165created from such a multi-beam approach may have different texture,garment-like appearance, Section-Modulus and/or different force.

Alternatively, the elastomeric laminate 302 comprising a first pluralityof elastics 316 forming one or more of a waistband 122, waistcap 123,inner leg cuff 150, outer leg cuff 140 and/or a transverse barrier 165may comprise from about 15 to about 300 elastic strands. In anotherembodiment, the first plurality of elastics 316 of the elastomericlaminate 302 may comprise from about 20 to about 225 elastic strands. Inyet another embodiment, the first plurality of elastics 316 or theelastomeric laminate 302 may comprise from about 25 to about 150 elasticstrands.

In certain embodiments, the elastomeric laminate 302 comprising a firstplurality of elastics 316 forming one or more of a waistband 122,waistcap 123, inner leg cuff 150, outer leg cuff 140 and/or a transversebarrier 165 may have an Average-Strand-Spacing from about 0.5 mm toabout 3.0 mm. In alternative embodiments, the first plurality ofelastics 316 or the elastomeric laminate 302 may have anAverage-Strand-Spacing from about 0.75 mm to about 2.5 mm.

In one embodiment, the elastomeric laminate 302 forming one or more of awaistband 122, waistcap 123, inner leg cuff 150, outer leg cuff 140and/or a transverse barrier 165 may have an Average-Dtex of the firstplurality of elastics 316 from about 30 to about 400. Alternatively, theelastomeric laminate 302 may have an Average-Dtex of the first pluralityof elastics 316 from about 50 to about 250.

In some embodiments of the elastomeric laminate 302 forming one or moreof a waistband 122, waistcap 123, inner leg cuff 150, outer leg cuff 140and/or a transverse barrier 165 may comprise elastics having anAverage-Pre-Strain from about 75% to about 300%. Alternatively, theelastomeric laminate may comprise elastic elements with anAverage-Pre-Strain of between 100% and 250%.

Any one of the belt 430, side panel 330, ear panel 530, chassis 200,topsheet 124, backsheet 125, waistband 122, waistcap 123, inner leg cuff150, outer leg cuff 140 or transverse barrier may comprise anelastomeric laminate 302 comprising a plurality of elastics 316 having aPres sure-Under-Strand from about 0.1 psi to about 1 psi, or from about0.2 psi to about 0.8 psi.

Any one of the belt 430, side panel 330, ear panel 530, chassis 200,topsheet 124, backsheet 125, waistband 122, waistcap 123, inner leg cuff150, outer leg cuff 140 or transverse barrier may comprise anelastomeric laminate comprising an Air Permeability at 0 gf/mm (noextension) of greater than about 40 cubic meters/square meter/minuteand/or a level of Air Permeability at 3 gf/mm (slight extension) ofgreater than about 60 cubic meters/square meter/minute and/or a level ofAir Permeability at 7 gf/mm (moderate extension) of greater than about80 cubic meters/square meter/minute.

Any one of the belt 430, side panel 330, ear panel 530, chassis 200,topsheet 124, backsheet 125, waistband 122, waistcap 123, inner leg cuff150, outer leg cuff 140 or transverse barrier may comprise anelastomeric laminate comprising a Water Vapor Transmission Rate ofgreater than 2000 g/m2/24 hrs, greater than 4000 g/m2/24 hrs or greaterthan 6000 g/m2/24 hrs.

Any one of the belt 430, side panel 330, ear panel 530, chassis 200,topsheet 124, backsheet 125, waistband 122, waistcap 123, inner leg cuff150, outer leg cuff 140 or transverse barrier may comprise anelastomeric laminate having a Caliper at 0 gf/mm (no extension) of fromabout 0.5 mm to about 4 mm and/or a Caliper Retention value at 3 gf/mm(slight extension) of from about 60% to about 95% and/or a CaliperRetention at 7 gf/mm (moderate extension) of from about 40% to about 90%

Any one of the belt 430, side panel 330, ear panel 530, chassis 200,topsheet 124, backsheet 125, waistband 122, waistcap 123, inner leg cuff150, outer leg cuff 140 or transverse barrier may comprise anelastomeric laminate comprising a Cantilever Bending of less than about40 mm, alternatively less than about 35 mm.

Any one of the belt 430, side panel 330, ear panel 530, chassis 200,topsheet 124, backsheet 125, waistband 122, waistcap 123, inner leg cuff150, outer leg cuff 140 or transverse barrier may comprise anelastomeric laminate comprising a Percent Contact Area of greater thanabout 13% at 100 um and/or greater than about 27% at 200 um and/orgreater than about 39% at 300 um and/or a 2%-98% Height Value of <1.6mm. Alternatively, any one of the belt 430, side panel 330, ear panel530, chassis 200, topsheet 124, backsheet 125, waistband 122, waistcap123, inner leg cuff 150, outer leg cuff 140 or transverse barrier maycomprise an elastomeric laminate comprising a Percent Contact Area ofgreater than about 10% at 100 um and/or greater than about 20% at 200 umand/or greater than about 30% at 300 um and/or a 2%-98% Height Value of<2.2 mm.

Any one of the belt 430, side panel 330, ear panel 530, chassis 200,topsheet 124, backsheet 125, waistband 122, waistcap 123, inner leg cuff150, outer leg cuff 140 or transverse barrier may comprise anelastomeric laminate comprising a Rugosity Frequency of from about 0.2mm⁻¹ to about 1 mm⁻¹ and a Rugosity Wavelength of from about 0.5 mm toabout 5 mm.

It is also to be appreciated that any one of the belt 430, side panel330, ear panel 530, chassis 200, topsheet 124, backsheet 125, waistband122, waistcap 123, inner leg cuff 150, outer leg cuff 140 or transversebarrier may comprise an elastomeric laminate comprising one or more ofthe parametric values and ranges cited herein above.

The elastomeric laminate 302 may comprise an apertured elastomeric filmmaterial, elastic strands, elastomeric scrim materials, elastomericnonwovens, elastic ribbons, foams and combinations thereof. Theelastomeric laminate 302 may comprise a plurality of elastics 316 thatmay be the same color as one or both of the first substrate layer 306and second substrate layer 308 so the elastic material may be morehidden, i.e. masked or may be of a different color so the elasticmaterial is visible in the elastomeric laminate 302. Furthermore, theelastic 316 may be transparent or translucent such that it is virtuallyinvisible. Transparency or translucency combined with the very lowdecitex of the elastic 316 may render the elastic 316 visibly andtactilely unnoticeable by users of absorbent articles comprisingelastomeric laminate 302 comprising such elastics 316.

The elastomeric laminate 302 may comprise a plurality of elastics 316and may be formed from a single beam. The plurality of elastics 316 mayhave a uniform elastic strand spacing or alternatively may have variableelastic strand spacing throughout the elastomeric laminate 302. Theplurality of elastics 316 of the elastomeric laminate may also compriselarger gaps between one or more pairs of elastics wherein the gaps are2× the Average-Strand-Spacing of the plurality of elastics 316. The gapsmay be 4×, 10× or even 20× the Average-Strand-Spacing of the pluralityof elastics 316. The elastomeric laminate 302 may comprise a pluralityof elastics 316 and may be formed from multiple beams of elastic. Afirst beam comprising a first plurality of elastics 316 a and a secondbeam comprising a second plurality of elastics 316 b may both bedisposed between first substrate layer 306 and second substrate layer308 of the elastomeric laminate 302. One or both of the first pluralityof elastics 316 a and second plurality of elastics 316 b may have auniform elastic strand spacing or alternatively may have variableelastic strand spacing throughout. One or both of the first plurality ofelastics 316 a and second plurality of elastics 316 b may compriselarger gaps between one or more pairs of elastics wherein the gaps inthe first plurality of elastics 316 a are 2× the Average-Strand-Spacingof the first plurality of elastics 316 a. The gaps may be 4×, 10× oreven 20× the Average-Strand-Spacing of the first plurality of elastics316 a. Furthermore, the second plurality of elastics 316 b of maycomprise larger gaps between one or more pairs of elastics wherein thegaps in the second plurality of elastics 316 b are 2× theAverage-Strand-Spacing of the second plurality of elastics 316 b. Thegaps may be 4×, 10× or even 20× the Average-Strand-Spacing of the firstplurality of elastics 316 b. The elastomeric laminate 302 comprising aplurality of elastics 316 formed from multiple beams of elastic may havea first plurality of elastics 316 a of a first beam disposed in apartially overlapping orientation with a second plurality of elastics316 b of a second beam. The elastomeric laminate 302 comprising aplurality of elastics 316 formed from multiple beams of elastic may havea first plurality of elastics 316 a of a first beam disposed in anoffset orientation from a second plurality of elastics 316 b of a secondbeam wherein the offset creates a gap between the first plurality ofelastics 316 a and second plurality of elastics 316 b. The gap betweenthe first plurality of elastics 316 a and second plurality of elastics316 b may be 5×, 10× or even 20× the Average-Strand-Spacing of one ofthe first plurality of elastics 316 a or second plurality of elastics316 b.

Any or all portions of the absorbent article 100 may comprise abacteriophage composition as described in U.S. Ser. No. 61/931,229,titled Disposable Absorbent Articles Comprising Bacteriophages andRelated Methods, and filed on Jan. 24, 2014.

Closed-Form Pant Article

Closed-form, pant-style, absorbent articles are generally disclosed inFIGS. 1, 2, 4A-11, 17, 19, 20, 22, 23, 31-33, 35-37, 48, 55, 56, 58,61A-67, and are designed to be packaged in closed-form having a waistopening and two leg openings, and designed to be donned onto the wearerlike a pair of durable underwear. As shown in FIG. 2, the pant maycomprise discrete elastomeric side panels 330 in one or both of thefront waist region 36 and back waist region 38. The elastomeric sidepanels 330 may be formed (joined and/or positioned) in a particularplace or position and may be unitary structurally with other elements ofthe article or as separate discrete elements joined to another elementof the article. When the absorbent article comprises front and backelastomeric side panels 330, the front and back side panels 330 on oneside of the article may be joined permanently or refastenably to eachother and the front and back side panels 330 on the opposing side of thearticle may be joined permanently or refastenably to each other tocreate a waist opening 190 and a pair of leg openings 192. Theelastomeric side panels 330 provide an elastically extensible featurethat provides a more comfortable and contouring fit by initiallyconformably fitting the article 100 to the wearer 70 and sustaining thisfit throughout the time of wear well past when the pant has been loadedwith exudates since the elastomeric side panels 330 allow the sides ofthe pant to expand and contract along with wearer movement. Further, theelastomeric side panels 330 provide ease of application and develop andmaintain wearing forces and tensions to maintain the article 100 on thewearer and enhance the fit. The elastomeric side panels 330 enable easeof application allowing the pant to be pulled conformably over the hipsof the wearer and positioned at the waist where the side panels 330conform to the body and provide tension sufficient to maintain thearticles position on the wearer. The tension created by the side panels330 is transmitted from the elastic side panels 330 along the waistopening 190 and along at least a portion of the leg opening 192.Typically, the chassis 200 is disposed between the side panels 330 andextends to form a portion of the waist edge 136 and/or 138 of the pantcomprising side panels 300. In other words, a portion of the waist edge136 and/or 138 in one or both of the front waist region 36 and backwaist region 38 may be formed in part by the side panels 330 and in partby the chassis 200. The side panels 330 can be integral with a portionof the chassis 200 or may discrete elements that overlap a portion ofthe chassis 200 and are joined thereto. The side panels 330 may beformed in part with an elastomeric film layer 317 (which may beapertured) providing a film side panel portion (or film portion of aside panel—see, for example, FIGS. 16D, 16F, 16G, 16I, 16K) having afirst Section-Modulus or may be formed in part with elastics 316providing a stranded side panel portion having a second Section-Moduluswherein the Section-Modulus of the film side panel portion is greaterthan the Section-Modulus of the stranded side panel portion.

The pant comprising side panels 300 may be formed into a pant in anumber of ways. The discrete elastomeric side panels 330 may be disposedin one or both of the waist regions. Observe that side panels 330 (see,for example FIG. 31) may generically refer to a portion of a belt 430that extends beyond side edges 237 of the chassis 200, whereas discreteside panels attached to a chassis may be referenced as 330 (see, forexample, FIG. 2). The pant comprising side panels 300 may also comprisea pair of laterally opposing refastenable seams 174 as illustrated inFIGS. 1-3. The refastenable side seam 174 may be formed by refastenablyjoining an interior surface of a portion of the article, e.g. a sidepanel 330, to an exterior surface of another portion of the article 100,e.g. a longitudinally opposing side panel 330 or the chassis 200 to formthe refastenable side seam 174. FIG. 3 illustrates a front side panel330 f comprising a fastener 175 comprising hooks facing away from awearer (the fastener 175 disposed on an exterior surface of the frontside panel 330 f that refastenably attaches to a mating fastener 178(loops or a suitable nonwoven in FIG. 3), the mating fastener 178 beingdisposed on an interior surface of the back side panel 330 b. Observethat that FIG. 3 is an alternative embodiment of FIGS. 1 and 2 as thepant of FIGS. 1 and 2 do not comprise a mating fastener 178—rather, thefastener 175 in FIGS. 1 and 2 may refastenably join directly to the backside panels 330. The refastenable seams 174 may comprise a fasteningsystem 179 comprising a primary fastener 175, for example a mechanicalfastener, velcro-like fasteners, hooks, etc., or mating fastener 178,for example a nonwoven or loop material intended to mate with a hookfastener, disposed on one or more of the discrete elastomeric sidepanels 330, for example a first portion of a fastening system 179 may bedisposed on a first discrete elastomeric side panel 330 and a secondportion of a fastening system 179 may be disposed on a second discreteelastomeric side panel 330. Several options for refastenable seams areillustrated in FIGS. 24-29. Alternatively, the pant comprising sidepanels 300 may also comprise a first permanent side seam 172 and alaterally opposing second permanent side seam 172 as illustrated, forexample, in FIGS. 8A, 8B, and 10. The permanent side seam 172 may beformed by joining an interior surface of a portion of the article 100,e.g. a side panel 330, to an exterior surface of another portion of thearticle 100, e.g. a longitudinally opposing side panel 330 or thechassis 200 to form the permanent side seam 172. Alternatively, thepermanent side seam 172 may be formed by joining an interior surface ofa portion of the article 100, e.g. a side panel 330, to an interiorsurface of another portion of the article 100, e.g. a longitudinallyopposing side panel 330 to form the permanent side seam 172. Any of thepant comprising side panels 300 configurations described above maycomprise a waistband 122 wherein at least a portion of the waistband 122(as illustrated in FIG. 2) is disposed at or immediately adjacent thewaist edge 136 and/or 138 and overlaps a portion of the center chassis200. The waistband 122 may extend laterally to overlap portions of theinner leg cuffs 150 and/or portions of the elastomeric side panels 330.The waistband 122 may be disposed on the interior surface 202 of thechassis 200 or alternatively between the topsheet 124 and the backsheet125.

As illustrated in FIGS. 10 and 11, the belt pant 400, closed-formarticle, may comprise elastomeric belts 430 in both of the front waistregion 36 and back waist region 38. The elastomeric belts 430 may beformed (joined and/or positioned) in a particular place or position andmay be unitary structurally with other elements of the article 100 or asseparate discrete elements joined to another element of the article 100.When the absorbent article comprises front and back elastomeric belts430, the belt 430 in one waist region of the article may be joinedpermanently or refastenably to the belt 430 in the opposing waist regionof the article to create a waist opening 190 and a pair of leg openings192. The elastomeric belts 430 provide an elastically extensible featurethat provides a more comfortable and contouring fit by initiallyconformably fitting the article 100 to the wearer 70 and sustaining thisfit throughout the time of wear well past when the article has beenloaded with exudates since the elastic belts 430 allow the waist andsides of the diaper to expand and contract along with the movements ofthe wearer 70. Further, the elastic belts 430 provide ease ofapplication and develop and maintain wearing forces and tensions tomaintain the article 100 on the wearer and enhance the fit. Theelastomeric belts 430 enable ease of application allowing the pant to bepulled conformably over the hips of the wearer and positioned at thewaist where the belts 430 conform to the body and provide tensionsufficient to maintain the articles position on the wearer. The tensioncreated by the belts 430 is transmitted from the elastic belts 430 alongthe waist opening 190 and along at least a portion of the leg opening192. The elastomeric belts 430 may be formed in part with elasticstrands providing a stranded belt having a belt Section-Modulus whereinbelt Section-Modulus of the stranded belt is less than theSection-Modulus of a film side panel 330 described herein. Thisdifference in Section-Modulus enables extension of the elastomeric belt430 at a lower force than that of an elastomeric film side panel 330thereby making application of the belt pant 400 (with an elastomericstranded belt 430) by a wearer easier than a pant comprising side panels300 (with an elastomeric film side panel 330) enabling the wearer todevelop skills valuable for their physiological and psychologicaldevelopment.

As disclosed in U.S. Ser. No. 11/999,229 the pant may comprise graphics.For instance, one or both of the elastomeric belts 430 may comprise oneor more of an arrangement of belt graphics covering greater than about30% of the surface area of the belt 430 and/or an arrangement of beltgraphics when viewed from the outside appear to comprise at least threecolors and/or an arrangement of belt graphics being disposed within 30mm of a waist edge 438 of the belt 430 and/or an arrangement of beltgraphics being disposed within about 10 mm of a leg edge 436 (front legedge 436F or back leg edge 436B) of the belt 430 as illustrated in FIGS.20 and 72B. One or both of the elastomeric belts 430 may comprise one ormore of a belt graphic 499 and/or a colored nonwoven and/or a tintednonwoven.

As shown in FIGS. 10-12, 13A and 14A, the first and second elastomericbelts 430 may be discrete and longitudinally opposed, wherein the firstelastomeric belt 430 is disposed in a first waist region and the secondelastomeric belt 430 is disposed in a second waist region. Thelongitudinally opposed belts 430 may be joined along the side edges 437of the belts 430 by permanent seams 172. The permanent seam 172 may beformed by joining an interior surface of a portion of the article 100,e.g. a belt 430, to an exterior surface of another portion of thearticle 100, e.g. a longitudinally opposing belt 430 or the chassis 200to form the permanent seam 172. Alternatively, the permanent seam 172may be formed by joining an interior surface of a portion of the article100, e.g. a belt 430, to an interior surface of another portion of thearticle 100, e.g. a longitudinally opposing belt 430 to form thepermanent seam 172. Alternatively, as shown in FIGS. 22-29 thelongitudinally opposed belts 430 may be joined at or adjacent the sideedges 437 of the belts 430 by refastenable seams 174. FIGS. 24-29 showcross-sections of multiple acceptable alternative embodiments of therefastenable seam 174. The refastenable seam 174 may be formed byrefastenably joining an interior surface of a portion of the article100, e.g. a belt 430, to an exterior surface of another portion of thearticle 100, e.g. a longitudinally opposing belt 430 or the chassis 200to form the refastenable seam 174. Alternatively, as disclosed in U.S.Ser. No. 13/929,970 the refastenable seam 174 may comprise anintermediate member which may be permanently or refastenably joined toone of the belts 430 and the intermediate member is refastenably joinedto one of the interior surface or exterior surface of a portion of thearticle 100, e.g. the opposing belt 430 or the chassis 200 to form therefastenable seam 174. Alternatively, one or both of the first andsecond elastomeric belts 430 may comprise an inner belt layer 432 and anouter belt layer 434. The inner belt layer 432 and/or the outer beltlayer 434 of the first and second elastomeric belts 430 may be formed bya common belt layer as shown in FIGS. 13B and 14B. When the first andsecond elastomeric belts 430 have a common belt layer, the common beltlayer may extend from a first waist edge in a first waist region to alongitudinally opposing second waist edge in a second waist region, i.e.front waist edge 136 to back waist edge 138. The belt pant 400 may havea first elastomeric belt 430 disposed in a first waist region having afirst longitudinal length and a second elastomeric belt 430 disposed ina second waist region having a second longitudinal length wherein thelongitudinal length of the first belt is greater than the longitudinallength of the second belt along the side edge of the belt at or adjacentthe side seam as illustrated in FIGS. 11, 31, 32, 37, and 55. Thislength difference helps provide buttock coverage in the back of the pantproviding a more underwear-like appearance.

The belt pant 400 may comprise belts 430 having apertured nonwovens(comprising apertures 160—see FIGS. 4A and 4B) forming one or both ofthe inner belt layer 432 and outer belt layer 434, as well as throughany intermediate nonwoven or elastic layers (e.g., 131). The aperturednonwoven belt layers provide increased breathability and significant airpermeability as well as increased softness and a more garment-like feel.The belt layers, outer belt layer 434 and/or inner belt layer 432 (firstsubstrate layer 306 and second substrate layer 308 of elastomericlaminate 302) may be apertured prior to forming the elastomeric belt 430or elastomeric laminate 302. Alternatively, the belt 430 comprising theouter belt layer 434 and inner belt layer 432 with a plurality ofelastics 316 disposed between the outer and inner belt layers may beapertured after the elastomeric belt is formed. Likewise, theelastomeric laminate 302 comprising a first substrate layer 306, secondsubstrate layer 308 and plurality of elastics 316 disposed between thefirst and second substrate layers may be apertured after the elastomericlaminate 302 is formed. Other article components may also have likeapertures in the inner and/or outer layers or elastomeric laminate 302,including the center chassis 200, topsheet 124, waistband 122, waist cap123, ear panels 530, side panels 330, outer cover nonwoven and outer legcuffs 140. The apertures may come in a variety of shapes and sizesincluding but not limited to round holes, elongated holes, slits, slots,arcuate slits or slots, etc.

FIG. 23 is a simplified plan view of the precursor structure (in that itis not formed into a pant having a waist opening and two leg openings)of the pant absorbent article 100 shown in FIG. 1, shown prior tojoining of front and rear waist regions 36, 38 along their respectiveside edges 437. To form pant absorbent article 100, the precursorstructure may be folded along lateral axis 44 to bring front and rearwaist regions 36, 38 together such that their sides may be joined at oradjacent the side edges 437 along the refastenable seams 174 (as shownin FIG. 1). The embodiment shown in FIG. 23 comprises a fastening system179 having a fastener 175 and a mating fastener 178 that may berefastenably joined together. Particularly, fastener 175 may be formedwith hook elements that join with mating fastener 178 which may beformed with loop elements. Fastener elements 175 may be disposed on anexterior surface of the absorbent article 100, but they may also beplaced on an interior surface of the absorbent article 100. MatingFastener elements 178 may be a discrete member of loop elements or maybe an area of loop elements that is part of a nonwoven sheet lining theinterior (as shown in FIG. 2) or exterior of the absorbent article 100.

It is understood that when the fastening elements 175 and 178 mateinterior surface to interior surface of the absorbent article 100, aflange seam is formed. But, when the fastening elements 175 and 178 mateinterior surface to exterior surface of the absorbent article 100, anoverlap seam is formed, as illustrated in FIG. 1. The fastening elements175 and 178 may be fastened during the manufacturing process and/orfastened in the package prior to use by the wearer or caregiver (i.e.,the pant may be sold in “closed-form”). Alternatively, the pant may besold in “open-form,” where the fastening elements 175 and 178 arepresent but are not joined in the package.

Referring to FIGS. 12 and 34, one or both of front and rear waistregions 36, 38 may include an elastomeric laminate 302 of the presentdisclosure forming at least a portion of one or both of the front andback waist end edges 136, 138 and at least a portion of the leg opening192. As suggested in FIG. 23, one or a plurality of elastic membersforming a portion of the elastomeric laminate 302 at or adjacent thewaist may be disposed in a substantially straight lateral orientation,and one or a plurality of leg elastic members forming a portion of theelastomeric laminate 302 at or adjacent the leg opening 192 may bedisposed along curvilinear paths to provide hoop wise elastic stretchabout the leg openings 192.

Elastic members forming the elastomeric laminate 302, may be in the formof film (e.g., 317) or sections or strips thereof, strips, ribbons,bands, scrims, elastic nonwovens, elastic fibers or strands of circularor any other cross-section, or combinations thereof formed in anyconfiguration of any elastomeric material such as described in, forexample, co-pending U.S. application Ser. Nos. 11/478,386 and13/331,695, and U.S. Pat. No. 6,626,879. A suitable example is LYCRAHYFIT strands, a product of Invista, Wichita, Kans. Some strands forexample the aforementioned LYCRA HYFIT may comprise a number ofindividual fibers wound together to form the strand. With regard toelastic strands formed of a number of individual fibers it has beendiscovered that the individual fibers can move relative to each otherchanging the cross sectional shape of the strand as well as becomingunraveled which can lead to poor control of the strands as well as poorbonding/adhering/joining of the elastic strands to one or both of thefirst substrate layer 306 and second substrate layer 308 of theelastomeric laminate 302. In order to minimize the negatives with regardto strands comprising a plurality of fibers it would be advantageous tominimize the number of fibers in a given strand. It would therefore bedesirable to have less than about 40 fibers per strand, less than about30 fibers per strand, less than about 20 fibers per strand, less thanabout 10 fibers per strand, less than about 5 fibers per strand and 1fiber forming the strand. In the case of a single fiber forming thestrand which can deliver comparable performance to the multi-fiberstrands of the prior art it would be desireable for the fiber to have afiber decitex from about 22 to about 300 and a fiber diameter from about50 micrometers to about 185 micrometers.

FIGS. 15A-16K are examples of potential longitudinal partialcross-sections taken along the longitudinal axis 42 through the rearwaist region 38 of the elasticized belt and rear region of the pant asshown in FIG. 20, depicting possible configurations. It can beappreciated that in each of these particular examples, the cross-sectionmay substantially mirror a cross-section taken through the front waistregion 36 of the elasticized belt 430 and the front region 36 of thepant 100.

Still referring to FIGS. 15A-16K, chassis 200 may have liquid permeabletopsheet 124 forming at least a portion of its inner, wearer-facingsurface. Topsheet 124 may be formed of a nonwoven web material which ispreferably soft and compatible with sensitive skin, and may be formed ofand have any of the features of topsheets used in disposable diapers,training pants and inserts including those described in, for example,co-pending U.S. application Ser. No. 12/841,553. Chassis 200 may alsohave an outward-facing backsheet 125, which may be liquid impermeable.Backsheet 125 may be formed of and have any of the features ofbacksheets used in disposable diapers and training pants including thosedescribed in, for example, the co-pending U.S. patent applicationreferenced immediately above. Chassis 200 may also have an absorbentcore 128 disposed between topsheet 124 and backsheet 125. Absorbent core128 may include one or more absorbent acquisition, distribution andstorage material layers and/or components; it may be formed of and haveany of the features of absorbent cores used in disposable diapers andtraining pants.

As suggested in FIGS. 15A-16K, the chassis 200 may be affixed to anelastomeric laminate 302, to the inner, wearer-facing side thereof, oralternatively, to the outer, garment-facing surface thereof. Chassis 200may be joined to the elastomeric laminate 302 by adhesive, by thermalbonds/welds, mechanical fasteners or a combination thereof. Theelastomeric laminate 302, in the form of belts 430 for example, maycomprise an elastomeric nonwoven, elastic films, ribbons, scrims,strands or combinations thereof—see FIG. 16G illustrating a belt 430comprising a film layer 317 in combination with strands 316 a and 316 b.The elastomeric laminate 302 may be pre-strained prior to joining theelastomeric laminate 302 to the other layers of the article or it may bejoined in a relaxed state and subsequently mechanically strained; insuch an embodiment, the one or more waist elastic members and the one ormore leg elastic members of the elastomeric laminate may be disposedbetween a first substrate layer 306 and a second substrate layer 308.

It should be understood that the elastomeric laminates 302 may be formedin part in accordance with FIGS. 15A-16K as disclosed herein above, aswell as in accordance with the disclosure of U.S. 61/646,999, filed onMay 15, 2012. Further methods of manufacture and the resulting textureas disclosed by U.S. Ser. Nos. 61/647,061, 61/647,071, 61/647,078, eachfiled on May 15, 2012, may be used, as well. And, portions of theelastomeric laminates 302 may incorporate the stress, strain, andspacing of the elastics as disclosed in U.S. Ser. No. 61/598,012, filedFeb. 13, 2012. Texture zones 318 may be disposed along the waist edgesand leg edges as illustrated in FIG. 5A or along a central area of thearticle as disclosed in FIG. 5B.

One or more of the absorbent articles described above may comprisetexture zones 318 disposed on the chassis 200, as well as on one or eachof the side panels 330, elastomeric ear panels 530, belts 430, inner legcuffs 150, outer leg cuffs 140, waistbands 122, waistcaps 123, chassis200, topsheet 124 and backsheet 125 such that the texture zones aresubstantially aligned with each other or they collectively form a largetextured zone or unified textural appearance. An overall texturalappearance is desired to deliver a holistic garment-like look and feel.It is therefore beneficial if two or more of the aforementionedabsorbent article structures (chassis 200, side panels 330, elastomericear panels 530, non-elastomeric ear panel 540, belts 430, inner legcuffs 150, outer leg cuffs 140, waistbands 122, waistcaps 123, topsheet124 and backsheet 125) comprise materials having one or more identicalor substantially identical structural elements selected from the groupof Average-Dtex between 10 decitex and 500 decitex (within a +/−50decitex range), Average-Strand-Spacing from about 0.25 mm to about 5.0mm (within a +/−1 mm range), Average-Pre-Strain from about 50% to about400% (within a +/−50% range), a substrate basis weight from about 6grams per square meter to about 30 grams per square meter (within a +/−5grams per square meter range) and substrate, e.g. nonwoven layer,texture.

One or more of the absorbent articles described above may comprise achassis 200 comprising one or more chassis graphics 299 (see FIG. 20)disposed on or in an overlapping orientation with the chassis 200 and/ora colored backsheet film and/or a tinted backsheet film and/or a colorednonwoven and/or a tinted nonwoven. One or more of the absorbent articlesdescribed above may also comprise a chassis 200 comprising one or morechassis graphics 299 disposed on or in an overlapping orientation withthe chassis 200 and/or a colored nonwoven and/or a tinted nonwoven andone or more graphics from the group consisting of side panel graphics399 (see FIG. 67), ear graphics 599 (see FIG. 68), belt graphics 499(see FIG. 20), waistband graphics 699 (see FIG. 40), and/or outer legcuff graphics 799 (see FIG. 35), wherein the one or more chassisgraphics on the chassis 200 and the one or more graphics disposed on theside panel 330, ear panel 530, belt 430, ear panel 540, waistband 122,and/or outer leg cuff 140 are substantially aligned with each other orthey collectively form unified graphic elements or an overall graphicalexperience.

Donning

The donning benefit of the present disclosure is enabled by elastomericlaminates comprising a greater number of elastic strands having agreater fineness (e.g, a smaller decitex) and a closer spacing than hasbeen previously disclosed or practiced in disposable absorbent articles.These improved laminates can be used as disposable absorbent article(for example, baby and adult taped diapers, baby and adult pants,feminine pads, and feminine liners) components to achieve a variety ofbenefits in conjunction with and beyond donning, including fit andgasketing at the waist, legs, crotch and sides of the wearer togenerally provide the greatest level of extensibility, the mostcomfortable wearing conditions, improved skin condition (i.e., reducedskin marking), improved leakage protection and a better fit.

Donning-Ratio

Donning ease can be assessed by a Donning-Ratio, as illustrated in FIG.85. A Donning-Ratio of less than 1 indicates that the consumer's hipwidth is less than the Relaxed-Product-Waist-Width. Donning-Ratio's lessthan 1 are not desirable since the products contracted width is greaterthan the wearer's hip width, and thus, would deliver insufficientpressure against the body to sustain fit. A Donning-Ratio of greaterthan 1 indicates that the consumer's hip width is greater than theRelaxed-Product-Waist-Width. Donning-Ratio's that approach withoutfalling below 1, while also delivering sufficient pressure for fit, aredesirable for ease of donning, wearer comfort, pressure on skin, etc.Donning-Ratio's greater than 2 or even 3 are within the scope of thepresent disclosure, but require a unique balance of elastic decitex,elastic strand spacing, number of elastics and elastic pre-strain todeliver such a unique blend of properties. The unique set of propertiesrequires elastic decitex that are very low, well below that of the priorart, disposed at elastic to elastic spacing that are also very low, alsowell below the prior art, which in turn requires a larger number ofelastics well above that known in the prior art, and elastic strainsthat are also low and well below nearly all of the known prior art. Thespecific set of criteria required to deliver against the aforementionedunmet consumer needs with a single product not only requires uniqueelastomeric laminate structures but it requires a new process, beamedelastic (a plurality of elastics formed on and delivered from a beam orspool), for delivery of such a large number of low decitex elastics, atlow pre-strain and low spacing in order to achieve the right balance oflaminate properties. These unique properties enable a higher donningratio while delivering low force on the skin, Pressure-Under-Strand,ease of application, comfort, fit, etc. Such an approach to the best ofour knowledge has never before been disclosed or attempted in the fieldof absorbent articles; hygiene articles, taped diapers, diaper pants,adult incontinence articles, menstrual products, etc.

The Donning-Ratio is calculated as:

Donning-Ratio=Target-Hip/[2*Relaxed-Product-Waist-Width]

The Donning-Ratio is unitless. Both the Target-Hip andRelaxed-Product-Waist-Width are in mm.

FIG. 87 shows that for over 90% of consumers, their hip circumference isgreater than their waist circumference. Therefore, when donning aclosed-form pant, pulling it up over the hip represents the largest bodyregion the pant needs to stretch over.

A product's size range is conveyed to consumers by a weight range and/ora waist range printed on the package. For products recommended by weightrange, a Target-Weight is the average of the minimum and maximumrecommended weights.

For many adult incontinence products, only a waist recommendation isprovided. For these products, a Target-Weight can still be determined bycalculating the Average Weight at the minimum and maximum recommendedwaists. FIG. 88 shows this relationship and calculation.

Average Weight (kg)=6.8142163*Waist (mm){circumflex over( )}0.5−130.72567

Once the Target-Weight for a product is determined, its correspondingTarget-Hip is determined as shown on FIG. 89.

Target-Hip (mm)=102.48574+108.62219*Weight (kg){circumflex over ( )}0.5

The tables below show examples of currently marketed strandedclosed-form products. The Donning-Ratio's for all are greater than 1.5,with some being as high as 3.0. The tables below illustrate someinventive examples utilizing elastomeric laminates of the presentdisclosure. The Donning-Ratio's as disclosed herein will make thedonning of each easier for consumers and care givers.

Examples of Donning-Ratio for Existing Stranded Products Minimum MaximumAverage Relaxed Weight Weight Targeted Targeted Product Donning- TargetTarget Weight Hip Waist Ratio (kg) (kg) (kg) (mm) Width (mm) (unitless)Moony Man Air Fit size S 4 8 6.0 369 122 1.51 size M 5 9 7.0 390 1111.76 size LG 9 14 11.5 471 129 1.82 size BIG 12 17 14.5 516 146 1.76size BIGGER THAN BIG 13 25 19.0 576 139 2.07 size SUPER 18 35 26.5 662152 2.17 Goo.N Yawaraka Fit Pants size S 5 9 7.0 390 93 2.10 size M 7 129.5 437 84 2.59 size LG 9 14 11.5 471 92 2.56 size BIG 12 20 16.0 537105 2.55 size BIGGER THAN BIG 13 25 19.0 576 96 3.01 size SUPER 15 3525.0 646 117 2.76 Pampers Sara Sara Pants size S 4 8 6.0 369 111 1.66size M 6 10 8.0 410 89 2.31 size L 9 14 11.5 471 102 2.30 MerriesPull-Ups size M 6 10 8.0 410 125 1.64 size L 9 14 11.5 471 131 1.79Depend Fit-Flex Underwear for Women-Moderate size S/M 711 1016 69 1003230 2.18 size L 965 1270 97 1170 231 2.53 size XL 1219 1626 126 1320 2492.65 Always Discreet Boutique size S/M 711 1016 69 1003 286 1.75 size L965 1270 97 1170 304 1.92

Examples of Donning-Ratio for Inventive Products Inventive MinimumMaximum Average Relaxed Donning- Beamed Weight Weight Targeted TargetedProduct Waist Ratio Product Target (kg) Target (kg) Weight (kg) Hip (mm)Width (mm) (unitless) size M 6 10 8 410 145 1.41 size L 9 14 12 471 1701.38 size S/M 711 1016 69 1003 340 1.48 size L 965 1270 97 1170 400 1.46

FIGS. 91A and 91B illustrate the interdependence between: stranddecitex; strand spacing; Section-Modulus; Donning-Ratio andPressure-Under-Strand, and how the unique properties enabled by theelastomeric laminates of the present invention are able to deliver lowpressure on the skin, comfortable fit and donning ease while deliveringa sufficient hoop force of 7 gf/mm providing sustained fit and gasketingof the article. While this particular example utilizes an Average-Dtexof 150 and a hoop pressure on the body of 7 gf/mm, the relativerelationships between the various metrics remain consistent. FIG. 91Ashows that as strand spacing decreases, the Donning-Ratio lessens(making donning easier) due to lower required pre-strain needed todeliver the 7 gf/mm thereby enabling improved donning while maintainingthe requisite forces for fit and gasketing. FIG. 91B shows that as thestrand spacing decreases, the corresponding Pressure-Under-Stranddecreases while maintaining a hoop pressure on the body of 7 gf/mmthereby maximizing overall comfort and skin health while maintaining therequisite forces for fit and gasketing of the article.

Open-Form Taped Article

Open-form, taped-style, absorbent articles are generally disclosed inFIGS. 38-47 and 84. The taped diaper 500, open-form taped article, maycomprise elastomeric ear panels 530 in one or both of the front waistregion 36 and back waist region 38. The elastomeric ear panels 530 maybe formed (joined and/or positioned) in a particular place or positionand may be unitary structurally with other elements of the article 100or as a separate element joined to another element of the article 100.The elastomeric ear panels 530 provide an elastically extensible featurethat provides a more comfortable and contouring fit by initiallyconformably fitting the article 100 to the wearer and sustaining thisfit throughout the time of wear well past when the taped diaper 500 hasbeen loaded with exudates since the elastomeric ear panels 530 allowsthe diaper to expand and contract to fit the wearer 70 and compensatefor movements of the wearer 70. Further, the elastomeric ear panels 530develop and maintain wearing forces (tensions) and enhance the tensionsdeveloped and maintained by the fastening system 179, primary fasteners175, to maintain the article 100 on the wearer and enhance the fit. Theelastomeric ear panels 530 especially assist in maintaining the primaryline of tension formed by the fastening system 179 allowing the diaperto conformably fit over the hips of the wearer where there is dynamicmotion, and initially pre-tensioning the waist opening 190 and legopening 192 since the diaperer typically stretches the elastomeric earpanels 530 when applying the taped diaper 500 on the wearer so that whenthe elastomeric ear panels 530 contract, tension is transmitted from theelastomeric ear panels 530 along the waist opening 190 and along atleast a portion of the leg opening 192. The elastomeric ear panels 530further provide more effective application of the diaper since even ifthe diaperer pulls one elastomeric ear panel further than the otherduring application (asymmetrically), the diaper will “self-adjust”during wear. While the open-form article of the present disclosure mayhave the elastomeric ear panels 530 disposed in the back waist region38, alternatively, the taped diaper 500 may be provided with elastomericear panels 530 disposed in the front waist region 36 or in both thefront waist region 36 and the back waist region 38. The open-formarticle may also have elastomeric ear panels 530 disposed in a firstwaist region and elastomeric ear panels 530 or non-elastomeric earpanels 540 disposed in a second waist region.

As shown in FIGS. 38-40 and 45-47 the taped diaper 500, open-form, maycomprise first and second elastomeric ear panels 530 disposed in a firstwaist region. The taped diaper may also comprise an elastomericwaistband 122 disposed in one or both waist regions. The taped diapermay also comprise a substantially rectangular chassis 200.

In addition to a pair of laterally opposing elastomeric ear panels 530in a first waist region the tape diaper 500 may comprise a pair oflaterally opposing discrete non-elastomeric ear panels 540 disposed in asecond waist region, wherein one or both of the ear panels 530 and theear panels 540 are non-rectangular as shown in FIG. 38. Alternatively,as illustrated in FIG. 39, the tape diaper may comprise a pair oflaterally opposing elastomeric ear panels 530 disposed in a first waistregion and a pair of laterally opposing integral non-elastomeric earpanels 540 formed in part by a portion of one or more of the backsheet125, topsheet 124, outer leg cuff 140, or landing zone and beingdisposed in a second waist region.

The taped diaper 500 may comprise first and second non-elastomeric earpanels 540 disposed in a first waist region and an elastomeric waistband122 disposed in a first waist region as illustrated in FIG. 39.

The elastomeric waistband 122 may have a lateral width that is >60% of alateral width of the center chassis 200 and the center chassis maycomprise a pair of laterally opposing fasteners 175 disposed in the samewaist region as the waistband 122. The taped diaper 500 may have awaistband 122 that may overlap portions of two or more of an absorbentcore 128 and/or a topsheet 124 and/or the inner leg cuffs 150 asillustrated in FIG. 41.

The taped diaper 500 may comprise a pair of laterally opposing front earpanels 540 joined to the chassis 200 in the front waist region 36 and apair of laterally opposing elastomeric ear panels 530 joined to thechassis 200 in the back waist region 38. The chassis 200 of the tapeddiaper 500 may be substantially rectangular as shown in FIGS. 38 and 45.Alternatively the chassis 200 may be non-rectangular, e.g. a portion ofthe laterally opposing side edges 237 or a portion of the longitudinallyopposing end edges 136 and 138 of the chassis may be notched or curvedeither convexly or concavely as shown in FIG. 39 and FIG. 47.

In an alternative embodiment illustrated in FIGS. 42 and 43 theopen-form, taped-style, absorbent articles may comprise an elastomericbelt 430 disposed in one of the waist regions. The elastomeric belt 430may be formed (joined and/or positioned) in a particular place orposition and may be unitary structurally with other elements of thearticle 100 or as a separate element joined to another element of thearticle 100. The elastomeric belt 430 provides an elastically extensiblefeature that provides a more comfortable and contouring fit by initiallyconformably fitting the article 100 to the wearer and sustaining thisfit throughout the time of wear well past when the taped diaper 500 hasbeen loaded with exudates. In a preferred embodiment of a belted tapeddiaper the elastomeric belt 430 is disposed in the back waist region 38.The elastomeric belt 430 may have fasteners disposed at or adjacent thelaterally opposing ends of the belt. The fasteners 175, disposed on theinterior surface of the belt 430 are designed to engage with a matingfastening component 178 or with the exterior surface 204 of the articleto fasten the article on the wearer.

Topsheets

The absorbent articles 100 of the present disclosure may comprise atopsheet 124. The topsheet 124 is the part of the absorbent article 100that is in contact with the wearer's skin. The topsheet 124 may bejoined to portions of the backsheet 125, the absorbent core 128, the legcuffs 52, and/or any other layers as is known to those of ordinary skillin the art. The topsheet 124 may be compliant, soft-feeling, andnon-irritating to the wearer's skin. Further, at least a portion of, orall of, the topsheet may be liquid permeable, permitting liquid bodilyexudates to readily penetrate through its thickness. A suitable topsheetmay be manufactured from a wide range of materials, such as porousfoams, reticulated foams, apertured plastic films, woven materials,nonwoven materials, woven or nonwoven materials of natural fibers (e.g.,wood or cotton fibers), synthetic fibers or filaments (e.g., polyesteror polypropylene or bicomponent PE/PP fibers or mixtures thereof), or acombination of natural and synthetic fibers. The topsheet may have oneor more layers. The topsheet may be apertured, may have any suitablethree-dimensional features, and/or may have a plurality of embossments(e.g., a bond pattern). The topsheet may be apertured by overbonding amaterial and then rupturing the overbonds through ring rolling, such asdisclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,628,097, to Benson et al., issued on May13, 1997 and disclosed in U.S. Pat. Appl. Publication No. US2016/0136014 to Arora et al. Any portion of the topsheet may be coatedwith a skin care composition, an antibacterial agent, a surfactant,and/or other beneficial agents. The topsheet may be hydrophilic orhydrophobic or may have hydrophilic and/or hydrophobic portions orlayers. If the topsheet is hydrophobic, typically apertures will bepresent so that bodily exudates may pass through the topsheet.

Typical absorbent article topsheets have a basis weight of from about 5gsm to about 50 gsm, from about 10 to about 35 gsm or from about 12 toabout 30 gsm, but other basis weights are within the scope of thepresent disclosure.

Absorbent articles of the present disclosure may comprisethree-dimensional, liquid permeable substrates forming a portion of orall of the topsheet 124 as described in U.S. Ser. Nos. 14/656,820;14/680,394; and Ser. No. 14/680,426. These substrates may also compriseapertures. The texture of the three dimensional substrates forming thetopsheet may be identical or substantially identical to substratesforming one or both surfaces of one or more of the chassis 200, sidepanels 330, elastomeric ear panels 530, non-elastomeric ear panel 540,belts 430, inner leg cuffs 150, outer leg cuffs 140, waistbands 122,waistcaps 123 and backsheet 125.

The topsheet 124 may also comprise topsheet graphics disposed on one orboth surfaces of the topsheet 124. The topsheet graphics may becoordinated with graphics on other components of the article 100, e.g.chassis 200, side panel 330, ear panel 530, belt 430, waistband 122 andbacksheet 125. In addition, graphics may be disposed on the exterior ofthe article 100 that coordinate with the topsheet graphics to make theabsorbent article 100 have the appearance of underwear wherein theinterior of the article has a similar pattern, color, etc. to theexterior of the article 100. The graphics may also highlight variousstructural elements within the article, e.g. the channels in theabsorbent core.

A portion or the entirety of the topsheet may comprise a first substratelayer 306 and a second substrate layer 308 and may also comprise anelastic material, for example elastic strands 316, disposed between thefirst and second substrate layers 306 and 308. The first substrate layer306 and the second substrate layer 308 may be separate and discretelayers or alternatively the first substrate layer 306 and secondsubstrate layer 308 may be formed from a single web of material that isfolded to form the first substrate layer 306 and second substrate layer308 as described previously. In some configurations of the topsheet, theelastic material forming the topsheet may be an elastomeric laminate 302and may comprise a plurality of elastic strands 316. The topsheet mayfurther comprise one or more large apertures intended to allow bodilyexudates to pass easily there through.

Backsheets

The absorbent article 100 of the present disclosure may comprise abacksheet 125. The backsheet 125 is generally that portion of theabsorbent article 100 positioned proximate to the garment-facing surfaceof the absorbent core 128. The backsheet 125 may be joined to portionsof the topsheet 124, the absorbent core 128, and/or any other layers ofthe absorbent article by any attachment methods known to those of skillin the art. The backsheet film 126 prevents, or at least inhibits, thebodily exudates absorbed and contained in the absorbent core 128 fromsoiling articles such as bedsheets, undergarments, and/or clothing. Thebacksheet is typically liquid impermeable, or at least substantiallyliquid impermeable. The backsheet may, for example, be or comprise athin plastic film, such as a thermoplastic film having a thickness ofabout 0.012 mm to about 0.051 mm. Other suitable backsheet materials mayinclude breathable materials which permit vapors to escape from theabsorbent article, while still preventing, or at least inhibiting,bodily exudates from passing through the backsheet.

A portion or the entirety of the backsheet 125 may be formed by anelastomeric laminate 302 comprising a first substrate layer 306 and asecond substrate layer 308 and an elastic material, for example elasticstrands 316, disposed between the first and second substrate layers 306and 308. The first substrate layer 306 and the second substrate layer308 may be separate and discrete layers or alternatively the firstsubstrate layer 306 and second substrate layer 308 may be formed from asingle web of material that is folded to form the first substrate layer306 and second substrate layer 308 as described previously. In someconfigurations the backsheet film 126 of the backsheet 125, may form thefirst substrate layer 306 and the backsheet nonwoven 127 may form thesecond substrate layer 308 of the elastomeric laminate 302. In analternative embodiment, one of the belt layers, inner belt layer 432 orouter belt layer 434 may form one of the first or second substratelayers 306 and 308 of the elastomeric laminate 302 overlaying andforming a portion of the backsheet 125 in the crotch region 37 of theabsorbent article 100.

Leg Cuffs

The absorbent articles 100 of the present disclosure may comprise legcuffs 52, which include inner leg cuffs 150 and outer leg cuffs 140. Theinner leg cuffs 150 may be positioned laterally proximal of outer legcuffs 140. Each barrier leg cuff 32 may be formed by a piece of materialwhich is bonded to the absorbent article 100 so it can extend upwardsfrom a wearer-facing surface of the absorbent article 100 and provideimproved containment of body exudates approximately at the junction ofthe torso and legs of the wearer. The inner leg cuffs 150 are delimitedby a proximal edge joined directly or indirectly to the topsheet and/orthe backsheet and a free terminal edge, which is intended to contact andform a seal with the wearer's skin. The inner leg cuffs 150 may extendat least partially between the front end edge 136 and the back end edge138 of the absorbent article 100 on opposite sides of the longitudinalaxis 42 and may be at least present in the crotch region 37. The innerleg cuffs 150 may each comprise one or more elastics 316 (e.g., elasticstrands or strips) near or at the free terminal edge. These elastics3316 cause the inner leg cuffs 150 to help form a seal around the legsand torso of a wearer. The outer leg cuffs 140 extend at least partiallybetween the front end edge 136 and the back end edge 138. The outer legcuffs 140 essentially cause portions of the absorbent article 100proximate to the chassis side edges 237 a and 237 b to help form a sealaround the legs of the wearer. The outer leg cuffs 140 may extend atleast within the crotch region 37.

The absorbent article 100 may comprise an outer leg cuff 140 formed by afilm, e.g. the backsheet film 126, a nonwoven, and an elastic materialdisposed between the backsheet film 126 and the nonwoven at or adjacentthe side edge 237 of the chassis 200. Alternatively, as illustrated inFIGS. 52-54, the absorbent article 100 may comprise an inner leg cuff150 and/or an outer leg cuff 140 wherein one or both of the inner legcuff 150 the outer leg cuff 140 may be formed from a folded nonwoven weband comprise inner cuff elastics 154 and outer cuff elastics 144disposed between layers of the folded nonwoven web. Wherein a first foldin the folded nonwoven web forms the proximal edge 152 of the inner legcuff 150 and a second fold in the folded nonwoven web forms the distaledge 142 of the outer leg cuff 140. The distal edge 142 of the outer legcuff 140 may extend beyond the side edges of the backsheet and form aportion of the side edge 237 of the chassis 200 as illustrated in FIGS.39 and 46. A portion of the outer leg cuff 140 may be formed by a foldednonwoven web with elastic elements 316 disposed between layers of thefolded nonwoven and may extend outwardly from the side edges of thebacksheet 125 forming a portion of the side edge 237 of the chassis 200providing a finished more cloth-like outer cuff thereby providing a moreunderwear-like appearance.

The web of material forming at least a portion of the inner and outerleg cuffs 150 and 140 may be folded laterally inward to form the outercuff folded edge, i.e. distal cuff edge 142, first substrate layer 306and/or second substrate layer 308 of the elastomeric laminate 302forming the outer cuff and the web material may be folded laterallyoutward to form the inner cuff folded edge, i.e. proximal cuff edge 152,first substrate layer 306 and/or second substrate layer 308 of theelastomeric laminate 302 forming the inner cuff and the web of materialmay extend from the front waist end edge 136 to the back waist end edge138 of the chassis 200 and may be joined to the topsheet 124 and/orbacksheet 125 between the inner cuff folded edge, proximal cuff edge152, and the outer cuff folded edge, distal cuff edge 142, in the crotchregion 37. Elastic members, for example elastic strands 316, aredisposed between the first and second substrate layers, 306 and 308, ofthe outer leg cuff 140 to form an elasticized outer leg cuff 140 andelastic members, for example elastic strands 316, are disposed betweenthe first and second substrate layers 306 and 308 of the inner leg cuff150 to form an elasticized inner leg cuff 150.

The elastic members forming the inner leg cuff 150 and the outer legcuff 140 may be spaced apart from each other differently, i.e. one hasgreater spacing between the elastic elements than the other, such thatthe outer leg cuff 140 and the inner leg cuff 150 have differing tactileand aesthetic characteristics that create varying garment-likeappearance, level of contraction and/or variation in amplitude andfrequency of the texture formed in the first and second substrate layers306 and 308. The elastic members forming the inner leg cuff 150 and/orthe outer leg cuff 140 may be spaced evenly or irregularly to createcontracted regions of uniform or changing amplitude and frequency in theouter leg cuff 140 and/or the inner leg cuff 150 such that a variety ofgarment-like appearances may be achieved.

As illustrated in FIGS. 7, 31, 39, 41, 45, and 46, the glued length(length wherein the elastic is glued to the cuff web) of the elastic 154forming the inner leg cuff may be longer than the glued length of theelastic 144 forming the outer leg cuff. Alternatively, the glued length(length wherein the elastic is glued to the cuff web) of the elastic 154forming the inner leg cuff may be shorter than the glued length of theelastic 144 forming the outer leg cuff. Still in other embodiments, theglued length (length wherein the elastic is glued to the cuff web) ofthe elastic 154 forming the inner leg cuff may be identical orsubstantially identical to the glued length of the elastic 144 formingthe outer leg cuff. In some embodiments, the elastic 154 forming theinner leg cuff and/or the elastic 144 forming the outer leg cuff maycomprise curvilinear segments.

One or more of the Average-Dtex, Average-Strand-Spacing,Average-Pre-Strain, nonwoven basis weight and/or nonwoven texture of oneor both of the inner leg cuff 150 and outer leg cuffs 140 may beidentical or substantially identical to one or more of the chassis 200,side panels 330, elastomeric ear panels 530, non-elastomeric ear panels540, belts 430, waistbands 122, topsheet 124 and backsheet 125.

One or both of the inner leg cuff 150 and the outer leg cuff 140 may beformed by an elastomeric laminate 302 comprising a first substrate layer306 and a second substrate layer 308 and an elastic material, forexample elastic strands 316, disposed between the first and secondsubstrate layers 306 and 308. The first substrate layer 306 and thesecond substrate layer 308 may be separate and discrete layers oralternatively the first substrate layer 306 and second substrate layer308 may be formed from a single web of material that is folded to formthe first substrate layer 306 and second substrate layer 308 asdescribed previously. In some configurations of the outer leg cuffs 140,the one or both of the first and second substrate layers 306 and 308 maybe formed in part or whole by one or more of the backsheet nonwoven 127and backsheet film 126.

The inner and/or outer leg cuffs 150 and 140 may be formed from multiplebeams of elastic, for example one beam may form the inner leg cuff 150and a second beam may form the outer leg cuff 140, wherein the separatebeams may comprise a different number of elastics, the beams may haveelastics having different decitex, the elastics of the two beams may bedisposed at different spacing and/or the separate beams may deliverelastics having different pre-strain. The resultant inner and/or outerleg cuffs 150 and 140 created from such a multi-beam approach may havedifferent texture, garment-like appearance, Section-Modulus and/ordifferent force.

Waistbands/Waistcaps

The absorbent articles 100 of the present disclosure may comprise one ormore elastic waistbands 122. The elastic waistbands 122 may bepositioned on the garment-facing surface or the wearer-facing surface ormay be formed therebetween. As an example, a first elastic waistband 122may be present in the front waist region 36 near the front waist edge136 and a second elastic waistband 122 may be present in the back waistregion 38 near the back waist edge 138. The elastic waistbands 122 mayaid in sealing the absorbent article 100 around a waist of a wearer andat least inhibiting bodily exudates from escaping the absorbent article100 through the waist opening circumference. In some instances, anelastic waistband may fully surround the waist opening 190 of theabsorbent article 100. A waist cap 123 may be formed by an extension ofthe waistband 122 and may remain unattached to the underlying structurein the central portion of the waist cap 123 to allow bodily exudatesthat flow along the topsheet 124 to be trapped between the topsheet 124and the underside of the waist cap 123. In other words, the waist cap123 may be joined to the underlying structure, e.g., center chassis 200of the absorbent article 100 along the longitudinally distal edge of thewaist cap 123 and/or along the laterally opposing side edges of thewaist cap 123.

The elastomeric waistband 122 especially assists in maintaining theprimary line of tension formed by the primary fastening system 179and/or ear panels/flaps/panels allowing the article to conformably fitaround the waist of the wearer where there is dynamic motion, andinitially pre-tensioning the waist since the article typically isstretched at the waist when applying the article 100 on the wearer sothat when the waistband 122 contracts and tension is transmitted fromthe waistband 122 along the waist opening 190. While some of thearticles of the present disclosure may have the elastomeric waistband122 disposed in the back waist region 38, alternatively, the articles100 may be provided with elastomeric waistbands 122 disposed in thefront waist region 36 or in both the front waist region 36 and the backwaist region 38. In order for the waistband 122 to receive and maintaintension created by the fastening components, when present, it may bedesirable that a portion of the waistband 122 is longitudinally alignedwith at least a portion of the fastening system 179. In other words, alaterally extending line drawn through the fastener 175 and parallel tothe lateral centerline will extend through at least a portion of theelastomeric waistband 122.

When the elastomeric waistband 122 is present in only one waist region,e.g. back waist region 38, it may be desirable that the waistband 122 bedisposed laterally inward from the waist end edge, e.g. back waist endedge 138, of the article 100; alternatively, as shown in FIG. 2, thedistal end edge 738 of the waistband 122 may be substantiallyco-terminus with the back waist end edge 138. Further, a proximal endedge 736 may be disposed longitudinally more distal than a distal endedge 536 (see FIG. 40) of an ear panel or distal end edge 636 asillustrated at least in FIGS. 2, 40, 45, and 46. If the waistband 122 isdisposed in both waist regions, front waist region 36 and back waistregion 38, it may be desirable that the waistband 122 be disposed at orimmediately adjacent the front and back waist end edges 136 and 138 ofthe article 100. The waistband 122 may have a longitudinal length asmeasured parallel to the longitudinal axis 42. The waistband 122 may bespaced laterally inward from the waist end edge, e.g. back waist endedge 138, a distance that is less than the longitudinal length of thewaistband 122. Alternatively, the waistband 122 may be disposed at oradjacent the waist end edge 236 or 238 of the chassis 200. The waistband122 may be disposed between the ear panels/panels or may overlap aportion of the ear panels/panels to ensure transmission of thetensioning forces generated by the fastener and/or the earpanels/panels.

The waistband 122 may be disposed between the topsheet 124 and backsheet125 of the chassis 200 or may be disposed on the interior surface 202 ofthe chassis 200. The waistband 122 may be disposed in the same waistregion as two elastomeric ear panels/panels or alternatively may bedisposed in the same waist region as two non-elastomeric ear panels 540.When the absorbent article comprises an elastomeric waistband 122 andnon-elastomeric ear panels 540, the waistband 122 may provide theprimary tension along the waist region of the article. The waistband 122may be disposed wholly between the non-elastomeric ear panels 540 of thearticle as illustrated in FIG. 41 or a portion of the waistband 122 maybe disposed in an overlapping relationship with the non-elastomeric earpanels 540. The elasticized waistband 122 may be constructed in a numberof different configurations including those described in U.S. Pat. Nos.4,515,595 and 5,151,092.

A taped diaper may comprise a discrete waistband 122 disposed in atleast one of the front and back waist regions 36 and 38, wherein thewaistband 122 is spaced longitudinally inward from the respective frontand back waist end edges 136 and 138 of the article 100 at least about10 mm or at least about 20 mm. The distance the waistband 122 is spacedfrom the front and/or back waist edge 136 and 138 of the article 100 maybe less than the longitudinal length of the waistband 122.

In either of the article forms above, a portion of the elastomericwaistband 122 may be disposed on an interior surface of one or more ofthe center chassis 200, the topsheet 124, the absorbent core 128 and theinner leg cuffs 150 in one or both of the waist regions of the absorbentarticle 100. Furthermore, a portion of the elastomeric waistband 122 maybe disposed in an overlapping configuration with at least a portion ofone or both of the laterally opposing panels/flaps/ears, e.g.elastomeric side panels 330, elastomeric ear panels 530 andnon-elastomeric ear panels 540. Alternatively, a portion of thewaistband 122 may be disposed between the topsheet 124 and the backsheet125 in one or both of the waist regions.

The waistband 122 may be substantially rectangular. Alternatively, thewaistband 122 may have one or more edges that are arcuate as shown inFIG. 47. The waistband 122 may take on a number of different sizes,shapes, configurations, and materials. For example, the waistband maycomprise a plurality of elastic members, for example elastic strands316, disposed between a first substrate layer 306 forming at least aportion of the inner surface of the waistband 122 and a second substratelayer 308 forming at least a portion of the outer surface of thewaistband 122 and may have varying widths, lengths, thickness, shapes,textures, Average-Strand-Spacing, Average-Dtex, Average-Pre-Strain, etc.

The waistband 122 may be the same width as the center chassis 200 or maybe wider or narrower than the center chassis 200. When the absorbentarticle comprises multiple waistbands, the waistband 122 in a firstwaist region, for example the front waist region 36, may have adifferent, shape, width, length, thickness, texture or elasticconfiguration than the waistband 122 in a second waist region, forexample the back waist region 38.

The waistband 122 may extend longitudinally over one or both of thelongitudinally opposing end edges 26 and 28 of the absorbent core 128 toform an elasticized waist cap 123. Such an elasticized waist cap 123 maybe formed by an extension of the waistband 122 and may remain unattachedto the underlying structure in the central portion of the waist cap 123to allow bodily exudates that flow along the topsheet 124 to be trappedbetween the topsheet 124 and the underside of the waist cap 123. Inother words, the waist cap 123 may be joined to the underlyingstructure, e.g. center chassis 200 of the absorbent article 100 alongthe longitudinally distal edge of the waist cap 123 and/or along thelaterally opposing side edges of the waist cap 123.

The elasticized waistband 122 or waist cap 123 may be formed by anelastomeric laminate comprising a first substrate layer 306 and a secondsubstrate layer 308 and may also comprise an elastic material, forexample elastic strands 316, disposed between the first and secondsubstrate layers 306 and 308. The first substrate layer 306 and thesecond substrate layer 308 may be separate and discrete layers oralternatively the first substrate layer 306 and second substrate layer308 may be formed from a single web that is folded to form the firstsubstrate layer 306 and the second substrate layer 308. In someconfigurations of the waist band 122 or waist cap 123 the elasticmaterial disposed in the waistband 122 or waist cap 123 may comprise aplurality of elastic strands 316.

The absorbent article may comprise a waistband 122 disposed in both thefront waist region 36 and the back waist region 38. In such embodiments,the waistband 122 in the front waist region 36 and the waistband 122 inthe back waist region 38 may be formed from multiple beams of elastic,for example one beam may form the waistband 122 in the front waistregion 36 and a second beam may form the waistband 122 in the back waistregion 38, wherein the separate beams may comprise a different number ofelastics, the beams may have elastics having different decitex, theelastics of the two beams may be disposed at different spacing and/orthe separate beams may deliver elastics having different pre-strain. Theresultant waistbands 122 in the front and back waist regions 36 and 38created from such a multi-beam approach may have different texture,garment-like appearance, Section-Modulus and/or different force. Itshould also be appreciated that the two waistbands may be discrete fromeach other or may be made from a common web of material but havedistinctly different physical properties.

One or more of the Average-Dtex, Average-Strand-Spacing,Average-Pre-Strain, nonwoven basis weight and/or nonwoven texture of oneor both of the front and back waistbands may be identical orsubstantially identical to one or more of the chassis 200, side panels330, elastomeric ear panels 530, non-elastomeric ear panel 540, belts430, inner leg cuff 150, outer leg cuff 140, topsheet 124 and backsheet125.

Side Panels

The side panels 330 may be discrete from or integral with the chassis200. A discrete side panel is formed as separate element, which isjoined to the chassis 200. In some embodiments, this includes aplurality of side panels, e.g. 2 or 4 being joined to the side edges 237of the chassis 200 in the front and/or rear waist regions 36 and 38.Discrete side panels may be formed of one or more layers. A waistband122 may be placed across a portion of the chassis 200 and may overlap aportion of the side panels 330 to create a multi-piece continuousbelt-like structure.

Alternatively, the absorbent article 100 may comprise a pair of discreteelastomeric side panels 330 disposed in a first waist region and a pairof discrete non-elastomeric ear panels 540 disposed in a second waistregion.

Alternatively, the article may comprise a pair of discrete elastomericside panels 330 disposed in a first waist region and a pair of integralnon-elastomeric ear panels 540 in a second waist region wherein theintegral non-elastomeric ear panels 540 may be formed in part by one ormore of the backsheet nonwoven 127, backsheet film 126, cuff material,landing zone material and topsheet 124.

The discrete elastomeric side panels 330 may overlap the side edges 237of the chassis 200 and may be disposed on the innermost surface 202 ofthe chassis 200 or alternatively to the outermost surface 204 of thechassis 200. Alternatively, the elastomeric side panels 330 may overlapa portion of the chassis 200 and may be disposed between layers of thechassis 200 for example between the backsheet 125 and the outer leg cuff140, or between the backsheet 125 and the topsheet 124. The side panels330 may be bonded to the chassis 200 adhesively, mechanically, thermallyor by combinations thereof.

The elastomeric side panels 330 may comprise an apertured elastomericfilm material, elastic strands, elastomeric scrim materials, elastomericnonwovens, elastic ribbons, foams and combinations thereof. Theelastomeric material of the side panel 330 may be the same color as thenonwoven of the side panel 330 or may be of a different color so theelastomeric material is visible in the elastomeric side panel 330.

The side panels 330 may be substantially rectangular or may have ashape, i.e. the side panels 330 are substantially non-rectangular. Inaddition to shape the side panels 330 may also comprise two or morevisually distinct textural regions disposed on the side panel 330.Finally, one or more of the side panels 330 of the pant comprising sidepanels 300 may comprise a side panel graphic 399 and the chassis 200 maycomprise a chassis graphic 299 wherein portions of the side panelgraphic and portions of the chassis graphics are substantially alignedand/or when combined form a composite graphic element.

The side panels 330 may be discrete elements attached to the chassis 200at or adjacent the side edges 237 of the chassis 200. Alternatively, theside panels 330 may be integral with the chassis 200, i.e. formed inpart by one or more of the backsheet nonwoven 127, backsheet film 126,outer cuff material, topsheet 124 and core wrap.

The absorbent article may comprise side panels 330 disposed in both thefront waist region 36 and the back waist region 38. In such embodiments,the side panels 330 in the front waist region 36 and the side panels 330in the back waist region 38 may be formed from multiple beams ofelastic, for example one beam may form at least a portion of the sidepanels 330 in the front waist region 36 and a second beam may form atleast a portion of the side panels 330 in the back waist region 38,wherein the separate beams may comprise a different elastic composition,different number of elastics, the beams may have elastics havingdifferent decitex, the elastics of the two beams may be disposed atdifferent spacing and/or the separate beams may deliver elastics havingdifferent pre-strain. The resultant side panels 330 in the front andback waist regions 36 and 38 created from such a multi-beam approach mayhave different texture, garment-like appearance, Section-Modulus and/ordifferent force.

The side panel 330 may also be provided with differential extensibilityalong the longitudinal axis when stretched in the lateral direction. Asused herein, the term “differential extensibility” refers to anon-uniform degree of elastic extension properties, as measured in thedirection of stretching at various points along an axis orientedsubstantially perpendicular to the direction of stretching. Thedifferential extensibility can be achieved in a number of differentways. The elasticized side panel 330 can comprise a variety ofelastomeric materials, multiple configurations of the elastomericmaterials (elastic spacing), or the extension properties (pre-strain) ofthe elastomeric material or other materials making up the elasticizedbelt, such as the first substrate layer 306 and/or second substratelayer 308 may be non-uniform. For example, differential extensibilitycan be achieved in selected adjacent portions of the elasticized sidepanel 330 by using elastomeric materials having varying extension orcontractive forces, Section-Modulus, or other inherent properties suchthat more or less (varying) lateral extensibility is achieved in oneportion of the elasticized side panel 330 than the adjacent portion. Theelastomeric materials may also have varying lengths, sizes, and shapesthat provide differential extensibility. Other ways of varying theproperties of materials that form the elasticized side panel 330 as areknown in the art may also be used. The differential extensibility may beachieved by leveraging multiple beams of elastic to deliver elasticshaving different material type, decitex, strain, spacing, etc.

The elasticized side panel 330 may be formed by an elastomeric laminatecomprising a first substrate layer 306 and a second substrate layer 308and may also comprise an elastic material, for example elastic strands316, disposed between the first and second substrate layers 306 and 308.The first substrate layer 306 and the second substrate layer 308 may beseparate and discrete layers or alternatively the first substrate layer306 and second substrate layer 308 may be formed from a single web thatis folded to form the first substrate layer 306 and the second substratelayer 308. In some configurations of the side panel 330 the elasticmaterial disposed in the side panel 330 may comprise a plurality ofelastic strands 316.

The absorbent article may comprise side panels 330 disposed in one orboth of the front waist region 36 and the back waist region 38. In suchembodiments, the side panels 330 in the front waist region 36 and theside panels 330 in the back waist region 38 may be formed from multiplebeams of elastic, for example one beam may form the side panels 330 inthe front waist region 36 and a second beam may form the side panels 330in the back waist region 38, wherein the separate beams may comprise adifferent number of elastics, the beams may have elastics havingdifferent decitex, the elastics of the two beams may be disposed atdifferent spacing and/or the separate beams may deliver elastics havingdifferent pre-strain. The resultant side panels 330 in the front andback waist regions 36 and 38 created from such a multi-beam approach mayhave different texture, garment-like appearance, Section-Modulus and/ordifferent force.

One or more of the elastic Average-Dtex, Average-Strand-Spacing,Average-Pre-Strain, nonwoven basis weight and/or nonwoven texture of theside panels 330 may be identical or substantially identical to one ormore of the chassis 200, waistbands 122, non-elastomeric ear panel 540,inner leg cuff, outer leg cuff, topsheet 124 and backsheet 125.

Belts

The belts 430 (front belt 430F and back belt 430B) disposed on a beltpant 400 may comprise an inner belt layer 432 and an outer belt layer434 layer and an elastomeric material disposed there between. The innerand outer nonwoven layers 432 and 434 may be joined using adhesives,thermal bonds, pressure bonds or thermoplastic bonds. Various suitablebelt configurations can be found in U.S. Pub. No. 2013-0211363.

A belt pant 400 may comprise a first elastomeric belt 430 extendingoutwardly from a first end edge, e.g., back end edge 238, of the chassis200 and a longitudinally opposing second elastomeric belt 430 extendingoutwardly from a longitudinally opposing second end edge, e.g. front endedge 236 of the chassis 200. The longitudinally distal edge of the firstelastomeric belt and the longitudinally distal edge of the secondelastomeric belt may form a portion of a waist opening 190 (e.g., 438illustrated in FIGS. 12-14).

The absorbent article 100 may comprise a first belt 430 disposed in afirst waist region, e.g. the front waist region 36, and a second belt430 disposed in a longitudinally opposing second waist region, e.g. theback waist region 38, wherein one of the belts has a greaterlongitudinal length than the longitudinally opposing belt as measuredalong the side edge 437 of the belt 430 at or adjacent the side seam170.

An absorbent belt pant 400 may comprise a first elastomeric belt 430 anda second elastomeric belt 430 that are discrete from one another. Eachof the belts may comprise an inner belt layer 432 and an outer beltlayer 434 wherein the inner belt layer 432 on the first belt 430 isseparated by a gap from the inner belt layer 432 on the second belt 430and the outer belt layer 434 on the first belt 430 is separated by a gapfrom the outer belt layer 434 on the second belt 430 (see FIGS. 11, 12and 13A).

Alternatively, an absorbent belt pant 400 may comprise a firstelastomeric belt 430 in a first waist region and a second elastomericbelt 430 in a second waist region, where each of the belts 430 maycomprise an inner belt layer 432 and an outer belt layer 434 wherein oneor both of the inner belt layer 432 and the outer belt layer 434 form acommon belt layer extending from a first waist region to a second waistregion forming a portion of the first belt 430 and a portion of thesecond belt 430 (see FIGS. 13B and 14B). The common layer may extendfrom a first waist edge, e.g. the front waist edge 136 to alongitudinally opposing second waist edge, e.g. back waist edge 138 ofthe article 100.

The belt 430 may include slits, holes, slots or perforations providingincreased breathability and air permeability, softness and garment liketexture (see FIGS. 4A and 4B)—these slits, holes, slots or perforationsmay also extend through one or more layers of the belt 430.Underwear-like appearance can be enhanced by substantially aligning thewaist edge, i.e. longitudinally distal edge 438 (which may be a foldededge) and/or leg edge, i.e. longitudinally proximal edge 436 (which maybe a folded or cut edge) of the first and second belts 430 of the beltpant 400 providing a smooth waist opening 190 and smooth leg openings192 as illustrated in FIG. 35.

One or both of the belts 430 on the belt pant 400 may comprise beltgraphics 499. The belt graphics 499 may extend substantially around theentire circumference of the belt pant 400. The belt graphic 499 mayextend around the circumference at least about 180 degrees or at leastabout 225 degrees or at least about 270 degrees. The belt graphics 499(or color scheme) on the belt 430 may be substantially aligned withchassis graphics 299 disposed on the chassis 200 and/or may form acomposite graphic element or graphical experience.

In some configurations, the absorbent article 100 may have a firstelastic belt 430 and/or a second elastic belt 430 that may comprisecurved contours. For example, the inner laterally extending edges, legedge 436, of the first and/or second elastic belts 430 may includenon-linear or curved portions (see FIG. 9). Such curved contours mayhelp define desired shapes to the leg opening 192, such as for example,relatively rounded leg openings. In addition to having curved contours,the elastic belts 430 may include elastic strands 316 that extend alongnon-linear or curved paths that may correspond with the curved contoursof the leg edge 436.

The elasticized belts 430 may comprise a first substrate layer 306 and asecond substrate layer 308 and may also comprise an elastic material,for example elastic strands 316, disposed between the first and secondsubstrate layers 306 and 308. The first substrate layer 306 and thesecond substrate layer 308 may be separate and discrete layers oralternatively the first substrate layer 306 and second substrate layer308 may be formed from a single web that is folded to form the firstsubstrate layer 306 and second substrate layer 308. In someconfigurations of the belts 430, the elastic material disposed in thebelts 430 may comprise a plurality of elastic strands 316.

The absorbent article may comprise belts 430 disposed in both the frontwaist region 36 and the back waist region 38. In such embodiments, thebelt 430 in the front waist region 36 and the belt 430 in the back waistregion 38 may be formed from multiple beams of elastic, for example onebeam may form at least a portion of the belt 430 in the front waistregion 36 and a second beam may form at least a portion of the belt 430in the back waist region 38, wherein the separate beams may comprise adifferent elastic composition, different number of elastics, the beamsmay have elastics having different decitex, the elastics of the twobeams may be disposed at different spacing and/or the separate beams maydeliver elastics having different pre-strain. The resultant belts 430 inthe front and back waist regions 36 and 38 created from such amulti-beam approach may have different texture, garment-like appearance,Section-Modulus and/or different force.

The belts 430 may also be provided with differential extensibility alongthe longitudinal axis when stretched in the lateral direction. As usedherein, the term “differential extensibility” refers to a non-uniformdegree of elastic extension properties, as measured in the direction ofstretching at various points along an axis oriented substantiallyperpendicular to the direction of stretching. This may, for example,include varying the elastic type, elastic spacing, elastic modulus orpre-strain of the elastomeric material(s). The differentialextensibility is preferably designed into the elasticized belts 430 sothat the lateral extensibility varies longitudinally through at least aportion of the elasticized belt 430. It is believed that differentialextensibility along the longitudinal axis when stretched in the lateraldirection allows the elasticized belt 430 to differentially stretch andconform to the wearer's waist during use while providing a secure anchor(illustrated by areas or zones of front anchoring force 61A and backanchoring force 61B in FIGS. 17-19, and 21A and B) about the hip of thewearer so as to promote sustained fit and reduce leakage at the waistand legs. Such a configuration may allow more “expansion” in the hiparea to accommodate changes in the wearer's body size as the wearermoves and changes positions (standing, sitting, lying). Alternatively, adegree of reduced lateral extensibility in the portion of theelasticized belt 430 adjacent to the end edge of the diaper requiresmore of the total extension to be assumed by the elasticized belt 430thereby resulting in more localized stretching of the elasticized belt430 and a more compliant abdominal fit. Belts having elastics asdescribed in this section above allow for higher Section-Modulusanchoring zones 61A and 61B than was previously possible due tosignificantly lower pressure on skin enabled by the low decitex elasticmaterials, low pre-strain and tight elastic spacing of the inventiveelastomeric laminate 302. Concentrated zones of elastics (relativeadjacent areas) are also illustrated in FIGS. 6A, 6B, 8, and 9. Itshould also be noted that a portion or the entirety of the elasticsdisposed within the belt 430 may extend continuously from a first beltside edge 437 to the laterally opposing belt side edge 437 while otherelastics disposed within the belt 430 may be disposed in a discontinuousmanner having elastic portions disposed laterally outward of the chassis200 between the chassis edge 237 and the belt side edge 437, but notsubstantially overlapping the chassis 200.

The differential extensibility can be achieved in a number of differentways. The elasticized belt 430 can comprise a variety of elastomericmaterials, multiple configurations of the elastomeric materials (elasticspacing), or the extension properties (pre-strain) of the elastomericmaterial or other materials making up the elasticized belt, such as thefirst substrate layer 306 and/or second substrate layer 308 may benon-uniform. For example, differential extensibility can be achieved inselected adjacent portions of the elasticized belt 430 by usingelastomeric materials having varying extension or contractive forces,Section-Modulus, or other inherent properties such that more or less(varying) lateral extensibility is achieved in one portion of theelasticized belt 430 than the adjacent portion. The elastomericmaterials may also have varying lengths, sizes, and shapes that providedifferential extensibility. Other ways of varying the properties ofmaterials that form the elasticized belt 430 as are known in the art mayalso be used. The differential extensibility may be achieved byleveraging multiple beams of elastic to deliver elastics havingdifferent material type, decitex, strain, spacing, etc.

One or more of the Average-Dtex, Average-Strand-Spacing,Average-Pre-Strain, nonwoven basis weight and/or nonwoven texture of thebelts 430 may be identical or substantially identical to one or more ofthe chassis 200, waistbands 122, inner leg cuff 150, outer leg cuff 140,topsheet 124 and backsheet 125.

As shown in FIG. 9, the absorbent article 100 may comprise belts 430Fand B comprising a first plurality of elastics 316 a adjacent the waistend edges 136 and 138, a third plurality of elastics 316 c adjacent tothe leg edges 436F and B, and a second plurality of elastics between thefirst and third elastics 316 a and c. It may be desirable to curve thepluralities of elastics 316 a, b, and/or c. FIG. 9 illustrates the thirdplurality of elastics of each of the front and back belts 430F and B.The belts 430 may also comprise a fourth plurality of elastic elements(e.g., 316 d disposed in the front belt 430F).

Ear Panels

Taped diaper absorbent articles 500 may comprise a first elastomeric earpanel 530 extending outwardly from a first side edge 237 of the chassis200 and a laterally opposing second elastomeric ear panel 530 extendingoutwardly from a laterally opposing second side edge 237 of the chassis200. The taped diaper 500 may comprise a chassis 200 having alongitudinally distal edge, e.g. back end edge 238, disposed in a firstwaist region, e.g. back waist region 38. The longitudinally distal edgeof the chassis 200 and the longitudinally distal end edges 538 of thelaterally opposing first elastomeric ear panel 530 and the secondelastomeric ear panel 530 form a portion of a waist edge, e.g. backwaist edge 138, of the taped diaper 500. The longitudinally proximal endedges 536 of the laterally opposing elastomeric ear panels 530 will formportions of the leg openings when the article is fastened around awearer.

The taped diaper 500 may also comprise non-elastomeric ear panels 540that may be combined with an elastomeric waistband 122 to create anelasticized waist opening 190. The non-elastomeric ear panels 540 may berectangular or may be shaped, substantially non-rectangular. The earpanels may be in one or both of the waist regions and may be discreteand attached to the chassis 200 along the side edges 237 oralternatively they may be integral and formed in part by a portion ofone or more of the backsheet 125, topsheet 124, leg cuff 140, or landingzone. In certain executions, the elastomeric ear panels 530 ornon-elastomeric ear panels 540 of the taped diaper 500 may comprise oneor more visually distinct textured zones.

One or more of the elastomeric ear panels 530 of the taped diaper 500may comprise an ear graphic 599 disposed thereon. One or more of theelastomeric ear panels 530 comprise an ear graphic 599 and the chassis200 comprises a chassis graphic 299. In certain executions, the eargraphic 599 disposed on the elastomeric ear panel 530 and the chassisgraphic 299 disposed on the chassis 200 may be substantially alignedand/or may form a composite graphic element.

The elastomeric ear panels 530 may overlap a portion of the chassis 200and may be disposed between layers of the chassis 200 for examplebetween the backsheet 125 and the outer leg cuff 140, or between thebacksheet 125 and the topsheet 124 or may be disposed on either theinterior surface 202 or exterior surface 204 of the chassis 200. Theelastomeric ear panels 530 may be bonded to the chassis 200 adhesively,mechanically, thermally or by combinations thereof.

The elastomeric ear panels 530 may be discrete elements attached to thechassis 200 at or adjacent the side edges 237 of the chassis 200.Alternatively, the elastomeric ear panels 530 may be integral with thechassis 200, i.e. formed in part by one or more of the backsheetnonwoven, backsheet film, outer cuff material, topsheet and core wrap.The ear panels may be elastomeric or may be non-elastomeric.

The elasticized ear panels 530 may comprise a first substrate layer 306and a second substrate layer 308 and may also comprise an elasticmaterial, for example elastic strands 316 disposed between the first andsecond substrate layers 306 and 308. The first substrate layer 306 andthe second substrate layer 308 may be separate and discrete layers oralternatively the first substrate layer 306 and second substrate layer308 may be formed from a single web of material that is folded to formthe first substrate layer 306 and second substrate layer 308. In someconfigurations of the elastomeric ear panels 530 the elastic materialdisposed in the ear panels 530 may comprise a plurality of elasticstrands 316.

The elasticized ear panels 530 may also be provided with differentialextensibility along the longitudinal axis 42 when stretched in thelateral direction. As used herein, the term “differential extensibility”refers to a non-uniform degree of elastic extension properties, asmeasured in the direction of stretching at various points along an axisoriented substantially perpendicular to the direction of stretching.This may, for example, include varying the elastic type, elasticspacing, elastic modulus or pre-strain of the elastomeric material(s).The differential extensibility is preferably designed into theelasticized ear panel 530 so that the lateral extensibility varieslongitudinally through at least a portion of the elasticized ear.

The differential extensibility can be achieved in a number of differentways. The elasticized ear panel 530 can comprise a variety ofelastomeric materials, multiple configurations of the elastomericmaterials (elastic spacing), or the extension properties (pre-strain) ofthe elastomeric material or other materials making up the elasticizedear panel 530, such as the first substrate layer 306 and/or secondsubstrate layer 308 may be non-uniform. For example, differentialextensibility can be achieved in selected adjacent portions of theelasticized ear panel 530 by using elastomeric materials having varyingextension or contractive forces, Section-Modulus, or other inherentproperties such that more or less (varying) lateral extensibility isachieved in one portion of the elasticized ear panel 530 than theadjacent portion. The elastomeric materials may also have varyinglengths, sizes, and shapes that provide differential extensibility.Other ways of varying the properties of materials that form theelasticized ear panels 530 as are known in the art may also be used. Thedifferential extensibility may be achieved by leveraging multiple beamsof elastic to deliver elastics having different material type, decitex,strain, spacing, etc.

One or more of the elastic Average-Dtex, Average-Strand-Spacing,Average-Pre-Strain, nonwoven basis weight and/or nonwoven texture of theelasticized ear panels 530 may be identical or substantially identicalto one or more of the chassis 200, waistbands 122, non-elastomeric earpanels 540, inner leg cuff 150, outer leg cuff 140, topsheet 124 andbacksheet 125.

As illustrated in FIGS. 8A and B, 9, and 19, one or more of the belt430, side panel 330, elastomeric ear panel 530, topsheet 124, backsheet125 and chassis 200 may comprise a plurality of elastic regions whereina first elastic region may comprise a first plurality of elastics 316 adisposed relative to each other at a first Average-Strand-Spacing and asecond elastic region comprising a second plurality of elastics 316 bdisposed relative to each other at a second Average-Strand-Spacingwherein the second Average-Strand-Spacing is at least 2 times greaterthan the first Average-Strand-Spacing, at least 6 times greater and incertain embodiments at least 12 times greater. In some embodiments, thefirst elastic region and the second elastic region may be disposed in anadjacent side by side relationship. Alternatively, the first elasticregion and the second elastic region may be disposed in an overlappingrelationship wherein at least a portion of one region overlaps with theother region. In other embodiments, the first region and the secondregion may be separated by an non-elasticized region wherein thenon-elasticized region has a width as measured from the last elastic ofthe first region to the first elastic of the second region of at leastabout 5 times the first Average-Strand-Spacing, at least 10 times thefirst Average-Strand-Spacing and in some embodiments at least about 20times the first Average-Strand-Spacing.

Chassis

The chassis 200 is generally referred to above. It should be furtherunderstood that the chassis 200 may be elasticized such that the chassis200 comprises a first substrate layer 306 and a second substrate layer308 and may also comprise an elastic material, for example elasticstrands 316, disposed between the first and second substrate layers 306and 308. For example, a plurality of elastics 316 may be disposed on thechassis 200 outwardly of the backsheet film 126, longitudinally and/orlaterally as illustrated in FIGS. 58-69, for example between backsheetfilm 126 and backsheet nonwoven 127. The first substrate layer 306 andthe second substrate layer 308 may be separate and discrete layers oralternatively the first substrate layer 306 and second substrate layer308 may be formed from a single web that is folded to form the firstsubstrate layer 306 and second substrate layer 308. In someconfigurations of the chassis 200, the elastic material disposed in thechassis may comprise a plurality of elastics 316.

More specifically, the chassis 200 may comprise elastics 316 that do notoverlap elastics 316 of the ear panels 530, side panels 330, or belts430 (see FIGS. 61A, 63, 65, 67, and 68). Alternatively, the chassiselastics 316 may overlap the belt elastics 316, as illustrated in FIG.64. Elastics 316 of the chassis 200 may be formed from multiple beams ofelastic, for example one beam may form at least a portion of the chassiselastics 316 and a second beam may form at least another portion of thechassis elastics 316, wherein the separate beams may comprise adifferent elastic composition, different number of elastics, the beamsmay have elastics having different decitex, the elastics of the twobeams may be disposed at different spacing and/or the separate beams maydeliver elastics having different pre-strain. The resultant portion ofthe chassis elastics created from such a multi-beam approach may havedifferent texture, garment-like appearance, Section-Modulus and/ordifferent force. For example, the chassis elastics may be orientedlongitudinally (316′) on each end of the laterally oriented elastics(316″) illustrated by FIG. 64 may be formed by different beams.

The laterally oriented chassis elastics (316″) illustrated in FIGS. 63,64, and 65 may be formed between an additional nonwoven 800 adhered tothe garment-facing side of the backsheet nonwoven 127 (see FIGS. 60,62B, and 69). It may be desirable to minimize the overlap of theadditional nonwoven 800 with the belt nonwovens, such that the overlapis no greater than 10 mm, 15 mm, or 20 mm at each end edge of theadditional nonwoven 800. Alternatively, the longitudinally orientedchassis elastics 316 illustrated in FIGS. 58, 60, and 61 may be disposedbetween the backsheet film 126 and backsheet nonwoven 127.

The chassis may be shaped or non-rectangular, in one waist region andsubstantially rectangular in the opposing waist region. Alternatively,the chassis may be substantially rectangular in one or both of the waistregions and non-rectangular in the crotch region.

As shown in FIG. 66B, an absorbent article of the present disclosure maycomprise a plurality of laterally extending elastic elements wherein theelastic elements are present in a first waist region, the crotch regionand the opposing second waist region and wherein the maximumdisplacement between any adjacently disposed pair of laterally extendingelastics measured parallel to the longitudinal axis may be less than 75mm, less than 50 mm, less than 25 mm less than 10 mm, less than 5 mm,less than 4 mm and less than 3 mm.

A wearable article of the present disclosure may comprise one or moreelastomeric laminates 302 having a plurality of laterally extendingelastic elements wherein the one or more elastomeric laminates 302 maybe present in a first waist region, the crotch region 37 and/or in theopposing second waist region and wherein the elastomeric laminate 302disposed in one or both of the first and second waist regions maycomprise a first plurality of elastics 316 having one or more of ahigher Average-Dtex, higher Average-Pre-Strain and smallerAverage-Strand-Spacing than a second plurality of elastics 316 of theelastomeric laminate 302 disposed in the crotch region 37. Such awearable article may comprise one or more elastomeric laminates 302having a first plurality of elastics 316, the first plurality ofelastics 316 of the elastomeric laminate 302 comprising from about 100to about 1500 elastic strands with an Average-Strand-Spacing from about0.25 mm to about 4 mm, an Average-Dtex from about 10 to about 500, anAverage-Pre-Strain from about 50% to about 400% and a first substrate306 and/or second substrate 308 wherein one or both of the first andsecond substrate have a basis weight from about 6 grams per square meterto about 30 grams per square meter.

In an alternative embodiment, an absorbent article 100 comprising achassis 200 having a topsheet 124, a backsheet 125 and an absorbent core128 disposed between the topsheet 124 and the backsheet 125 wherein thebacksheet 125 comprises a backsheet film 126 and a backsheet nonwoven127. The backsheet being formed at least in part by an elastomericlaminate 302 comprising a first plurality of elastics 316 disposedbetween a first substrate layer 306 and a second substrate layer 308.The first plurality of elastics 316 comprises greater than about 10elastic strands having an Average-Strand-Spacing of from about 0.5 about5 mm, an Average-Dtex of from about 10 about 500 and anAverage-Pre-Strain of from 75% to about 350% and being disposedsubstantially parallel with the longitudinal axis 42. The backsheet film126 and backsheet nonwoven 127 may form one or both of the firstsubstrate layer 306 and second substrate layer 308. In other words, thefirst plurality of elastics 316 may be disposed between the backsheetfilm 126 and the backsheet nonwoven 127. The absorbent article 100 alsocomprises at least one from the group consisting of a belt 430, an earpanel 530, a side panel 330, a waistband 122, an inner leg cuff 150 andan outer leg cuff 140 joined to the chassis 200. The belt 430, ear panel530, side panel 330 and waistband 122 when present may comprise anelastomeric laminate 302 comprising a second plurality of elastics 316disposed between a first substrate layer 306 and a second substratelayer 308 and being disposed substantially parallel with the lateralaxis 44. The second plurality of elastics 316 may comprise greater than40 elastics with an Average-Strand-Spacing of less than 4 mm andAverage-Pre-Strain of from 75% to about 300%. In embodiments, whereinthe chassis comprises laterally opposed inner leg cuffs 150 and/or outerleg cuffs 140, each of the cuffs may comprise at least 6 elastic strandsdisposed substantially parallel with the first plurality of elastics 316and having an Average-Strand-Spacing of less than about 3 mm andAverage-Pre-Strain of between about 75% and 300%. In certainembodiments, a portion of the first plurality of elastics 316 a mayoverlap with a portion of the second plurality of elastics 316 b. Thefirst plurality of elastics 316 a may have one or more of: a) anAverage-Strand-Spacing that is greater than the second plurality ofelastics, b) an Average-Dtex that is lower than the second plurality ofelastics 316 b, c) an Average-Pre-Strain that is lower the secondplurality of elastics 316 b, and d) a number of elastics that is lowerthan the second plurality of elastics. A portion of the first pluralityof elastics 316 a may be disposed in an arcuate shape or may be disposedat an angle relative to one or both of the longitudinal axis 42 andlateral axis 44. A portion of the second plurality of elastics 316 b maybe disposed in an arcuate shape or may be disposed at an angle relativeto one or both of the longitudinal axis 42 and lateral axis 44.

In yet another embodiment, an extensible article may comprise anelastomeric laminate 302 formed by a first substrate layer 306 and asecond substrate layer 308 and a first plurality of elastics 316 a, asecond plurality of elastics 316 b and a third plurality of elastics 316c disposed between the first substrate layer 306 and the secondsubstrate layer 308. The first plurality of elastics 316 a may bedisposed in a first waist region, the second plurality of elastics 316 bmay be disposed in a second waist region and a third plurality ofelastics 316 c may be disposed in a crotch region. The first pluralityof elastics 316 a may comprise greater than about 40 elastic strands,the second plurality of elastics 316 b may comprise greater than about40 elastic strands and the third plurality of elastics 316 c maycomprise greater than about 10 elastic strands. One or more of the firstplurality of elastics 316 a, second plurality of elastics 316 b andthird plurality of elastics 316 c may have an Average-Strand-Spacingfrom about 0.25 mm to about 5 mm. The Average-Dtex of one or more of thefirst plurality of elastics 316 a, second plurality of elastics 316 band third plurality of elastics 316 c is from about 10 to about 500. TheAverage-Pre-Strain of one or more of the first plurality of elastics 316a, second plurality of elastics 316 b and third plurality of elastics316 c is from about 75% to about 300%. The elastic strands of each ofthe first plurality of elastics 316 a, second plurality of elastics 316b and third plurality of elastics 316 c are disposed substantiallyparallel to a lateral axis 44. The Pressure-Under-Strand of one or moreof the first plurality of elastics 316 a, the second plurality ofelastics 316 b and the third plurality of elastics 316 c is from about0.1 to about 1.0 psi. One or both of the first substrate layer 306 andsecond substrate layer 308 may have a basis weight of between about 6grams per square meter to about 30 grams per square meter. The thirdplurality of elastics 316 c may have one or more of: a) anAverage-Strand-Spacing that is greater than one or both of the firstplurality of elastics 316 a and the second plurality of elastics 316 b,b) an Average-Dtex that is lower than one or both of the first pluralityof elastics 316 a and the second plurality of elastics 316 b, c) anAverage-Pre-Strain that is lower than one or both of the first pluralityof elastics 316 a and the second plurality of elastics 316 b, and d) anumber of elastics that is lower than one or both of the first pluralityof elastics 316 a and the second plurality of elastics 316 b.

In an alternative embodiment, an extensible article may comprise anelastomeric laminate 302 formed by a first substrate layer 306 and asecond substrate layer 308 and a first plurality of elastics 316 a, asecond plurality of elastics 316 b and a third plurality of elastics 316c disposed between the first substrate layer 306 and the secondsubstrate layer 308. The first plurality of elastics 316 a may bedisposed in a first waist region, the second plurality of elastics 316 bmay be disposed in a second waist region and a third plurality ofelastics 316 c may be disposed in a crotch region. The first pluralityof elastics 316 a may comprise from about 100 to about 600 elasticstrands, the second plurality of elastics 316 b may comprise from about100 to about 600 elastic strands and the third plurality of elastics 316c may comprise from about 20 to about 200 elastic strands. One or moreof the first plurality of elastics 316 a, second plurality of elastics316 b and third plurality of elastics 316 c may have anAverage-Strand-Spacing from about 0.5 mm to about 2.5 mm. TheAverage-Dtex of one or more of the first plurality of elastics 316 a,second plurality of elastics 316 b and third plurality of elastics 316 cis from about 30 to about 250. The Average-Pre-Strain of one or more ofthe first plurality of elastics 316 a, second plurality of elastics 316b and third plurality of elastics 316 c is from about 75% to about 300%.The elastic strands of each of the first plurality of elastics 316 a,second plurality of elastics 316 b and third plurality of elastics 316 care disposed substantially parallel to a lateral axis 44. In analternative embodiment, the third plurality of elastics 316 c may bedisposed substantially parallel to the longitudinal axis 42. ThePressure-Under-Strand of one or more of the first plurality of elastics316 a, the second plurality of elastics 316 b and the third plurality ofelastics 316 c is from about 0.2 to about 0.8 psi. One or both of thefirst substrate layer 306 and second substrate layer 308 may have abasis weight of between about 6 grams per square meter to about 25 gramsper square meter. The third plurality of elastics 316 c may have one ormore of: a) an Average-Strand-Spacing that is greater than one or bothof the first plurality of elastics 316 a and the second plurality ofelastics 316 b, b) an Average-Dtex that is lower than one or both of thefirst plurality of elastics 316 a and the second plurality of elastics316 b, c) an Average-Pre-Strain that is lower than one or both of thefirst plurality of elastics 316 a and the second plurality of elastics316 b, and d) a number of elastics that is lower than one or both of thefirst plurality of elastics 316 a and the second plurality of elastics316 b.

In yet another embodiment, an extensible article may comprise one ormore elastomeric laminate 302 formed by a first substrate layer 306 anda second substrate layer 308, and a first plurality of elastics 316 a, asecond plurality of elastics 316 b, and a third plurality of elastics316 c disposed between the first substrate layer 306 and the secondsubstrate layer 308. The first plurality of elastics 316 a may bedisposed in a first waist region, the second plurality of elastics 316 bmay be disposed in a second waist region and a third plurality ofelastics 316 c may be disposed in a crotch region. The first pluralityof elastics forms a back belt 430B, the second plurality of elasticsforms a front belt 430F and the third plurality of elastics forms anextensible crotch. The first plurality of elastics 316 a may comprisegreater than about 40 elastic strands, the second plurality of elastics316 b may comprise greater than about 40 elastic strands and the thirdplurality of elastics 316 c may comprise greater than about 10 elasticstrands. One or more of the first plurality of elastics 316 a, secondplurality of elastics 316 b and third plurality of elastics 316 c mayhave an Average-Strand-Spacing from about 0.25 mm to about 5 mm. TheAverage-Dtex of one or more of the first plurality of elastics 316 a,second plurality of elastics 316 b and third plurality of elastics 316 cis from about 10 to about 500. The Average-Pre-Strain of one or more ofthe first plurality of elastics 316 a, second plurality of elastics 316b and third plurality of elastics 316 c is from about 75% to about 300%.The elastic strands of one or more of the first plurality of elastics316 a, second plurality of elastics 316 b and third plurality ofelastics 316 c are disposed substantially parallel to a lateral axis 44.The Pressure-Under-Strand of one or more of the first plurality ofelastics 316 a, the second plurality of elastics 316 b and the thirdplurality of elastics 316 c is from about 0.1 to about 1.0 psi. One orboth of the first substrate layer 306 and second substrate layer 308 mayhave a basis weight of between about 6 grams per square meter to about30 grams per square meter. The third plurality of elastics 316 c mayhave one or more of: a) an Average-Strand-Spacing that is greater thanone or both of the first plurality of elastics 316 a and the secondplurality of elastics 316 b, b) an Average-Dtex that is lower than oneor both of the first plurality of elastics 316 a and the secondplurality of elastics 316 b, c) an Average-Pre-Strain that is lower thanone or both of the first plurality of elastics 316 a and the secondplurality of elastics 316 b, and d) a number of elastics that is lowerthan one or both of the first plurality of elastics 316 a and the secondplurality of elastics 316 b.

Length-to-Waist Silhouette

A key benefit of having the Product Length-to-Waist Silhouette closer tothat of the Body Length-to-Waist Silhouette and designed to changeaccordingly with body weight is that the product itself more closelymatches the shape of the body. This results in the product beingdeformed to a significantly lesser degree during application than onethat is generically designed to fit a bigger range as illustrated by thecurrent marketed products. It also results in a product fit, which ismore tailored to the body shape, providing more effective gasketing andless extraneous material in the crotch. Product designs which mimic thegeneral shape of the body convey to consumers a better, more tailoredfit as the Product Length-to-Waist Silhouettes are more similar toconsumers' Body Length-to-Waist Silhouettes. The designs enabled by thepresent disclosure are more targeted by design and therefore provide agreater level of fit, gasketing, comfort and discretion.

Desirably, an absorbent article should be designed and sized to maintaincontact with and conform as closely as possible to a wearer's body. Sucha body-conforming design may increase the effectiveness of the absorbentarticle by reducing the possibility that urine, or the like, will spreador travel along the wearer's body and leak out of rather than beabsorbed into the absorbent article. However, current stranded absorbentarticles on the market do not adequately address body shape or productshape and therefore do not fit a broad range of users adequately orprovide the desired level of close fit.

It may be desirable to link the Product Length-to-Waist Silhouette tothat of the targeted consumers Body Length-to-Waist Silhouette in orderto achieve a better fitting, better conforming, better gasketingproduct. This may increase the wearing comfort for each consumer whilereducing leakage.

In order to deliver sufficient pressure on the body, which is necessaryfor good fit, closed-form pant products currently in the market whichcomprise of elastic strands for the waist belt tend to have a narrowerRelaxed Product Waist Width. This is due to their strand spacing's andstrand decitex, which result is a relatively low modulus and thereforerequire more stretch to deliver the necessary pressure. They achievethis greater in-use stretch via greater pre-strain, which results intheir relaxed waists being significantly smaller than the body of theuser.

A key benefit of present disclosure is that the improved elasticlaminates deliver sufficient wearing pressure, necessary for good fit,without the amount of pre-strain required in today's currently marketedstranded closed-form pant articles. This results in closed-form pantarticles that have a Relaxed Product Waist Width closer to that of theBody Waist Width.

FIG. 96 shows how the Product Length-to-Waist Silhouettes of theseproducts compare to the consumers' Body Length-to-Waist Silhouettes. Itcan be seen that for these comparative products, their ProductLength-to-Waist Silhouettes fail to match those of their targetconsumers. The result of this mismatch is that the products provide aninferior level of fit, comfort, coverage and gasketing across much ofthe consumer population than products that are designed in line with theanthropometric measures across the same population.

The table below illustrates inventive stranded products, whose ProductLength-to-Waist Silhouettes match the trends of the consumers that theyare targeted to fit and thereby provide better fit & comfort whilereducing the chance of leakage. These inventive products are providedsimply as non-limiting examples.

“Waist Width” is defined as the width of the body measured horizontallyin the front of the body at the omphalion (center of navel). See FIG.94.

“Body Length” means the vertical distance from the navel to the maximumdepth of the crotch, determined by the maximum depth of the crotchwithin the sagittal plane. See FIG. 94.

“Body Length-to-Waist Silhouette” means the Body Length (mm) divided bythe Waist Width (mm). See FIG. 94.

“Relaxed Product Length” means the longitudinal distance between thelongitudinally distal most point in the crotch region and thelongitudinally distal most point along the front waist edge. Thelongitudinal distance is measured parallel to the longitudinal axis ofthe product. Refer to FIG. 86.

“Relaxed Product Waist Width” means the lateral distance from the distalmost point at the right side of the front waist edge to the distal mostpoint at the left side of the front waist edge. The lateral distance ismeasured perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the product. Refer toFIG. 86.

“Product Length-to-Waist Silhouette” means Relaxed Product Length (600)(mm) divided by the Relaxed Product Hip Width (601) (mm). See FIG. 86.

A product's size range is conveyed to consumers by a weight range and/ora waist range printed on the package. For products recommended by weightrange, a Target-Weight is the average of the minimum and maximumrecommended weights.

For many adult incontinence products, only a waist recommendation isprovided. For these products, a Target-Weight can still be determined bycalculating the Average Weight at the minimum and maximum recommendedwaists. FIG. 88 shows this relationship and calculation.

FIG. 95 shows how the Body Length-to-Waist Silhouette changes by weight.For newborn babies, up to when they start walking, they tend to havelarger waists. This results in a higher Body Length-to-Waist Silhouette.As babies start walking, and growing through childhood and intoadulthood, their waists on average do not grow as fast as their bodylengths, resulting in increasing Body Length-to-Waist Silhouettes. Atadulthood and as consumers grow older, their waist's again increasewithout a corresponding body length increase, hence decreasing BodyLength-to-Waist Silhouettes. At each development stage, the ProductLength-to-Waist Silhouette would need to be different do address thediffering body shapes.

A Target Body Length-to-Waist Silhouette can be approximated, as shownon FIG. 95, by curve fitting the population Body Length-to-WaistSilhouette as a function of body weight. This approximation is:

Target Body Length-to-Waist Silhouette=a+b*w+c/w+d*w{circumflex over( )}2+e/w{circumflex over ( )}2+f*w{circumflex over ( )}3+g/w{circumflexover ( )}3

Where:

w=weight in kg

a=1.401979E+00

b=−9.012608E−03

c=−1.086641E+01

d=7.314561E−06

e=5.678403E+01

f=6.589002E−08

g=−9.152613E+01

The closer the Product Length-to-Waist Silhouette is to the Target BodyLength-to-Waist Silhouette, the better fitting, better gasketing thatproduct will be.

Examples of Product Length-to-Waist Silhouette Existing StrandedProducts Target Relaxed Minimum Maximum Average Body Product RelaxedProduct Weight Weight Targeted Length- Waist Product Length- DeltaTarget Target Weight to-Waist Width Length to-Waist versus (kg) (kg)(kg) Silhouette (mm) (mm) Silhouette Target Moony Man Air Fit size S 4 86.0 0.69 122 195 1.59 0.90 size M 5 9 7.0 0.68 111 195 1.75 1.07 size LG9 14 11.5 0.72 129 214 1.66 0.93 size BIG 12 17 14.5 0.76 146 216 1.480.71 size BIGGER THAN BIG 13 25 19.0 0.81 139 222 1.60 0.80 size SUPER18 35 26.5 0.84 152 254 1.67 0.83 Goo.N Yawaraka Fit Pants size S 5 97.0 0.68 93 170 1.82 1.15 size M 7 12 9.5 0.70 84 177 2.10 1.40 size LG9 14 11.5 0.72 92 199 2.16 1.43 size BIG 12 20 16.0 0.78 105 201 1.901.12 size BIGGER THAN BIG 13 25 19.0 0.81 96 218 2.28 1.47 size SUPER 1535 25.0 0.83 117 214 1.84 1.00 Pampers Sara Sara Pants size S 4 8 6.00.69 111 184 1.66 0.97 size M 6 10 8.0 0.68 89 204 2.29 1.61 size L 9 1411.5 0.72 102 208 2.03 1.31 Merries Pull-Ups size M 6 10 8.0 0.68 125189 1.51 0.83 size L 9 14 11.5 0.72 131 186 1.41 0.69 Depend Fit-FlexUnderwear for Women-Moderate size S/M 711 1016 69 0.69 230 335 1.46 0.77size L 965 1270 97 0.55 231 371 1.60 1.05 size XL 1219 1626 126 0.43 249385 1.55 1.11 Always Discreet Boutique size S/M 711 1016 69 0.69 286 2861.00 0.31 size L 965 1270 97 0.55 304 317 1.04 0.49

Examples of Product Length-to-Waist Silhouette for Inventive ProductsTarget Relaxed Minimum Maximum Average Body Product Relaxed ProductInventive Weight Weight Targeted Length- Waist Product Length- BeamedTarget Target Weight to-Waist Width Length to-Waist Product (kg) (kg)(kg) Silhouette (mm) (mm) Silhouette size M 6 10 8 0.68 145 142 0.980.30 size L 9 14 12 0.72 170 174 1.02 0.30 size S/M 711 1016 69 0.69 340337 0.99 0.30 size L 965 1270 97 0.55 400 341 0.85 0.30

Hip-to-Waist Silhouette

A key benefit of having the Relaxed Product Waist Width, the RelaxedProduct Hip Width, and the Relaxed Product Crotch Width (each definedbelow) relatively equal to each other is that they combine to create amore rectangular, more uniform, and, hence, a more stable package.Absorbent articles are generally distributed to consumers in packages ofmultiple stacked articles, as illustrated in FIG. 105. The moredimensionally rectangular the articles (see FIG. 97), in particular atlateral and longitudinal distal edges, the greater the uniformity andstability of the package. The stability of the package is furtherenhanced if the lateral distal edges are roughly parallel to each otherand longitudinal distal edges are roughly parallel to each other. Thiscreates a generally rectangular shape, enabling improved packagestability, which allows greater ease of shipping and storing (e.g., intrucks and on store shelves). For Adult incontinence diapers, due totheir larger overall dimensions, the Product Waist-to-Crotch Silhouettecan be from about 0.8 up to about 2.8. This still facilitatesrectangular, stable packages without the necessity for a Relaxed ProductCrotch Width that is too large relative to the size of the wearer.

In one embodiment, an absorbent article 100, comprises a chassis 200having a topsheet 124, a backsheet 125 and an absorbent core 128disposed between the topsheet 124 and the backsheet 125. The absorbentarticle 100 also comprises a back belt 430B joined to the back waistregion 38 of the chassis 200 and extending outboard of the back waistregion 38 of the chassis 200. The article also comprising a front belt430F joined to the front waist region 36 of the chassis 200 andextending outboard of the front waist region 36 of the chassis 200. Thefront belt 430F may be joined to the back belt 430B at or adjacent thelaterally opposing belt side edges 437 to form leg openings 192 and awaist 190 opening to form a closed-form pant 400. The back belt 430Bhaving a first plurality of elastics 316 a comprising greater than about40 elastic strands and the front belt 430F having a second plurality ofelastics 316 b comprising greater than about 40 elastics strands. Thefirst plurality of elastics 316 a having an Average-Strand-Spacing ofless than about 4 mm. The second plurality of elastics 316 b having anAverage-Strand-Spacing of less than about 4 mm. One or both of the firstplurality of elastics 316 a and second plurality of elastics 316 bhaving a portion that overlaps with the absorbent core 128. Theabsorbent article 100 having a Product Hip-to-Waist Silhouette fromabout 0.8 to about 1.1, alternatively from about 0.9 to about 1.0. Theabsorbent article 100 may have a Product Waist-to-Crotch Silhouette isfrom about 0.8 to about 2.0, alternatively from about 0.9 to about 1.5,in another embodiment the Product Waist-to-Crotch Silhouette may be fromabout 1.2 to about 1.35. The absorbent article may also have a RelaxedProduct Waist Width from about 80 mm to about 270 mm, alternatively fromabout 170 mm to about 270 mm and in other embodiments from about 80 mmto about 180 mm. The absorbent article may also have a Relaxed ProductHip Width from about 80 mm to about 300 mm, alternatively from about 80mm to about 200 mm. The absorbent article may also have a RelaxedProduct length from about 200 mm to about 300 mm.

The back belt 430B may be divided into 4 equal sections, the firstsection, Section 1, including the distal most elastic, the fourthsection, Section 4, including the proximal most elastic, the secondsection, Section 2, is disposed adjacent the first section and the thirdsection, Section 3, is disposed between the second section and thefourth section, Section 4. The front belt 430F may also be divided into4 equal sections, the first section, Section 1, including the distalmost elastic, the fourth section, Section 4, including the proximal mostelastic, the second section, Section 2, is disposed adjacent the firstsection and the third section, Section 3, is disposed between the secondsection and the fourth section, Section 4. One or more of the sectionsforming the front belt 430F may have a different Section-Modulus fromthe remaining sections of the front belt 430F. One or more of thesections forming the back belt 430B may have a different Section-Modulusfrom the remaining sections of the front belt 430B. Alternatively, oneor more of the sections forming the front belt 430F may have a differentSection-Modulus from one or more of the sections forming the back belt430B

The back belt 430B and front belt 430F may both be formed at least inpart by an elastomeric laminate 302 comprising a first substrate layer306 and a second substrate layer 308 and a plurality of elasticsdisposed between the first and second substrate layers 306 and 308. Oneor both of the first and second substrate 306 and 308 forming at least aportion of the back belt 430B and one or both of the first and secondsubstrate 306 and 308 forming at least a portion of the front belt 43Fare separate and spaced apart from each other. Alternatively, one orboth of the first and second substrate 306 and 308 forming at least aportion of the back belt 430B and one or both of the first and secondsubstrate 306 and 308 forming at least a portion of the front belt 43Fare continuous and extends from the first waist edge to thelongitudinally opposing second waist edge. The elastomeric laminate mayalso comprise an adhesive joining the first substrate layer 306 and/orsecond substrate layer 308 to the plurality of elastics 316. Theadhesive may be selected from the group consisting of Styrenic blockcopolymers, Polyolefins, Ethylene-vinyl Acetates, Polyurethanes,Ethylene-propylene copolymers, Propylene-ethylene copolymers, Polyolefinblock polymers, Polyolefin homo-polymers, Polyesters, Polyamides,Silicones, Cyanoacrylics, Acrylics, butyl rubber, and combinationsthereof.

In certain embodiments, one of the sections in the front belt 430F maycomprise more elastics that one or more of the remaining sections of thefront belt 430F and one of the sections in the back belt 430B maycomprise more elastics that one or more of the remaining sections of theback belt 430B. The front belt 430F may have at least one section thatcomprises greater than 10 elastics and the back belt 430B may have atleast two sections that comprise greater than 10 elastics. The frontbelt 430F may have at least two sections having anAverage-Strand-Spacing of less than about 3 mm and the back belt 430Bmay have at least three sections having an Average-Strand-Spacing ofless than about 3 mm.

In another example of an absorbent article 100, the absorbent articlecomprises a chassis 200 having a topsheet 124, a backsheet 125 and anabsorbent core 128 disposed between the topsheet 124 and the backsheet125. The absorbent article 100 also comprises a back belt 430B joined tothe back waist region 38 of the chassis 200 and extending outboard ofthe back waist region 38 of the chassis 200. The article also comprisinga front belt 430F joined to the front waist region 36 of the chassis 200and extending outboard of the front waist region 36 of the chassis 200.The front belt 430F may be joined to the back belt 430B at or adjacentthe laterally opposing belt side edges 437 to form leg openings 192 anda waist 190 opening to form a closed-form pant 400. The back belt 430Bhaving a first plurality of elastics 316 a comprising greater than about40 elastic strands and the front belt 430F having a second plurality ofelastics 316 b comprising greater than about 40 elastics strands. Thefirst plurality of elastics 316 a having an Average-Strand-Spacing ofless than about 4 mm. The second plurality of elastics 316 b having anAverage-Strand-Spacing of less than about 4 mm. One or both of the firstplurality of elastics 316 a and second plurality of elastics 316 bhaving a portion that overlaps with the absorbent core 128. Theabsorbent article 100 having a Product Hip-to-Waist Silhouette fromabout 0.8 to about 1.1, alternatively from about 0.9 to about 1.1. Theabsorbent article 100 may have a Product Waist-to-Crotch Silhouette isfrom about 0.8 to about 2.8, alternatively from about 0.8 to about 2.5,in another embodiment the Product Waist-to-Crotch Silhouette may be fromabout 0.8 to about 2.0. The absorbent article may also have a RelaxedProduct Waist Width from about 200 mm to about 400 mm alternatively fromabout 225 mm to about 375 mm and in other embodiments from about 250 mmto about 350 mm. The absorbent article may also have a Relaxed ProductHip Width from about 200 mm to about 450 mm, alternatively from about225 mm to about 425 mm, in other embodiments the Relaxed Product HipWidth may be from about 250 mm to about 400 mm. The absorbent articlemay also have a Relaxed Product length from about 250 mm to about 450mm, alternatively from about 275 to about 425, in yet another embodimentthe Relaxed Product Length may be from about 300 mm to about 400 mm.

The back belt 430B may be divided into 4 equal sections, the firstsection, Section 1, including the distal most elastic, the fourthsection, Section 4, including the proximal most elastic, the secondsection, Section 2, is disposed adjacent the first section and the thirdsection, Section 3, is disposed between the second section and thefourth section, Section 4. The front belt 430F may also be divided into4 equal sections, the first section, Section 1, including the distalmost elastic, the fourth section, Section 4, including the proximal mostelastic, the second section, Section 2, is disposed adjacent the firstsection and the third section, Section 3, is disposed between the secondsection and the fourth section, Section 4. One or more of the sectionsforming the front belt 430F may have a different Section-Modulus fromthe remaining sections of the front belt 430F. One or more of thesections forming the back belt 430B may have a different Section-Modulusfrom the remaining sections of the front belt 430B. Alternatively, oneor more of the sections forming the front belt 430F may have a differentSection-Modulus from one or more of the sections forming the back belt430B

The back belt 430B and front belt 430F may both be formed at least inpart by an elastomeric laminate 302 comprising a first substrate layer306 and a second substrate layer 308 and a plurality of elasticsdisposed between the first and second substrate layers 306 and 308. Oneor both of the first and second substrate 306 and 308 forming at least aportion of the back belt 430B and one or both of the first and secondsubstrate 306 and 308 forming at least a portion of the front belt 43Fare separate and spaced apart from each other. Alternatively, one orboth of the first and second substrate 306 and 308 forming at least aportion of the back belt 430B and one or both of the first and secondsubstrate 306 and 308 forming at least a portion of the front belt 43Fare continuous and extends from the first waist edge to thelongitudinally opposing second waist edge. The elastomeric laminate mayalso comprise an adhesive joining the first substrate layer 306 and/orsecond substrate layer 308 to the plurality of elastics 316. Theadhesive may be selected from the group consisting of Styrenic blockcopolymers, Polyolefins, Ethylene-vinyl Acetates, Polyurethanes,Ethylene-propylene copolymers, Propylene-ethylene copolymers, Polyolefinblock polymers, Polyolefin homo-polymers, Polyesters, Polyamides,Silicones, Cyanoacrylics, Acrylics, butyl rubber, and combinationsthereof.

In certain embodiments, one of the sections in the front belt 430F maycomprise more elastics that one or more of the remaining sections of thefront belt 430F and one of the sections in the back belt 430B maycomprise more elastics that one or more of the remaining sections of theback belt 430B. The front belt 430F may have at least one section thatcomprises greater than 20 elastics, alternatively greater than 40elastics and the back belt 430B may have at least two sections thatcomprise greater than 20 elastics, alternatively greater than 40elastics. The front belt 430F may have at least two sections having anAverage-Strand-Spacing of less than about 3 mm and the back belt 430Bmay have at least three sections having an Average-Strand-Spacing ofless than about 3 mm.

Examples of Product Hip-to-Waist & Waist-to-Crotch Silhouette forExisting Stranded Products Relaxed Relaxed Relaxed Product ProductProduct Product Product Waist Hip Crotch Hip-to- Waist-to- Width WidthWidth Waist Crotch (mm) (mm) (mm) Silhouette Silhouette Moony Man AirFit size S 122 159 120 1.30 1.02 size M 111 166 117 1.50 0.95 size LG129 170 114 1.32 1.13 size BIG 146 163 122 1.12 1.20 size BIGGER THANBIG 139 190 117 1.37 1.19 size SUPER 152 206 117 1.35 1.30 Goo.NYawaraka Fit Pants size S 93 166 127 1.79 0.73 size M 84 175 122 2.070.69 size LG 92 177 117 1.92 0.79 size BIG 105 170 137 1.61 0.77 sizeBIGGER THAN BIG 96 186 127 1.95 0.75 size SUPER 117 220 178 1.88 0.66Pampers Sara Sara Pants size S 111 167 81 1.50 1.37 size M 89 168 851.89 1.04 size L 102 173 84 1.69 1.22 Merries Pull-Ups size M 125 173122 1.38 1.03 size L 131 185 125 1.41 1.05 Depend Fit-Flex Underwear forWomen-Moderate size S/M 230 263 114 1.14 2.02 size L 231 274 118 1.181.96 size XL 249 291 120 1.17 2.07 Always Discreet Boutique size S/M 286325 102 1.14 2.80 size L 304 330 107 1.08 2.84

Examples of Product Hip-to-Waist & Waist-to- Crotch Silhouette forInventive Stranded Products Relaxed Relaxed Relaxed Product ProductProduct Product Product Inventive Waist Hip Crotch Hip-to- Waist-to-Beamed Width Width Width Waist Crotch Product (mm) (mm) (mm) SilhouetteSilhouette size M 145 155 102 1.07 1.42 size L 170 175 105 1.03 1.62size S/M 300 320 120 1.07 2.50 size L 360 380 130 1.06 2.77

Fastening Systems

The absorbent article 100 may also include a fastening system 179. Whenfastened, the fastening system 179 interconnects the front waist region36 and the rear waist region 38 resulting in a waist circumference thatmay encircle the wearer during wear of the absorbent article 100. Thismay be accomplished by connecting the side panels 330 in one waistregion with the side panels 330 in the longitudinally opposing waistregion (e.g. a refastenable seam in a pant comprising side panels 300)or by connecting elastomeric ear panels 530 in one waist region with thechassis 200 in the longitudinally opposing waist region (e.g. a closurein a taped diaper 500). The fastening system 179 may comprises afastener 175 such as tape tabs, hook and loop fastening components,interlocking fasteners such as tabs & slots, buckles, buttons, snaps,and/or hermaphroditic fastening components, although any other knownfastening means are generally acceptable. Referring to FIG. 3, thefastening system may comprise an elastomeric layer 131 formed of elasticstrands, elastic scrims, elastic films, elastic ribbons and/or elasticnonwovens or combinations thereof. The fasteners 175 may releasablyengage with a mating fastener 178, which may comprise a woven ornonwoven substrate. The fastening system 179 may comprise a fastener 175joined to a fastener tab which is in turn may be joined to theelastomeric side panel 330 or elastomeric ear panel 530. Alternatively,the fastener 175 may be joined directly to the elastomeric side panel330 or elastomeric ear panel 530 of the article 100. Each elastomericside panel 330 may be fastened to a portion of the chassis 200 by aprimary fastener 175 disposed on the elastomeric side panel 330 or on afastener tab connected to the elastomeric side panel 330 and by a matingfastener 178 disposed on the chassis 200 designed to engage with thefastener 175 on the elastomeric side panel 330. The fastener 175 andfastener tab may be substantially rectangular. Alternatively, thefastener 175 and/or fastener tab may be shaped or rounded. Someexemplary surface fastening systems 179 are disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos.3,848,594; 4,662,875; 4,846,815; 4,894,060; 4,946,527; 5,151,092; and5,221,274. An exemplary interlocking fastening system is disclosed inU.S. Pat. No. 6,432,098. The fastening system 179 including a disposaltape may also provide a means for holding the article in a disposalconfiguration as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,963,140. The fasteningsystem 179 may also include primary fasteners 175 and mating fasteners178, as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,699,622. The fastening system 179may be constructed to reduce shifting of overlapped portions or toimprove fit as disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,242,436; 5,499,978;5,507,736; and 5,591,152.

As shown in FIGS. 1-3, and 22-29, the belt pant 400 may comprise afastening system 179 having a primary fastener 175, a fastening tab 176and a mating fastener 178. In FIG. 24 the fastening system 179 isdisposed between the front and back belts 430. The mating fastener 178forms at least a portion of the body facing surface of the belts 430 andthe primary fastener 175 is disposed on a fastener tab 176. The primaryfastener 175 engages with the mating fastener 178 forming a portion ofthe interior surface of the belts 430. The fastening system 179 formsdual refastenable seams 174, one refastenable seam 174 disposed in thefront waist region 36 and one refastenable seam 174 in the back waistregion 38. The fastener tabs are joined to each other by a permanentseam 172 to complete the waist opening 190. The refastenable seam isopened by disengaging the primary fastener 175 from the mating fastener178 in one or both of the front and back waist regions 36 and 38. Therefastenable seam may be reclosed by reengaging the primary fastener 175and the mating fastener 178.

In FIG. 25 the fastening system 179 is disposed between the front andback belts 430. The mating fastener 178 forms a portion of the bodyfacing surface of the front belt 430F and the primary fastener 175 isdisposed in an engaged fashion with the body facing surface of the frontbelt 430. The fastening system 179 also comprises a fastening tab 176that is permanently seamed to the back belt 430B at or adjacent the sideedge 437. The fastener 175 and the fastening tab 176 are joined to eachother via an adhesive, cohesive, or other means known in the art tocomplete the waist opening 190. The refastenable seam is opened bydisengaging the primary fastener 175 from the mating fastener 178. Therefastenable seam may be reclosed by reengaging the primary fastener 175and the mating fastener 178.

In FIG. 26 the fastening system 179 is disposed between the front andback belts 430. The primary fastener 175 is permanently joined to thefront belt 430F adjacent the side edge 437 of the belt 430. The matingfastener 178 forms at least a portion of the fastening tab 176. Thefastening tab 176 is permanently seamed to the back belt 430B at oradjacent the side edge 437. The fastener 175 disposed on the front belt430F is refastenably engaged with the fastening tab 176 to complete thewaist opening 190. The refastenable seam is opened by disengaging theprimary fastener 175 from the fastening tab 176 which is formed at leastin part by the mating fastener 178. The refastenable seam may bereclosed by reengaging the primary fastener 175 and the fastening tab176.

In FIG. 27 the fastening system 179 is disposed on the exterior surfaceof the front belt 430. The primary fastener 175 is permanently joined tothe front belt 430F adjacent the side edge 437 of the belt 430. Themating fastener 178 forms at least a portion of the fastening tab 176.The fastening tab 176 is permanently seamed to the back belt 430B at oradjacent the side edge 437. The fastener 175 disposed on the front belt430F is refastenably engaged with the fastening tab 176 to complete thewaist opening 190. The refastenable seam is opened by disengaging theprimary fastener 175 from the fastening tab 176 which is formed at leastin part by the mating fastener 178. The refastenable seam may bereclosed by reengaging the primary fastener 175 and the fastening tab176.

In FIG. 28 the fastening system 179 is disposed on the exterior surfaceof the front belt 430. The primary fastener 175 is permanently joined tothe fastening tab 176. The mating fastener 178 forms at least a portionof exterior surface of the front belt 430. The fastening tab 176 ispermanently seamed to the front belt 430F and the back belt 430B at oradjacent the side edge 437. A perforation is disposed between theprimary fastener 175 and the permanent side seam 172. The fastener 175disposed on the fastening tab 176 is refastenably engaged with themating fastener 178 to complete the waist opening 190. The refastenableseam is opened by disengaging the primary fastener 175 from the matingfastener 178 which forms at least a portion of the front belt 430Fsubsequently breaking the perforation disposed adjacent the permanentside seam 172 and opening the pant. The refastenable seam may bereclosed by engaging the primary fastener 175 to the exterior surface ofthe front belt 430.

In FIG. 29 the fastening system 179 is disposed between the front andback belts 430. The mating fastener 178 forms a portion of the bodyfacing surface of the front belt 430F and the primary fastener 175 isdisposed on a fastening tab 176. The fastening tab 176 is permanentlyseamed to the back belt 430B at or adjacent the side edge 437. Theprimary fastener 175 is refastenable engaged with the body facingsurface of the front belt, i.e. mating fastener adjacent the side edge437 of the belt 430 to complete the waist opening 190. The refastenableseam is opened by disengaging the primary fastener 175 from the matingfastener 178. The refastenable seam may be reclosed by reengaging theprimary fastener 175 and the mating fastener 178.

For the belt refastenable executions, the references to front belt 430Fand back belt 430B should be considered to be interchangeable such thata fastener 175 that is described above in the front waist region 36 maybe disposed in the back waist region 38 in a similar structuralconfiguration.

Identical or Substantially Identical Chassis

As disclosed in U.S. Pub. No. 2013/0211355, it may be desirable to offeran array of packages for fitting wearers having different needs, butcomprising identical or substantially identical chassis 200. Forinstance, an array may comprise a first package comprising a firstabsorbent article 100 and a second package may comprise a secondabsorbent article 100, where the first and second packages comprisearticles having identical or substantially identical chassis 200 asdescribed in U.S. Pub. No. 2013/0211355. More particularly, the firstpackage may comprise a first chassis 200 and the second package maycomprise a second chassis 200, where each of the first and secondchassis comprise the same dimensions of one or more of: core width atthe lateral axis 44, core width at one of the front or rear core edge 26and 28, a distance from a left outer cuff distal edge 142 to a rightouter cuff distal edge 142, a distance from a left inner cuff proximaledge 152 to a left outer cuff distal edge 142, a distance from a leftinner cuff proximal edge 152 to a right inner cuff proximal edge 152, adistance from a left inner cuff proximal edge 152 to a left outer cuffdistal edge 142, a free height of the inner cuff, inner cuff hem foldwidth, inner cuff elastics length, outer cuff elastics length, corelength, chassis length and backsheet width.

Further, each of the first and second chassis 200 may comprise identicalchemical compositions of one or more of a topsheet 124, backsheet film126, backsheet nonwoven 127, core super absorbent polymers, core pulp,core nonwoven, core tissue, leg cuff film, leg cuff nonwoven, superabsorbent polymer adhesive, core nonwoven adhesive, leg cuff elasticadhesive, and backsheet nonwoven/film adhesive.

And, each of the first and second chassis 200 may comprise the samebasis weight of one or more of the topsheet 124, backsheet film 126,backsheet nonwoven 127, core super absorbent polymers, core pulp, legcuff nonwoven, leg cuff film, super absorbent polymer adhesive, leg cuffadhesive, and backsheet nonwoven/film adhesive.

And, each of the first and second chassis 200 may comprisecompositionally identical core super absorbent polymers. The first andsecond chassis 200 may have identical component cross sectional orderand disposition in at least one of the front waist region 36, back waistregion 38, and crotch region 37. The inner leg cuffs 150 of the firstand second chassis 200 may be composed of the compositionally identicalmaterials.

Further, the inner leg cuffs 150 of the first and second chassis 200 mayhave identical component cross sectional order and disposition in atleast one of the front waist region 36, back waist region 38, and crotchregion 37. The distance from the left outer cuff distal edge 142 to aright outer cuff distal edge 142 may the same. The distance from theleft inner cuff proximal edge 152 to left outer cuff distal edge 142 maybe the same. The distance from the left inner cuff proximal edge 152 tothe right inner cuff proximal edge 152 is the same. The lengths of theinner and outer cuffs 150 and 140 are the same.

Further one or more of the chassis 200, belt 430, side panel 330, earpanel 530, waistband 122, inner leg cuff 150, outer leg cuff 140,topsheet 124 and backsheet 125 of a first absorbent article and one ormore of the chassis 200, belt 430, side panel 330, ear panel 530,waistband 122, inner leg cuff 150, outer leg cuff 140, topsheet 124 andbacksheet 125 of a second absorbent article being identical orsubstantially identical to each other with regard to one or more ofAverage-Dtex, Average-Strand-Spacing, Average-Pre-Strain, nonwoven basisweight and/or nonwoven texture.

Different product offerings in an array may have identical orsubstantially identical chassis 200 as the side panels 330, ear panels530 or belts 430 may be used to distinguish the absorbent article formsone from another. For example, first and second absorbent articles mayhave identical chassis (compositionally, dimensionally,cross-sectionally), but the first article 100 may have a differentlength due to disposition of the belts. As a second example, first andsecond absorbent articles 100 may have identical chassis(compositionally, dimensionally, cross-sectionally), but the firstarticle may have a different length and/or width due to the size of thebelts.

First and second absorbent articles 100 may have identical chassiscompositionally, but not dimensionally, and not cross-sectionally. Firstand second absorbent articles 100 may have identical chassisdimensionally, but not compositionally, and not cross-sectionally. Firstand second absorbent articles 100 may have identical chassiscross-sectionally, but not dimensionally, and not compositionally.Alternatively, first and second absorbent articles 100 may have two, butnot three of (1) compositionally, (2) dimensionally, and (3)cross-sectionally identical chassis.

It should be noted that for all of the above statements relating toidentical or substantially identical chassis that a third packagecomprising a third article 100 may be added. It should also be notedthat the structure and/or form of the first article 100, second article100 and third article 100 when present can all be different in otherwords the first article 100 may be an open-form, taped diaper 500, thesecond article may be a closed-form, side panel refastenable pant 300,and the third article 100 may be a closed-form, belt pant 400.

Graphics

There is a desire to make disposable absorbent articles 100 look morelike underwear. This desire is driven by the desire to address thepsychological and emotional development needs of the wearer, especiallyinfants and children. There are several factors that can affect whetheran absorbent article 100 is perceived as underwear-like. These factorsinclude, but are not limited to, the noticeability of seams 170, theexistence of graphics on a larger percentage of the viewable surfaces ofthe absorbent article 100, the appearance of waist and leg features andgraphics flowing from or over two or more absorbent article components.

There are, however, many obstacles to designing and executing anabsorbent article 100 that is underwear-like. One is that absorbentarticles are a compilation of separate article components and as newdisposable absorbent article technologies are developed, they may resultin the need for incorporation of additional, separate, articlecomponents. Because of the manner in which absorbent article componentsare incorporated, even the viewable surfaces of the article may haveseams or areas of overlap or connection. Thus, it is challenging toplace graphics on these individual components and to line them up suchthat the multi-component construction appears to be an integratedstructure wherein the seams are de-emphasized and process variations aremasked.

Further, depending on the type of article construction, it ischallenging to maintain the uniform appearance of graphics that may beprinted on more than one component. For example, a component with aparticular graphic printed on it may eventually be incorporated into thearticle at a different depth than an adjacent component that also has agraphic printed on it. Depending on whether particular portions of agraphic are printed on an outermost layer, for example, or, if not, howopaque the layers may be through which the various portions of thegraphic may be viewed, can have an impact on an entire article graphicthat is meant to look uniform and consistent in that the variousportions may have measureable differences in appearance when printed ondifferent components or at different depths relative to the outersurface. For these and other reasons, it is challenging to create anabsorbent article that comprises mainstream technologies and also thatcomprises graphics on multiple absorbent article components, such thatthe graphics flow from one absorbent article component to anotherarticle component in a manner that deemphasizes transitions from onecomponent to another and creates a holistic underwear-like appearance.

It is a desire of the present disclosure to provide absorbent articles100 that look like underwear, while, at the same time, incorporatingmultiple absorbent article components that offer the benefits andfunctionality of the latest technologies (e.g., high stretch componentsintegrated with low/no stretch components, highly breathable, high airpermeability components, etc.). More specifically, it is a desire of thepresent disclosure to provide absorbent articles 100 comprising graphicsdisposed on or spanning multiple viewable absorbent article componentswhile creating a uniform appearance.

Disposable absorbent articles 100 of the present disclosure can have 2or 4 elastomeric ear panels 530 or side panels 330 that overlap with aportion of the chassis 200 or an elastomeric belt 430 disposed in one orboth of the waist regions that overlap with a portion of the chassis200. The ear panels 530 or side panels 330 may comprise a first graphicelement and the chassis 200 may comprise a second graphic elementwherein the graphic elements are designed to work in concert with eachother to create a composite graphic element. A first elastomeric earpanel 530 or side panel 330 may comprise a first graphic extending froma side edge of the ear or side panel 537 and 337 respectively toward thelongitudinal axis 42, a second elastomeric ear panel 530 or side panel330 comprises a second graphic extending from a side edge of the ear orside panel 537 and 337 respectively toward the longitudinal axis 42 andthe center chassis 200 comprises a third graphic extending from a firstside edge 237 of the chassis to the opposing side edge 237 of thechassis wherein the first, second and third graphic are substantiallyaligned. In general, a composite graphic is formed when two or moreseparate graphics are substantially aligned to form a larger continuousgraphic.

As disclosed in U.S. Ser. No. 15/479,407, disposable absorbent articlescomprising one or more belts 430 a first graphic may be printed on asurface of one of the layers of one of the first belt or second belts430, a second graphic may be printed on a surface of one of the groupconsisting of a nonwoven layer of the first belt 430 or second belt 430,a layer of the chassis 200, a backsheet 125, and an outer cover, e.g.backsheet nonwoven 127. Additional graphics may be printed on otherlayers of the article, for example, any of the layers of the belts 430,the elastomeric material, the chassis 200, or of the backsheet 125 orouter cover. A first elastomeric belt 430 may comprise a first graphicelement and the chassis 200 comprises a second graphic element whereinthe first and second graphic elements are substantially aligned.

When the absorbent article comprises a belt 430, it is desirable thatthe arrangement of graphic elements cover greater than about 30% of thesurface area of the belt 430 or greater than about 40% or greater thanabout 50%. The graphic elements may cover greater than 75% of thesurface area of the belt 430. Additionally, the arrangement of graphicsmay when viewed from the outside appear to comprise at least 3 colors orat least 5 colors or greater than 7 colors. To provide a veryunderwear-like appearance the arrangement of graphic elements may bedisposed within 30 mm of the waist edge 136 and 138 in one or both ofthe waist regions, or within 20 mm or within 10 mm of the leg openingedge. The graphics elements may be disposed at or immediately adjacentthe waist edge of one or both of the belts 430. In addition, it may bedesirable that the arrangement of graphic elements may also be disposedwithin about 10 mm of a leg edge of the belt 430.

When the absorbent article comprises discrete side panels 330 or earpanels 530, it is desirable that the arrangement of graphic elementscover greater than about 10% of the surface area of the side panel 330or ear panel 530 or greater than about 25% or greater than about 50%.The graphic elements may cover greater than 75% of the surface area ofthe discrete side panel 330 or ear panel 530. Additionally, thearrangement of graphics may when viewed from the outside appear tocomprise at least 3 colors or at least 5 colors or greater than 7colors. To provide a very underwear-like appearance the arrangement ofgraphic elements may be disposed within 30 mm of the waist edge in oneor both of the waist regions or within 20 mm or within 10 mm of the legopening edge. The graphics elements may be disposed at or immediatelyadjacent the waist edge of the side panels 330 or ear panels 530. Inaddition, it may be desirable that the arrangement of graphic elementsmay also be disposed within about 10 mm of a leg opening edge of theside panel 330 or ear panel 530.

For graphics meant to be viewed from the outside of the absorbentarticle, it may be desirable to print on a layer that is outboard of theelastic layer, including outboard (between the elastic layer and theexterior) of elastic strands as the elastic layer may occlude thevisibility of any graphics printed inboard (between the elastic layerand the wearer). As such the interior surface of the most exteriornonwoven layer of the belt, elastomeric ear panels, side panels, andchassis, may be ideal for printing graphics when combined with elasticlayers as disclosed herein.

For graphics meant to be viewed from the inside of the absorbentarticle, it may be desirable to print on a layer that is inboard of theelastic layer, including inboard (between the elastic layer and thewearer) of elastic strands as the elastic layer may occlude thevisibility of any graphics printed outboard (between the elastic layerand the exterior). As such the exterior surface of the most interiornonwoven layer of the belt, elastomeric ear panels, side panels, andchassis, may be ideal for printing graphics when combined with elasticlayers as disclosed herein.

Absorbent Cores

As used herein, the term “absorbent core” 128 refers to the component ofthe absorbent article 100 having the most absorbent capacity and thatcomprises an absorbent material. Referring to FIG. 57A-C, in someinstances, absorbent material (e.g., 51) may be positioned within a corebag or a core wrap 74. The absorbent material may be profiled or notprofiled, depending on the specific absorbent article. The absorbentcore 128 may comprise, consist essentially of, or consist of, a corewrap, absorbent material, and glue enclosed within the core wrap. Theabsorbent material may comprise superabsorbent polymers, a mixture ofsuperabsorbent polymers and air felt, only air felt, and/or a highinternal phase emulsion foam. In some instances, the absorbent materialmay comprise at least 80%, at least 85%, at least 90%, at least 95%, atleast 99%, or up to 100% superabsorbent polymers, by weight of theabsorbent material. In such instances, the absorbent material may freeof air felt, or at least mostly free of air felt. The absorbent coreperiphery, which may be the periphery of the core wrap, may define anysuitable shape, such as rectangular “T,” “Y,” “hour-glass,” or“dog-bone” shaped, for example. An absorbent core periphery having agenerally “dog bone” or “hour-glass” shape may taper along its widthtowards the crotch region 37 of the absorbent article 100.

Referring to FIGS. 57A, 57B and 57C, the absorbent core 128 may haveareas having little or no absorbent material, where a wearer-facingsurface of the core bag 74 may be joined to a garment-facing surface ofthe core bag 74. These areas having little or no absorbent material maybe referred to as “channels” 129 as shown in FIGS. 55 and 56. Thesechannels can embody any suitable shapes and any suitable number ofchannels may be provided. In other instances, the absorbent core may beembossed to create the impression of channels. The absorbent core inFIG. 57A, is merely an example absorbent core. Many other absorbentcores with or without channels are also within the scope of the presentdisclosure.

As used herein, a loaded absorbent core is one holding (or capable ofholding) a load of at least 50, 100, or 200 milliliters (mls) fordiapers, pants, and adult incontinence articles. The disposableabsorbent articles of the present disclosure comprising an absorbentcore are designed to fit the wearer with an empty absorbent core (i.e.,one that is not loaded), as well as being capable of fitting the wearfor an appreciable time (2 or more hours) even when the core is loaded.

Core Wraps

The core wrap may be made of a single substrate, material, or nonwovenfolded around the absorbent material, or may comprise two (or more)substrates, materials, or nonwovens which are attached to another.Typical attachments are the so-called C-wrap and/or sandwich wrap. In aC-wrap, the longitudinal and/or transversal edges of one of thesubstrates may be folded over the other substrate to form flaps. Theseflaps are then bonded to the external surface of the other substrate,typically by gluing. Other techniques may be used to form a core wrap.For example, the longitudinal and/or transversal edges of the substratesmay be bonded together and then folded underneath the absorbent core 128and bonded in that position as illustrated in FIG. 54.

The core wrap may be at least partially sealed adjacent all of the sidesof the absorbent core 128 so that substantially no absorbent materialleaks out of the core. By “substantially no absorbent material” it ismeant that less than 5%, less than 2%, less than 1%, or about 0% byweight of absorbent material escape the core wrap. The term “seal” is tobe understood in a broad sense. The seal does not need to be continuousalong the whole periphery of the core wrap but may be discontinuousalong part or the whole of it, such as formed by a series of seal pointsspaced on a line. A seal may be formed by gluing and/or thermal bonding.

The core wrap may also be formed by a single substrate which may encloseas in a parcel wrap the absorbent material and be sealed along the frontside and rear side of the core and one longitudinal seal. The core wrapmay comprise one or more nonwoven layers formed of a co-form materialhaving a pulp fiber to synthetic fiber ratio of from 1:3 to 3:1, i.e.25%:75% pulp fiber:synthetic fiber to 75%:25% pulp fiber:syntheticfiber.

Channels

As illustrated in FIGS. 55-57C, the absorbent core 128 may comprise atleast one channel 129, which is at least partially oriented in thelongitudinal direction of the absorbent article 100 (i.e., has alongitudinal vector component). Other channels may be at least partiallyoriented in the lateral direction (i.e., has a lateral vector component)or in any other direction. In the following, the plural form “channels”will be used to mean “at least one channel”. The channels 129 may becircular, oblong, or be in the shape of a variety of other closedpolygons. The channels 129 may be formed in various ways. For example,the channels 129 may be formed by zones within the absorbent core 128and may be substantially free of, or free of, absorbent material, inparticular, SAP. In addition, or alternatively, the channels 129 mayalso be formed by continuously or discontinuously bonding the top sideof the core wrap to the bottom side of the core wrap through theabsorbent core in the channel area. The channels 129 may be continuousor intermittent. The liquid management system, which may comprise anacquisition layer, distribution layer or both, or another layer of theabsorbent article 100, may also comprise channels 129, which may or notcorrespond to the channels 129 of the absorbent core, as described inmore detail below.

The absorbent core 128 may comprise more than two channels, for example,at least 3, at least 4, etc. Shorter channels may also be present, forexample in the rear waist region or the front waist region of the coreas represented by the pair of channels 129 towards the front of theabsorbent article 100. The channels 129 may comprise one or more pairsof channels symmetrically arranged, or otherwise arranged relative tothe longitudinal axis 42 or the lateral axis 44.

At least some or all of the channels 129 may be permanent channels,meaning their integrity is at least partially maintained both in the drystate and in the wet state. Permanent channels may be obtained byprovision of one or more adhesive materials, for example, the fibrouslayer of adhesive material or construction glue that helps adhere asubstrate with an absorbent material within the walls of the channel.Permanent channels may also be formed by bonding the upper side andlower side of the core wrap and/or the topsheet 124 to the backsheet 125together through the channels. Typically, an adhesive may be used tobond both sides of the core wrap or the topsheet and the backsheetthrough the channels, but it is possible to bond via other knownprocesses, such as pressure bonding, ultrasonic bonding, heat bonding,or combinations thereof. The core wrap or the topsheet 124 and thebacksheet 125 may be continuously bonded or intermittently bonded alongthe channels 129. The channels 129 may advantageously remain or becomevisible at least through the topsheet 124 and/or backsheet 125 when theabsorbent article 100 is fully loaded with a fluid. This may be obtainedby making the channels substantially free of SAP, so they will notswell, and sufficiently large so that they will not close when wet.Furthermore, bonding the core wrap to itself or the topsheet 124 to thebacksheet 125 in the channel area may be advantageous.

Absorbent cores and/or liquid management systems without any channelsare also within the scope of the present disclosure. These cores mayinclude airfelt-free cores, SAP/pulp cores, pulp cores, or other coresknown to those of skill in the art.

Acquisition Layers

One or more acquisition materials (e.g., 130) may be present at leastpartially intermediate the topsheet 124 and the absorbent core 128. Theacquisition materials are typically hydrophilic materials that providesignificant wicking of bodily exudates. These materials may dewater thetopsheet 124 and quickly move bodily exudates into the absorbent core128. The acquisition materials 38 may comprise one or more nonwovenmaterials, foams, cellulosic materials, cross-linked cellulosicmaterials, air laid cellulosic nonwoven materials, spunlace materials,or combinations thereof, for example. In some instances, portions of theacquisition materials may extend through portions of the topsheet 124,portions of the topsheet 124 may extend through portions of theacquisition materials, and/or the topsheet 124 may be nested with theacquisition materials. Typically, an acquisition material or layer mayhave a width and length that are smaller than the width and length ofthe topsheet 124. The acquisition material may be a secondary topsheetin the feminine pad context. The acquisition material may have one ormore channels as described in the absorbent core 128 section (includingthe embossed version). The channels in the acquisition material mayalign or not align with channels in the absorbent core 128. In anexample, a first acquisition material may comprise a nonwoven materialand as second acquisition material may comprise a cross-linkedcellulosic material.

Absorbent Article Packaging and Package Indicia

The absorbent articles 100 of the present disclosure may be placed intopackages 610 (shown in FIG. 105 as dotted lines so the absorbentarticles 100 may be seen). The packages may comprise polymeric filmsand/or other materials. Graphics and/or indicia 1000 relating toproperties of the absorbent articles may be formed on, printed on,positioned on, and/or placed on outer portions of the packages. Eachpackage may comprise a plurality of absorbent articles 100. Theabsorbent articles 100 may be packed under compression so as to reducethe size of the packages, while still providing an adequate amount ofabsorbent articles per package. By packaging the absorbent articlesunder compression, caregivers can easily handle and store the packages610, while also providing distribution savings to manufacturers owing tothe size of the packages. Accordingly, packages 610 of the absorbentarticles 100 of the present disclosure may have an In-Bag Stack Heightas disclosed in U.S. Publication No. 2014/0052088 to Weisman, titledABSORBENT PRODUCTS HAVING IMPROVED PACKAGING EFFICIENCY.

Desirably, the package 610 has parallel sides and a package top that isparallel to the package bottom, making the package ideal for stacking ona shelf for storage or for display in a store for purchase by consumers.Typically packages 610 of absorbent articles 100 are labeled with arecommended wearer weight range (typically for babies, infants, andtoddlers) and/or by waist circumference (typically for adult absorbentarticle products) that the packaged article is intended to fit. As aresult, the weight and/or the waist circumference information is mostoften placed on the package 610 as part of the indicia 1000 to identifythe appropriate size of the article needed by the consumer.

Further, the indicia 1000 may illustrate the wearer wearing the articleand/or a separate indicia may illustrate the article component orfeature. Regarding absorbent articles for babies, descriptions ofsuitable stages of development indicia and methods of displayingpackages comprising absorbent articles may be found in U.S. Pat. No.7,222,732 to Ronn, titled MERCHANDISE DISPLAY SYSTEM FOR IDENTIFYINGDISPOSABLE ABSORBENT ARTICLE CONFIGURATIONS FOR WEARERS. CHEMISTRY(SPANDEX vs. EXTRUDED STRANDS) AND STRUCTURE

Beamed elastic uses Spandex fibers. One type of Spandex fiber is“PolyUrethane Urea” elastomer or the “high hard segment levelPolyUrethane” elastomer, which must be formed into fibers using asolution (solvent) spinning process (as opposed to being processable inthe molten state.) The Urea linkages in PolyUrethane Urea providesstrong mutual chemical interactions crucial for providing “anchoring”that enables good stress relaxation performance at temperatures nearbody temperature on timescales corresponding to diaper wear, includingovernight. This type of anchoring enables better force relaxation (i.e.little force decay with time when held in stretched condition at bodytemperature) over many thermoplastic polyurethane (PolyUrethane withhard segment melting below 200 deg. C.) or thermoplastic Styrenic blockcopolymers.

In contrast, extruded strands and scrims are typically made of Styrenicblock copolymers or thermoplastic elastomers that can be formed in themolten state by conventional extrusion processes. Thermoplasticelastomers include compositions like polyolefin, polyurethane(PolyUrethane with hard segment melting below 200 deg. C.) elastomers,etc. Because these thermoplastic elastomers like Polyurethane(PolyUrethane with hard segment melting below 200 deg. C.) can bemelted/remelted, and extruded it makes them susceptible to higher stressrelaxation in use, which is a major negative. The styrenic blockcopolymers used in extruded strands comprise a comparatively longrubbery midblock situated between comparatively short end blocks. Endblocks sufficiently short to enable good flow conventional extrusionprocesses often have a greater propensity to stress relax and undergoforce relaxation over time see FIG. 104.

The Urea linkage present in Spandex requires it to be made by spinningprocess. Spandex can't be melted/remelted or extruded like Styrenicblock copolymers. Spandex pre-polymer is combined with solvent andadditives, and the solution is spun to make solid spandex fiber.Multiple fibers are then formed together to make one spandex strand. TheSpandex strands may have surface finish to avoid blocking and wound ontospools. The one spandex fiber may have a decitex of about 15, so a 500decitex strand may have nominally 33 fibers wound together to make onestrand. Depending on the decitex we use for beam approach, we may have15 fibers (or filaments), 8 fibers, 5 fibers, 3 fibers or even as low as2 fibers. Spandex fiber can be mono-component or bi-component (asdisclosed in WO201045637A2).

Further related to the chemistry of beamed elastics, it may be desirableto coat the beamed elastics with an oil, such as a silicone oil,including about 10%, about 7%, about 5%, about 3%, or about 1% siliconeoil. Treating the beamed elastics with silicone oil helps to preventblocking (cross-linking) when the strands are wound to a spool or a beamand it also lowers the COF for the strand in textile machinery (forweaving, knitting and warping processes).

Commercially available Spandex strands may also be known as Lycra,Creora, Roica, or Dorlastan. Spandex is often referred as Elastan fiberor Polyurethane fiber.

LYCRA HYFIT strands, a product of Invista, Wichita, Kans., are asuitable for making the strands that make up the plurality of elastics316 that make up the elastomeric laminate 302. Some strands, forexample, the aforementioned LYCRA HYFIT, may comprise a number ofindividual fibers wound together to form the strand. With regard toelastic strands formed of a number of individual fibers it has beendiscovered that the individual fibers can move relative to each otherchanging the cross sectional shape of the strand as well as becomingunraveled which can lead to poor control of the strands as well as poorbonding/adhering/joining of the elastic strands to one or both of thefirst substrate layer 306 and second substrate layer 308 of theelastomeric laminate 302. In order to minimize the negatives with regardto strands comprising a plurality of fibers it would be advantageous tominimize the number of fibers in a given strand. It would therefore bedesirable to have less than about 40 fibers per strand, less than about30 fibers per strand, less than about 20 fibers per strand, less thanabout 10 fibers per strand, less than about 5 fibers per strand and 1fiber forming the strand. In the case of a single fiber forming thestrand which can deliver comparable performance to the multi-fiberstrands of the prior art it would be desireable for the fiber to have afiber decitex from about 22 to about 300 and a fiber diameter from about50 micrometers to about 185 micrometers.

Sensors

The absorbent articles of the present disclosure may comprise a sensorsystem for monitoring changes within the absorbent article 100. Thesensor system may be discrete from or integral with the absorbentarticle 100. The absorbent article 100 may comprise sensors that cansense various aspects of the absorbent article 100 associated withinsults of bodily exudates such as urine and/or BM (e.g., the sensorsystem may sense variations in temperature, humidity, presence ofammonia or urea, various vapor components of the exudates (urine andfeces), changes in moisture vapor transmission through the absorbentarticles garment-facing layer, changes in translucence of thegarment-facing layer, color changes through the garment-facing layer,etc.). Additionally, the sensor system my sense components of urine,such as ammonia or urea and/or byproducts resulting from reactions ofthese components with the absorbent article 100. The sensor system maysense byproducts that are produced when urine mixes with othercomponents of the absorbent article 100 (e.g., adhesives, AGM, etc.).The components or byproducts being sensed may be present as vapors thatmay pass through the garment-facing layer. It may also be desirable toplace reactants in the diaper that change state (e.g. color,temperature, etc.) or create a measurable byproduct when mixed withurine or BM. The sensor system may also sense changes in pH, pressure,odor, the presence of gas, blood, a chemical marker or a biologicalmarker or combinations thereof.

The sensor system or portions thereof may be integrated with theabsorbent article 100 with hook and loops fasteners, adhesives, thermalbonds, mating fasteners like snaps or buttons, or may be disposed inpockets, recesses or void spaces built into the absorbent article 100,or combinations thereof. Many of these integration means enable removalof and/or attachment of the sensor system or portions thereof from or tothe absorbent article 100. The absorbent article 100 may furthercomprise graphics for the purpose of properly locating the sensor systemor portions thereof. In addition, in cases where an auxiliary article ispresent, the auxiliary article may be joined to the absorbent article100 by similar integration means. Regarding pockets, it may be desirableto form a pocket within or adjacent to the wearer-facing layer orgarment-facing layer of the article. A pocket may be formed by joiningan additional material (e.g., a nonwoven strip) to the interior orexterior surface of the garment-facing layer. When joined to theinterior surface of the garment-facing layer, it may be desirable toposition an open edge (to be the pocket opening) of the sheet to becoterminous or adjacent to an edge of the waist opening 190 such thatthere is no need to make a cut in the garment-facing layer for insertingthe sensor system 700 or portions thereof into the pocket opening.

As used in this application, the term “sensor system” refers not only tothe elements responsible for detecting a stimulus and/or change instatus of the article and signaling such detection, but also may includethe housing or carrier layer or substrate around such element(s). A“sensor system” may include a carrier layer with multiple elementscapable of detecting one or more stimuli; and, the multiple elements maycreate multiple locations capable of detecting one or more stimuli. Thesensor systems of the present disclosure may be formed of multiplecomponents capable of monitoring urine and/or fecal insults. The sensorsystem may take on a variety of configurations, which are determined bythe means in which the presence of urine and/or feces is detected. Afterdetection of urine and/or feces, the sensor system may inform acaregiver and/or a child by generating a notification. The notificationmay be an auditory signal, an olfactory signal, a tactile signal or avisual signal. It is understood that the sensor system may comprise adevice for sending a wireless signal to a remote receiver which may inturn result in an auditory signal, a visual signal, a tactile signal orother sensory signal and/or combinations thereof.

Various sensors may be used as part of the sensor system, includinginductive, capacitive, ultra-sonic, optical, moisture, humidity (e.g.,MVTR), pH, biological, chemical, mechanical, temperature,electromagnetic and combinations thereof, as described and illustratedin U.S. Pub. Nos. 2012/0310190 and 2012/0310191.

The sensor system may include one or more transmitters. A transmitter isa device that sends electromagnetic waves carrying messages or signals,for instance, one or more of the sensor elements may comprise atransmitter. Alternatively, a transmitter may be removably fixed to theabsorbent article 100 or to an auxiliary article such that it is incontact or in communication with the sensor elements.

Feminine Absorbent Article

The feminine absorbent article 801, shown in FIGS. 78-83 may compriseany known or otherwise effective topsheet 124, such as one which iscompliant, soft feeling, and non-irritating to the wearer's skin.Suitable topsheet materials include a liquid pervious material that isoriented towards and contacts the body of the wearer permitting bodilydischarges to rapidly penetrate through it without allowing fluid toflow back through the topsheet to the skin of the wearer. The topsheet124, while being capable of allowing rapid transfer of fluid through it,also provides for the transfer or migration of the lotion compositiononto an external or internal portion of a wearer's skin. A suitabletopsheet can be made of various materials such as woven and nonwovenmaterials; apertured film materials including apertured formedthermoplastic films, apertured plastic films, and fiber-entangledapertured films; hydro-formed thermoplastic films; porous foams;reticulated foams; reticulated thermoplastic films; thermoplasticscrims; or combinations thereof.

Apertured film materials suitable for use as the topsheet 124 as shownin FIG. 81 include those apertured plastic films that are non-absorbentand pervious to body exudates and provide for minimal or no flow back offluids through the topsheet. Non-limiting examples of other suitableformed films, including apertured and non-apertured formed films, aremore fully described in U.S. Pat. No. 3,929,135, issued to Thompson onDec. 30, 1975; U.S. Pat. No. 4,324,246, issued to Mullane et al. on Apr.13, 1982; U.S. Pat. No. 4,342,314, issued to Radel et al. on Aug. 3,1982; U.S. Pat. No. 4,463,045, issued to Ahr et al. on Jul. 31, 1984;U.S. Pat. No. 5,006,394, issued to Baird on Apr. 9, 1991; U.S. Pat. No.4,609,518, issued to Curro et al. on Sep. 2, 1986; and U.S. Pat. No.4,629,643, issued to Curro et al. on Dec. 16, 1986. Commerciallyavailable formed filmed topsheets include those topsheet materialsmarketed by the Procter & Gamble Company (Cincinnati, Ohio) under theDRI-WEAVE® tradename.

Non-limiting examples of woven and nonwoven materials suitable for useas the topsheet 124 include fibrous materials made from natural fibers,modified natural fibers, synthetic fibers, or combinations thereof.These fibrous materials can be either hydrophilic or hydrophobic, but itis preferable that the topsheet be hydrophobic or rendered hydrophobic.As an option portions of the topsheet can be rendered hydrophilic, bythe use of any known method for making topsheets containing hydrophiliccomponents. One such method include treating an apertured film componentof a nonwoven/apertured thermoplastic formed film topsheet with asurfactant as described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,950,264, issued to Osborn onAug. 21, 1990. Other suitable methods describing a process for treatingthe topsheet with a surfactant are disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,988,344and 4,988,345, both issued to Reising et al. on Jan. 29, 1991. Thetopsheet 124 may have hydrophilic fibers, hydrophobic fibers, orcombinations thereof.

When the topsheet 124 comprises a nonwoven fibrous material in the formof a nonwoven web, the nonwoven web may be produced by any knownprocedure for making nonwoven webs, nonlimiting examples of whichinclude spunbonding, carding, wet-laid, air-laid, meltblown,needle-punching, mechanical entangling, thermo-mechanical entangling,and hydroentangling. A specific example of a suitable meltblown processis disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 3,978,185, to Buntin et al., issued Aug.31, 1976. The nonwoven may be compression resistant as described in U.S.Pat. No. 7,785,690 entitled “Compression Resistant Nonwovens” issued onAug. 31, 2010. The nonwoven web may have loops as described in U.S. Pat.No. 7,838,099 entitled “Looped Nonwoven Web” issued on Nov. 23, 2010.

Other suitable nonwoven materials include low basis weight nonwovens,that is, nonwovens having a basis weight of from about 18 g/m² to about25 g/m². An example of such a nonwoven material is commerciallyavailable under the tradename P-8 from Veratec, Incorporation, adivision of the International Paper Company located in Walpole, Mass.Other nonwovens are described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,792,404 and 5,665,452.

The topsheet 124 may comprise tufts as described in U.S. Pat. No.8,728,049 entitled “Absorbent Article Having a Tufted Topsheet” issuedon May 20, 2014, U.S. Pat. No. 7,553,532 entitled “Tufted Fibrous Web”issued on Jun. 30, 2009, U.S. Pat. No. 7,172,801 entitled “TuftedLaminate Web” issued on Feb. 6, 2007, or U.S. Pat. No. 8,440,286entitled “Capped Tufted Laminate Web” issued on May 14, 2013. Thetopsheet may have an inverse textured web as described in U.S. Pat. No.7,648,752 entitled “Inverse Textured Web” issued on Jan. 19, 2010. Tuftsare also described in U.S. Pat. No. 7,410,683 entitled “Tufted LaminateWeb” issued on Aug. 12, 2008.

The topsheet 124 may comprise one or more structurally modified zones asdescribed in U.S. Pat. No. 8,614,365 entitled “Absorbent Article” issuedon Dec. 24, 2013. The topsheet may have one or more out of planedeformations as described in U.S. Pat. No. 8,704,036 entitled “SanitaryNapkin for Clean Body Benefit” issued on Apr. 22, 2014. The topsheet 124may have a masking composition as described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,025,535entitled “Topsheet For Absorbent Articles Exhibiting Improved MaskingProperties” issued on Feb. 15, 2000.

The absorbent core 128 may be any absorbent means capable of absorbingor retaining liquids (e.g., menses and/or urine). The absorbent core 128may be manufactured in a wide variety of sizes and shapes (e.g.,rectangular, oval, hourglass, dog bone, asymmetric, etc.) and from awide variety of liquid-absorbent materials commonly used in sanitarynapkins and other absorbent articles such as comminuted wood pulp whichis generally referred to as airfelt. Examples of other suitableabsorbent materials include creped cellulose wadding; meltblown polymersincluding coform; chemically stiffened, modified or cross-linkedcellulosic fibers; synthetic fibers such as crimped polyester orpolyolefin fibers; peat moss; tissue including tissue wraps and tissuelaminates; absorbent foams; absorbent sponges; superabsorbent polymers;absorbent gelling materials; or any equivalent material or combinationsof materials, or mixtures of these. The absorbent core 128 may have morethan one layer wherein each layer may be identical or distinct in one ormore property or composition from another layer. A particularlypreferred absorbent core 128 is made of thermally bonded airlaidmaterial having less than 50 percent synthetic fibers. Synthetic fibersare preferred due to the ease with which they fuse together to join thecore and topsheet as described below. A particularly preferred syntheticfiber is a bi-component material having a polyethylene sheath and apolypropylene center.

The configuration and construction of the absorbent core 128 may also bevaried (e.g., the absorbent core may have varying caliper zones (e.g.,profiled so as to be thicker in the center), hydrophilic gradients,superabsorbent gradients, or lower density and lower average basisweight acquisition zones; or may comprise one or more layers orstructures). The total absorbent capacity of the absorbent core should,however, be compatible with the design loading and the intended use ofthe sanitary napkin. Further, the size and absorbent capacity of theabsorbent core 128 may be varied to accommodate different uses such asincontinence pads, panty liners, regular sanitary napkins, or overnightsanitary napkins.

The fluid absorbent material can be constructed from any of a variety ofmaterials commonly used in disposable absorbent articles. Examples ofsuitable absorbent materials include creped cellulose wadding, cottonfluff, and citric acid cross-linked cellulose pulp disclosed in U.S.Pat. No. 5,190,563, issued Mar. 2, 1993, U.S. Pat. No. 5,183,707, issuedFeb. 2, 1993; and U.S. Pat. No. 5,137,537, issued Aug. 11, 1992, allissued to Herron et al.; synthetic fibers disclosed in U.S. Pat. No.4,578,414, Sawyer, issued Mar. 25, 1986; absorbent foams, absorbentsponges, superabsorbent composites, superabsorbent foam, and superabsorbent polymers. A preferred fluid absorbent material is comminutedand airlaid wood pulp fibers commonly referred to as absorbent fluff. Anabsorbent fluff having a density of from about 0.05 g to about 0.175 gper cm³ is generally acceptable.

The absorbent core structure may comprise a substrate and superabsorbentpolymer layer as those described in U.S. Pat. No. 8,124,827 filed onDec. 2, 2008 (Tamburro); U.S. application Ser. No. 12/718,244 publishedon Sep. 9, 2010; U.S. application Ser. No. 12/754,935 published on Oct.14, 2010; or U.S. Pat. No. 8,674,169 issued on Mar. 18, 2014.

The backsheet 125 acts as a barrier to any absorbed bodily fluids thatmay pass through the absorbent core to the garment surface thereof witha resulting reduction in risk of staining undergarments or otherclothing. Further, the barrier properties of the backsheet 125 permitmanual removal, if a wearer so desires, of the interlabial absorbentarticle with reduced risk of hand soiling. A preferred material is asoft, smooth, compliant, liquid and vapor pervious material thatprovides for softness and conformability for comfort, and is low noiseproducing so that movement does not cause unwanted sound.

The backsheet 125 may comprise a wet laid fibrous assembly having atemporary wet strength resin incorporated therein as described in U.S.Pat. No. 5,885,265 (Osborn, III.) issued Mar. 23, 1999. The backsheet125 may further be coated with a water resistant resinous material thatcauses the backsheet 125 to become impervious to bodily fluids withoutimpairing the spreading of adhesive materials thereon.

Another suitable backsheet material is a polyethylene film having athickness of from about 0.012 mm (0.5 mil) to about 0.051 mm (2.0 mils).The backsheet 125 may be embossed and/or matte finished to provide amore clothlike appearance. Further, the backsheet 125 may permit vaporsto escape from the absorbent core 42 (i.e., the backsheet is breathable)while still preventing body fluids from passing through the backsheet125. A preferred microporous polyethylene film which is available fromTredegar Corporation, Va., USA, under Code No. XBF-112W.

Suitable breathable backsheets for use herein include all breathablebacksheets known in the art. In principle there are two types ofbreathable backsheets, single layer breathable backsheets which arebreathable and impervious to liquids and backsheets having at least twolayers, which in combination provide both breathability and liquidimperviousness. Suitable single layer breathable backsheets for useherein include those described for example in GB A 2184389, GB A2184390, GB A 2184391, U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,591,523, 3,989,867, 3,156,242and WO 97/24097.

The backsheet 125 may have two layers: a first layer comprising a gaspermeable aperture formed film layer and a second layer comprising abreathable microporous film layer as described in U.S. Pat. No.6,462,251 (Cimini) issued Oct. 8, 2002. Suitable dual or multi layerbreathable backsheets for use herein include those exemplified in U.S.Pat. Nos. 3,881,489, 4,341,216, 4,713,068, 4,818,600, EP 203821, EP710471, EP 710472, and EP 793952.

The backsheet 125 may be vapor permeable as described in U.S. Pat. No.6,623,464 (Bewick-Sonntag) issued Sep. 23, 2003 or U.S. Pat. No.6,664,439 (Arndt) issued Dec. 16, 2003. The backsheet 125 can be formedfrom any vapor permeable material known in the art. Backsheet 125 can bea microporous film, an apertured formed film, or other polymer film thatis vapor permeable, or rendered to be vapor permeable, as is known inthe art.

The backsheet 125 can be typically positioned adjacent the outer-facingsurface of the absorbent core and can be joined thereto by any suitableattachment device known in the art. For example, the backsheet 125 maybe secured to the absorbent core by a uniform continuous layer ofadhesive, a patterned layer of adhesive, or an array of separate lines,spirals, or spots of adhesive.

The absorbent article may also include such other suitable features asare known in the art including, but not limited to, re-closablefastening system, lotion, acquisition layers, distribution layers,wetness indicators, sensors, elasticized waist bands and other similaradditional elastic elements and the like, belts and the like, waist capfeatures, containment and aesthetic characteristics and combinationsthereof.

Wings/Flaps

Sanitary napkins may have flaps 802 as shown in FIGS. 81-83 extendingoutwardly from the longitudinal side margins as are well known in theart. For example, U.S. Pat. No. 4,589,876 issued May 20, 1986, to VanTilburg and U.S. Pat. No. 4,687,478 issued Aug. 18, 1987, to Van Tilburgdisclose preferred sanitary napkins with flaps 802 and are incorporatedherein by reference to illustrate particularly preferred flappedsanitary napkin constructions.

Sanitary napkins having flaps of the various types are disclosed in U.S.Pat. No. 4,687,478, entitled “Shaped Sanitary Napkin With Flaps,” whichissued to Van Tilburg on Aug. 18, 1987, U.S. Pat. No. 4,589,876,entitled “Sanitary Napkin,” which issued to Van Tilburg on May 20, 1986and U.S. Pat. No. 5,389,094 entitled “Absorbent Article Having Flaps andZones of Differential Extensibility,” which issued to Lavash et al. onFeb. 14, 1995.

The flaps 802 extend laterally outward beyond the longitudinal sideedges of the main body portion from their proximal edges to their distaledges (or “free ends”). The flaps 802 extend outward from at least thecentral region of the main body portion. The flap transverse centerlinemay coincide with the principal transverse centerline of the absorbentarticle, but this is not absolutely required.

The flaps 802 can be joined to the main body portion in any suitablemanner. The term “joined”, as used herein, encompasses configurations inwhich an element is directly secured to another element by affixing theelement directly to the other element; configurations in which theelement is indirectly secured to the other element by affixing theelement to intermediate member(s) which in turn are affixed to the otherelement; and configurations in which one element is integral withanother element, i.e., one element is essentially part of the otherelement.

The flaps 802 can comprise one or more separate components that arejoined to the garment-facing side of the main body portion, Preferably,in such a case, the flaps each comprise a separate component that isjoined to the garment-facing side of the main body portion. In suchalternative embodiments, the flaps are preferably otherwise unattachedto the garment-facing side of the main body portion of the absorbentarticle between the points where they are attached to the main bodyportion and the longitudinal side edges of the main body portion. Theflaps 802 in these latter embodiments can be joined to thegarment-facing side of the main body portion by any suitable attachmentmechanism. Suitable attachment mechanisms include, but are not limitedto adhesives, and the like.

The places or regions on the absorbent article where the flaps 802 arejoined to (or extend from) the main body portion, are referred to hereinas “junctures”. These regions will typically be longitudinally-oriented(or “longitudinal”) junctures, such as lines of juncture. These regionscan be any of various curved or straight lines, but they are not limitedto lines. Thus, the junctures can comprise flanges, strips, intermittentlines, and the like.

Flaps 802 may have zones of extensibility (or “zones of differentialextensibility”) in the front half and the back half of each flap. Thezones of extensibility relieve stresses which are created in flaps bythe folding of the flaps around the crotch of the wearer's undergarment.The zones of extensibility thereby help eliminate bunching of flapscaused by said stresses. The zones of extensibility may comprisepre-corrugated or “ring roiled” regions of the flaps in which thecorrugations define ridges and valleys that are oriented at an angle tothe principal longitudinal centerline. Suitable structures for providingthe flaps with zones of extensibility are described in greater detail inU.S. Pat. No. 5,389,094 issued to Lavash, et al.

The flaps 802 may be transparent as described in U.S. Pat. No.8,491,554, “Transparent Absorbent Article” issued on Jul. 23, 2013.

The flaps 802 may be spaced apart flaps associated with the main bodyportion as described in U.S. Pat. No. 8,178,748 entitled “AbsorbentArticle” filed in the name of John Lee Hammons, issued on May 15, 2012.The article may have more than one set of flaps extending from the mainbody as described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,375,645 entitled “Absorbent ArticleWrapper Comprising A Side Flap Fastener Cover, issued on Apr. 23, 2002.

Each flap 802 may have an adhesive patch. Preferentially, such adhesiveis associated with the face of the flap which contacts the undergarmentof the wearer. Also the central portion of the absorbent articleintermediate the flaps may have adhesive associated with the area of thecentral portion of the absorbent article which contacts the undergarmentof the wearer. Preferentially such adhesive is joined to the outwardlyoriented face of the backsheet 125.

A feminine absorbent article 801 may comprise flaps 802 and/or cuffs 150formed at least in part by an elastomeric laminate 302 comprising afirst plurality of elastics 316 disposed between first and secondsubstrate layers. Such an elastomeric laminate 302 may have firstplurality of elastics 316 comprising from about 10 to about 400 elasticstrands having an Average-Strand-Spacing from about 0.25 mm to about 5mm and an Average-Dtex of the first plurality of elastics 316 from about10 to about 600.

In alternative embodiments of the elastomeric laminate 302 the firstplurality of elastics 316 may comprise from about 15 to about 300elastic strands. In other embodiments, the first plurality of elastics316 may comprise from about 20 to about 225 elastic strands. In yetother alternative embodiments, the first plurality of elastics 316 maycomprise from about 25 to about 150 elastic strands.

In certain embodiments, the first plurality of elastics 316 may have anAverage-Strand-Spacing from about 0.25 mm to about 3.0 mm. In otherembodiments, the first plurality of elastics 316 has anAverage-Strand-Spacing from about 0.5 mm to about 2.0 mm.

In some embodiments, the Average-Dtex of the first plurality of elastics316 may be from about 30 to about 400 and in alternative embodiments,the Average-Dtex of the first plurality of elastics 316 may be fromabout 50 to about 250.

In certain embodiments, the feminine absorbent article 801 may compriseleg cuff like structures disposed at or adjacent the side edges of thearticle as shown in FIGS. 79 and 80. The leg cuff 150 may be formed byan elastomeric laminate 302 comprising a first substrate layer 306 and asecond substrate layer 308 and an elastic material, for example elasticstrands 316, disposed between the first and second substrate layers 306and 308. The first substrate layer 306 and the second substrate layer308 may be separate and discrete layers or alternatively the firstsubstrate layer 306 and second substrate layer 308 may be formed from asingle web of material that is folded to form the first substrate layer306 and second substrate layer 308 as shown in FIG. 80. In someconfigurations of the leg cuffs 150, one or both of the first and secondsubstrate layers 306 and 308 may be formed in part or whole by one orboth of the backsheet 125 and topsheet 124.

The absorbent article may have one or more graphics as shown in FIG. 81.The graphics may be on the topsheet or visible via the topsheet asdescribed in U.S. Pat. No. 8,629,315 entitled “Absorbent Article Havinga Graphic Visible Through Body Contacting Surface” issued on Jan. 14,2014. Two or more color regions may be produced in the absorbent articleusing the methods described in U.S. Pat. No. 8,691,041 entitled “Methodof Producing a Composite Multi-Layered Printed Absorbent Article” issuedon Apr. 8, 2014. The graphics may be on different layers as described inU.S. Pat. No. 8,292,864 entitled “Absorbent Article Having a MultilayerVisual Signal” issued on Oct. 23, 2012. The article may have amulti-component visual signal as described in U.S. Pat. No. 8,262,633entitled “Absorbent Article Having a Multi-Component Visual Signal”issued on Sep. 11, 2012.

Process

Referring to FIGS. 49A-51, absorbent articles 100 comprising elastomericlaminates 302 that may be used in a variety of components of theabsorbent articles 100. The elastomeric laminates 302 may include afirst substrate 306, a second substrate 308, and an elastic materiallocated between the first substrate 306 and second substrate 308. Duringthe process of making the elastomeric laminate 302, the elastic materialmay be advanced and stretched in a machine direction and may be joinedwith either or both the first and second substrates, 306 and/or 308advancing in the machine direction.

The elastomeric laminates 302 made according to the processes andapparatuses 301 discussed herein may be used as to construct varioustypes of components used in the manufacture of different types ofabsorbent articles 100, such as diaper pants and taped diapers. To helpprovide additional context to the subsequent discussion of the absorbentarticle embodiments, the following provides a general description ofabsorbent articles 100 in the form of diapers and/or pants that includecomponents comprising the elastomeric laminates 302 disclosed herein.

In some assembly processes, stretched elastic strands 316 may beadvanced in a machine direction and may be adhered between two advancingsubstrates, wherein the stretched elastic strands 316 are spaced apartfrom each other in a cross direction. Some assembly processes are alsoconfigured with several elastic strands 316 that are very closely spacedapart from each other in the cross direction. In some configurations,close cross directional spacing between elastic strands 316 can beachieved by drawing elastic strands 316 from windings that have beenstacked in the cross direction on a beam 314 (e.g., a warp beam). Forexample, various textile manufacturers may utilize beam elastics andassociated handling equipment, such as available from Karl MayerCorporation. It may be desirable to treat the elastic strands of thebeam(s) with silicone oil because it avoids blocking (cross-linking)when the strands are wound to a spool or a beam and because it alsolowers the COF for the strand in textile machinery (for weaving,knitting and warping processes).

As illustrated herein, the apparatuses 301 and processes may beconfigured such that elastic strands 316 may be advanced from the beams314 and directly to the assembly process without having to touchadditional machine components, such as for example, guide rollers. It isalso to be appreciated that in some configurations, elastic strands 316may be advanced from the beams 314 and may be redirected and/orotherwise touched by and/or redirected before advancing to the assemblyprocess. For example, the process may have a first beam 314 a with arotation axis in a first cross direction CD1. As the first beam 314 arotates, the first plurality of elastic strands 316 a advance from thefirst beam 314 a in a first machine direction MD1 with the first elasticstrands 316 a being spaced apart from each other in the first crossdirection CD1. The elastic strands 316 may then be redirected by rollersfrom the first machine direction MD1 to a second machine direction MD2,wherein the elastic strands 316 may remain separated from each other ina second cross direction CD2. From the rollers, the elastic strands 316may advance in the second machine direction MD2 to be combined with thefirst and second substrates, 306, 308 to form the elastomeric laminate302. It is to be appreciated that for processes comprising multiplebeams, the first and/or second beams 314 a, 314 b may be arranged and/ororiented such that the beam rotation axis 346 may be parallel,perpendicular, or otherwise angularly offset with respect to the machinedirection advancement of the elastomeric laminate 302 and/or the firstand/or second substrates 306, 308. It should also be appreciated thatthe elastomeric laminate 302 may comprise more than a first substrate306 and a second substrate 308, i.e. a third substrate and/or a fourthsubstrate. In such embodiments, a first set of elastic strands 316 afrom a first beam 314 a may be disposed between a first substrate 306and a second substrate 308 and a second set of elastic strands 316 bfrom a second beam 314 b may be disposed between a second substrate 308and a third substrate providing an elastomeric laminate 302 with elasticstrands 316 disposed in multiple, separate, layers of the laminate.

It is to be appreciated that the apparatuses 301 herein may beconfigured in various ways with various features described herein toassemble elastomeric laminates 302 having various stretchcharacteristics. For example, FIGS. 49A and 49B illustrate the apparatus301 configured to assemble elastomeric laminates 302 with elasticstrands 316 unwound from more than one beam 314. In particular, theapparatus 301 may include a first beam 314 a with first elastic strands316 a wound thereon and a second beam 314 b with second elastic strands316 b wound thereon. The first beam 314 a is rotatable about a firstbeam rotation axis 346 a, and the second beam 314 b is rotatable about asecond beam rotation axis 346 b. During operation, as the first beam 314a rotates, the first elastic strands 316 a advance in the machinedirection MD from the first beam 314 a at a speed S2 with the firstelastic strands 316 a being spaced apart from each other in thecross-direction CD. From the first beam 314 a, the first elastic strands316 a advance in the machine direction MD and are joined with the firstsubstrate 306 and the second substrate 308. Similarly, as the secondbeam 314 b rotates, the second elastic strands 316 b advance in themachine direction MD from the second beam 314 b at a speed S3 with thesecond elastic strands 316 b being spaced apart from each other in thecross-direction CD. From the second beam 314 b, the second elasticstrands 316 b advance in the machine direction MD and are joined withthe first substrate 306 and the second substrate 308. It is also to beappreciated that the apparatus configuration shown in FIGS. 49A and 49Bmay also include the bond applicator 348 arranged to apply the bonds322. The bond applicator 348 is generically represented by a dashed-linerectangle in FIG. 49A.

With continued reference to FIGS. 49A and 49B, the elastic strands 316a, 316 b may be joined with the first and second substrates 306, 308such that the elastomeric laminate 302 may have different stretchcharacteristics in different regions along the cross-direction CD. Forexample, when the elastomeric laminate 302 is elongated, the firstelastic strands 316 a may exert contraction forces in the machinedirection MD that are different from contraction forces exerted by thesecond elastic strands 316 b. Such differential stretch characteristicscan be achieved by stretching the first elastic strands 316 a more orless than the second elastic strands 316 b before joining the elasticstrands 316 a, 316 b with the first and second substrates 306, 308. Forexample, as previously discussed, the first substrate 306 and the secondsubstrate 308 may each advance at a speed S1. In some configurations,the first elastic strands 316 a may advance from the first beam 314 a atspeed S2 that is less than the speed S1, and second elastic strands 316b may advance from the second beam 314 b at the speed S3 that is lessthan the speed S1. As such, the first elastic strands 316 a and thesecond elastic strands 316 b are stretched in the machine direction MDwhen combined with the first and second substrates 306, 308. Inaddition, the speed S2 may be less than or greater than different thanthe speed S3. Thus, the first elastic strands 316 a may be stretchedmore or less than the second elastic strands 316 b when combined withthe first and second substrates 306, 308. It is also appreciated thatthe first and second elastic strands 316 a, 316 b may have variousdifferent material constructions and/or decitex values to createelastomeric laminates 302 different stretch characteristics. Aspreviously mentioned, in some configurations, the elastic strands 316may be supplied on the beam 314 in a stretched state, and as such, maynot require additional stretching (or may require relatively lessadditional stretching) before being combined with the first substrate306 and/or the second substrate 308. Thus, in some configurations, thefirst elastic strands 316 a may be supplied on the first beam 314 a at afirst tension, and the second elastic strands 316 b may be supplied onthe second beam 314 b at a second tension, wherein the first tension isnot equal to the second tension.

As illustrated herein, the apparatuses and processes may be configuredsuch that elastic strands may be advanced from the beams and directly tothe assembly process without having to touch additional machinecomponents, such as for example, guide rollers. It is also to beappreciated that in some configurations, elastic strands may be advancedfrom beams and may be redirected and/or otherwise touched by and/orredirected before advancing to the assembly process. For example, FIG.51 shows a configuration where the beam rotation axis 346 may extend ina first cross direction CD1. As the beam 314 rotates, the elasticstrands 316 advance from the beam 314 in a first machine direction MD1with the elastic strands 316 being spaced apart from each other in thefirst cross direction CD1. The elastic strands 316 may then beredirected by rollers 323 from the first machine direction MD1 to asecond machine direction MD2, wherein the elastic strands 316 may remainseparated from each other in a second cross direction CD2. From therollers 323, the elastic strands 316 may advance in the second machinedirection MD2 to be combined with the first and second substrates 306,308 to form the elastomeric laminate 302. Thus, it is to be appreciatedthat the beam 314 may be arranged and/or oriented such that the beamrotation axis 346 may be parallel, perpendicular, or otherwise angularlyoffset with respect to the machine direction advancement of theelastomeric laminate 302 and/or the substrates 306, 308.

As shown in FIGS. 50A and 50B, a converting apparatus 301 for producingan elastomeric laminate 302 may include a first metering device 310, asecond metering device 312, and a third metering device 313. The firstmetering device may be configured as a first beam 314 a with a firstplurality of elastic strands 316 a wound thereon, and the third meteringdevice is configured as a second beam 314 b with a second plurality ofelastics 316 b wound thereon. It is to be appreciated that beams ofvarious sizes and technical specifications may be utilized in accordancewith the methods and apparatuses herein, such as for example, beams thatare available from ALUCOLOR Textilmaschinen, GmbH. During operation, thefirst plurality of elastics 316 a advance in the machine direction MDfrom the first beam 314 a to the second metering device 312. Inaddition, the first plurality of elastics 316 a may be stretched alongthe machine direction MD between the first beam 314 a and the secondmetering device 312. The stretched first elastic strands 316 a are alsojoined with a first substrate 306 and a second substrate 308 at thesecond metering device 312 to produce an elastomeric laminate 302. Asdiscussed in more detail below, once the first beam 314 a is empty ornearly depleted of first elastic strands 316 a, the second plurality ofelastics 316 b can be introduced into the assembly operation asreplacements for the first plurality of elastics 316 a without having tostop the assembly operation.

As shown in FIG. 50A, the second metering device 312 includes: a firstroller 324 having an outer circumferential surface 326 and rotates abouta first axis of rotation 328, and a second roller 331 having an outercircumferential surface 332 and rotates about a second axis of rotation334. The first roller 324 and the second roller 331 rotate in oppositedirections, and the first roller 324 is adjacent the second roller 331to define a nip 336 between the first roller 324 and the second roller331. The first roller 324 rotates such that the outer circumferentialsurface 326 has a surface speed V1, and the second roller 331 may rotatesuch that the outer circumferential surface 332 has the same, orsubstantially the same, surface speed V1.

As shown in FIGS. 50A-50C, the first substrate 306 includes a firstsurface 338 and an opposing second surface 340, and the first substrate306 advances to the first roller 324. In particular, the first substrate306 advances at speed V1 to the first roller 324 where the firstsubstrate 306 partially wraps around the outer circumferential surface326 of the first roller 324 and advances through the nip 336. As such,the first surface 338 of the first substrate 306 travels in the samedirection as and in contact with the outer circumferential surface 326of the first roller 324. In addition, the second substrate 308 includesa first surface 342 and an opposing second surface 344, and the secondsubstrate 308 advances to the second roller 331. In particular, thesecond substrate 308 advances at speed V1 to the second roller 331 wherethe second substrate 308 partially wraps around the outercircumferential surface 332 of the second roller 331 and advancesthrough the nip 336. As such, the second surface 344 of the secondsubstrate 308 travels in the same direction as and in contact with theouter circumferential surface 332 of the second roller 331.

With continued reference to FIGS. 50A and 50B, the first beam 314 aincludes the first plurality of elastics 316 a wound thereon, and thefirst beam 314 a is rotatable about a first beam rotation axis 346. Insome configurations, the first beam rotation axis 346 may extend in thecross-direction CD. As the first beam 314 a rotates, the first pluralityof elastics 316 a advance from the first beam 314 a at a speed V2 withthe first elastics 316 a being spaced apart from each other in thecross-direction CD. From the first beam 314 a, the first plurality ofelastics 316 a advances in the machine direction MD to the nip 336. Insome configurations, the speed V2 is less than the speed V1, and assuch, the first plurality of elastics 316 a are stretched in the machinedirection MD. In turn, the stretched first elastics 316 a advancethrough the nip 336 between the first and second substrates 306, 308such that the first elastics 316 a are joined with the second surface340 of the first substrate 306 and the first surface 342 of the secondsubstrate 308 to produce a continuous length of elastomeric laminate302. The first substrate 306 may advance past an adhesive applicatordevice 349 that applies adhesive 350 to the second surface 340 of thefirst substrate 306 before advancing to the nip 336. It is to beappreciated that the adhesive 350 may be applied to the first substrate306 upstream of the first roller 324 and/or while the first substrate306 is partially wrapped around the outer circumferential surface 326 ofthe first roller 324. It is to be appreciated that adhesive may beapplied to the first elastics 316 a before and/or while being joinedwith first substrate 306 and second substrate 308. In addition, it is tobe appreciated that adhesive may be applied to the first surface 342 ofthe second substrate 308 before or while being joined with the firstelastics 316 a and the first substrate 306.

As previously discussed, the apparatus 301 includes the second pluralityof elastic strands 316 b configured to replace the first plurality ofelastics 316 a once the first beam 314 a is completely depleted ornearly depleted of first elastics 316 a. As shown in FIGS. 50A and 50B,the second beam 320 includes the second plurality of elastics 316 bwound thereon, and the second beam 314 b is rotatable about a secondbeam rotation axis 352. In some configurations, the second beam rotationaxis 352 may extend in the cross-direction CD. As the second beam 314 brotates, the second plurality of elastic strands 316 b advance from thesecond beam 314 b at a speed V2 with the second elastic strands 316 bbeing spaced apart from each other in the cross-direction CD. Whenintroducing the second elastic strands 316 b into the assemblyoperation, the second plurality of elastic strands 316 b may first beconnected with a splicer member 354. As shown in FIG. 50B, the splicermember 354 may be connected adjacent leading ends 356 of the secondelastics 316 b. In turn, the splicer member 354 and the second elastics316 b may be connected with the first plurality of elastics 316 a thatare advancing from the first beam 314 a to the nip 336.

As previously mentioned, the elastomeric laminate 302 may also besubject to additional converting processes. Such additional convertingprocesses may incorporate the elastomeric laminate 302 into discreteabsorbent articles 100. As such, an inspection system may be configuredto detect and/or track a defective length of the elastomeric laminate302. A defective length of elastomeric laminate 302 may be defined by alength of elastomeric laminate 302 that includes both the first elasticstrands 316 a and the second elastics 316 b positioned together betweenthe first and second substrates 306, 308. A defective length ofelastomeric laminate 302 may also be defined by a length of elastomericlaminate 302 that includes the splicer member 354, leading ends 356 ofthe second elastics 316 b, and/or the trailing ends 358 of the firstelastics 316 a. The inspection system may also correlate inspectionresults and measurements from the defect length of the elastomericlaminate 302 with absorbent articles 100 made therefrom. In turn, theinspection system may be used to control a reject system on a convertingprocess of absorbent articles, wherein absorbent articles manufacturedwith portions of the defective length of elastomeric laminate 302 arerejected. In some configurations, defective articles may be subject tothe rejection system and removed from the assembly process. Absorbentarticles 100 that are not deemed to be defective may be subject tofurther processing steps, such as folding and packaging. It is to beappreciated that such an inspection system may be configured in variousways, such as disclosed in U.S. Patent Publication No. 2013/0199696 A1.

As previously mentioned, absorbent articles according to the presentdisclosure may comprise elastomeric laminates that may be used toconstruct various components of taped and/or pant diapers, such as apair of laterally opposing inner leg cuffs, a pair of laterally opposingouter leg cuffs, a back belt, a front belt, a pair of laterally opposingside panels, a pair of laterally opposing ear panels, a back waistband,a front waistband, front and/or back waist caps, and discrete expansionpanels disposed in areas overlapping the center chassis and the like.

It is to be appreciated that different components may be used toconstruct the elastomeric laminates 302 in accordance with the methodsand apparatuses herein. For example, the first and/or second substrates306, 308 may include nonwovens and/or films. In addition, the firstand/or second elastics 316 a, 316 b may be configured in various waysand having various decitex values. In some configurations, the firstand/or second plurality of elastics 316 a, 316 b may be configured withdecitex values ranging from about 10 decitex to about 500 decitex,specifically reciting all 1 decitex increments within the above-recitedrange and all ranges formed therein or thereby. It is also to beappreciated the first beam 314 a and the second beam 314 b may beconfigured in various ways and with various quantities of elasticstrands, types of elastic strands and/or colors of elastic strands.Example beams, also referred to as warp beams, that may be used with theapparatus and methods herein are disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,525,905;5,060,881; and 5,775,308; and U.S. Patent Publication No. 2004/0219854A1. Although FIG. 50b shows nine elastics 316 advancing from the firstbeam 314 a, it is to be appreciated that the apparatuses herein may beconfigured such that more or less than nine elastic strands 316 advancefrom the first beam 314 a. In some configurations, the first elastics316 a advancing from the first beam 314 a and/or the second elastics 316b advancing from the second beam 314 b may include from about 10 toabout 1000 strands, specifically reciting all 1 strand increments withinthe above-recited range and all ranges formed therein or thereby. Insome configurations, the first elastics 316 a and/or the second elastics316 b may be separated from each other by about 0.5 mm to about 5 mm inthe cross direction, specifically reciting all 0.1 mm increments withinthe above-recited range and all ranges formed therein or thereby. It isalso be appreciated that one or more beams of elastics may be arrangedalong the cross direction CD of a converting process and/or arrangedalong a machine direction MD in various different portions of aconverting process. It is also to be appreciated that the first beam 314a and the second beam 314 b can be connected with one or more motors,such as servo motors, to drive and control the rotation of the beams 314a, 314 b.

Furthermore, the plurality of elastics 316 may be joined to one or bothof the first substrate 306 and second substrate 308 by means of adhesivebonding, mechanical bonding, thermal bonding, ultrasonic bonding orother lamination means known in the art, including elastics that havebeen treated with silicone oil. The first and second substrates 306 and308 may be melted around the elastic strands (by, for example,ultrasonic bonding the first and second substrates)—see Attorney DocketNo, 14918P (U.S. Ser. No. 62/553,171), filed on Sep. 1, 2017,first-named inventor Uwe Schneider, assigned to The Procter & GambleCompany. Melting the first and second substrates 306 and 308 togethermay be desirable for overcoming the anti-stick properties of theelastics of silicone oil placed on the strands. Alternatively, the firstand second substrates 306 and 308 may be bonded in between elasticstrands comprising silicone oil. Further, lines of adhesives may also beused between first and second substrates 306 and 308 as described inAttorney Docket No, 14917P (U.S. Ser. No. 62/553,149), filed on Sep. 1,2017, first-named inventor Uwe Schneider, assigned to The Procter &Gamble Company. Still further, silicone oil may be removed from theelastic strands to allow for better bonding of the elastic strands tothe first and second substrates 306 and 308 as disclosed in AttorneyDocket No, 14778P (62/483,965), filed on Apr. 11, 2017, first-namedinventor Uwe Schneider, assigned to The Procter & Gamble Company. One ormore of the bonding methods described and referenced in this paragraphmay be used with elastic strands comprising from about 10%, about 7%,about 5%, about 3%, or about 1% silicone oil.

In addition, the first substrate 306 and/or second substrate 308 mayhave a material basis weight of from about 6 grams per square meter toabout 30 grams per square meter. It should also be understood that theelastomeric laminates 302 described herein may have a uniform elasticpattern, decitex, spacing and pre-strain or may alternatively havemultiple zones that may be supplied via multiple beams 314 havingcomprising varying compositions of elastic type, decitex, spacing orpre-strain.

It is the process disclosed in this PROCESS section of the presentapplication that forms the elastomeric laminate 302 of the presentdisclosure and that may be further incorporated into the variousabsorbent article components such as the belts, ear panels, side panels,transverse barriers, topsheets, backsheets, cuffs, waistbands,waistcaps, and/or chassis to offer the benefits described in this patentapplication. Further details of the process of creating beamedelastomeric laminate(s) for use in disposable absorbent articles aredisclosed in U.S. Publication No. 62/436,589, titled “METHODS ANDAPPARATUSES FOR MAKING ELASTOMERIC LAMINATES WITH ELASTIC STRANDSUNWOUND FROM BEAMS,” first-named inventor being Schneider, filed on Dec.20, 2016. The elastomeric laminate 302 may be produced as part of theabsorbent article manufacturing line, or may be produced offline, andunwound as an elastomeric laminate that is fed into the absorbentarticle manufacturing line.

Elastomeric Laminate(s) of the Present Disclosure

An “elastomeric laminate 302” of the present disclosure may comprise aplurality of elastics 316 between a first substrate 306 and a secondsubstrate layer 308, where the plurality of elastics 316 (often referredto as a “first plurality of elastics,” a “second plurality of elastics,”etc.) has an Average-Strand-Spacing from about 0.25 mm to about 4 mm, anAverage-Dtex from about 10 to about 500, and a Pressure-Under-Strandfrom about 0.1 to about 1 psi. Ultimately, “plurality of elastics” is aterm of context, where certain properties, arrangements, attributes,characteristics, etc. define what a certain “plurality of elastics” is.Said elastomeric laminate 302 may be used to form at least a portion ofvarious absorbent article components. When the elastomeric laminate 302forms at least a portion of at least one of the group consisting of abelt, a chassis, a side panel, a topsheet, a backsheet, an ear panel,and combinations thereof, the plurality of elastics 316 of theelastomeric laminate 302 may comprise from about 40 to about 1000elastic strands. And, when the elastomeric laminate 302 forms at least aportion of at least one of the group consisting of a waistband, awaistcap, an inner leg cuff, an outer leg cuff, a transverse barrier,and combinations thereof, the first plurality of elastics 316 of theelastomeric laminate 302 may comprise from about 10 to about 400 elasticstrands. Ultimately, “plurality of elastics” is a term of context, wherecertain properties (e.g., Average-Dtex, Average-Strand-Spacing,Pressure-Under-Strand, etc.), arrangements, attributes, characteristics,disposition, etc. of the elastics are referenced to define what acertain “plurality of elastics” is.

Further, the elastomeric laminate 302 may form at least a portion of oneor more of the group of article components including a belt 430, a sidepanel 330, chassis 200, a topsheet 124, backsheet 125, and an ear panel530, the elastomeric laminate 302 may comprise a plurality of elastics316 having from about 40 to about 1000 elastic strands with anAverage-Strand-Spacing from about 0.25 mm to about 4 mm, Average-Dtexfrom about 10 to about 500, an Average-Pre-Strain from about 50% toabout 400%; and a first substrate 306 and a second substrate 308 eachhaving a basis weight from about 6 grams per square meter to about 30grams per square meter.

When the elastomeric laminate 302 may form at least a portion of one ormore of the group of article components including a belt 430, a sidepanel 330, chassis 200, a topsheet 124, backsheet 125, and an ear panel530, the elastomeric laminate 302 may comprise a plurality of elastics316 having from about 50 to about 825 elastic strands. Further, theplurality of elastics 316 may comprise from about 100 to about 650elastic strands. Still further, the plurality of elastics 316 maycomprise from about 150 to about 475 elastic strands.

When the elastomeric laminate 302 may form at least a portion of one ormore of the group of article components including a belt 430, a sidepanel 330, chassis 200, a topsheet 124, backsheet 125, and an ear panel530, the elastomeric laminate 302 may comprise a plurality of elastics316 having an Average-Strand-Spacing from about 0.5 mm to about 3.5 mm.Further, the plurality of elastics 316 may have anAverage-Strand-Spacing from about 1.0 mm to about 2.5 mm.

When the elastomeric laminate 302 may form at least a portion of one ormore of the group of article components including a belt 430, a sidepanel 330, chassis 200, a topsheet 124, backsheet 125, and an ear panel530, the elastomeric laminate 302 may comprise a plurality of elastics316 having an Average-Dtex from about 30 to about 400. Further, theelastomeric laminate 302 may have an Average-Dtex of the plurality ofelastics 316 from about 50 to about 250.

When the elastomeric laminate 302 may form at least a portion of one ormore of the group of article components including a belt 430, a sidepanel 330, chassis 200, a topsheet 124, backsheet 125, and an ear panel530, the elastomeric laminate 302 may comprise a plurality of elastics316 having an Average-Pre-Strain which may be from about 75% to about300%. Further, the elastomeric laminate may comprise a plurality ofelastics 316 with an Average-Pre-Strain of from about 100% to about 250%

The elastomeric laminate 302 may form at least a portion of one or moreof the group of article components including a waistband 122, waistcap123, inner leg cuff 150, outer leg cuff 140 and a transverse barrier 16,and may comprise a plurality of elastics 316 having from about 10 toabout 400 elastic strands with an Average-Strand-Spacing from about 0.25mm to about 4 mm, Average-Dtex from about 10 to about 500, anAverage-Pre-Strain from about 50% to about 400% and a first substrate306 and/or second substrate 308 each having a basis weight from about 6grams per square meter to about 30 grams per square meter.

The elastomeric laminate 302 may form at least a portion of one or moreof the group of article components including a waistband 122, waistcap123, inner leg cuff 150, outer leg cuff 140 and a transverse barrier 16,and may comprise a plurality of elastics 316 having from about 15 toabout 300 elastic strands. Further, the plurality of elastics 316 maycomprise from about 20 to about 225 elastic strands. Further, theplurality of elastics may 316 comprise from about 25 to about 150elastic strands.

The elastomeric laminate 302 may form at least a portion of one or moreof the group of article components including a waistband 122, waistcap123, inner leg cuff 150, outer leg cuff 140 and a transverse barrier 16,and may comprise a plurality of elastics 316 having anAverage-Strand-Spacing from about 0.5 mm to about 3.0 mm. Further, theplurality of elastics 316 may have an Average-Strand-Spacing from about0.75 mm to about 2.5 mm.

The elastomeric laminate 302 may form at least a portion of one or moreof the group of article components including a waistband 122, waistcap123, inner leg cuff 150, outer leg cuff 140 and a transverse barrier 16,and may comprise a plurality of elastics 316 having an Average-Dtex fromabout 30 to about 400. Alternatively, the plurality of elastics 316 ofthe elastomeric laminate 302 may have an Average-Dtex from about 50 toabout 250.

The elastomeric laminate 302 may form at least a portion of one or moreof the group of article components including a waistband 122, waistcap123, inner leg cuff 150, outer leg cuff 140 and a transverse barrier 16,and may comprise a plurality of elastics 316 having anAverage-Pre-Strain from about 75% to about 300%. Alternatively, theelastomeric laminate may comprise elastic elements with anAverage-Pre-Strain of from about 100% to about 250%.

Any one of the belt 430, side panel 330, ear panel 530, chassis 200,topsheet 124, backsheet 125, waistband 122, waistcap 123, inner leg cuff150, outer leg cuff 140 or transverse barrier may comprise anelastomeric laminate 302 comprising a plurality of elastics 316 havingPressure-Under-Strand from about 0.1 psi to about 1 psi, or from about0.2 psi to about 0.8 psi.

Any one of the belt 430, side panel 330, ear panel 530, chassis 200,topsheet 124, backsheet 125, waistband 122, waistcap 123, inner leg cuff150, outer leg cuff 140 or transverse barrier may comprise anelastomeric laminate comprising an Air Permeability at 0 gf/mm (noextension) of greater than about 40 cubic meters/square meter/minuteand/or a level of Air Permeability at 3 gf/mm (slight extension) ofgreater than about 60 cubic meters/square meter/minute and/or a level ofAir Permeability at 7 gf/mm (moderate extension) of greater than about80 cubic meters/square meter/minute.

Any one of the belt 430, side panel 330, ear panel 530, chassis 200,topsheet 124, backsheet 125, waistband 122, waistcap 123, inner leg cuff150, outer leg cuff 140 or transverse barrier may comprise anelastomeric laminate comprising a Water Vapor Transmission Rate ofgreater than 2000 g/m2/24 hrs, greater than 4000 g/m2/24 hrs or greaterthan 6000 g/m2/24 hrs.

Any one of the belt 430, side panel 330, ear panel 530, chassis 200,topsheet 124, backsheet 125, waistband 122, waistcap 123, inner leg cuff150, outer leg cuff 140 or transverse barrier may comprise anelastomeric laminate comprising an Open Area greater than about 70%,greater than about 80%, greater than about 90%.

Any one of the belt 430, side panel 330, ear panel 530, chassis 200,topsheet 124, backsheet 125, waistband 122, waistcap 123, inner leg cuff150, outer leg cuff 140 or transverse barrier may comprise anelastomeric laminate having a Caliper at 0 gf/mm (no extension) of fromabout 0.5 mm to about 4 mm and/or a Caliper Retention Value at 3 gf/mm(slight extension) of from about 60% to about 95% and/or a CaliperRetention Value at 7 gf/mm (moderate extension) of from about 40% toabout 90%

Any one of the belt 430, side panel 330, ear panel 530, chassis 200,topsheet 124, backsheet 125, waistband 122, waistcap 123, inner leg cuff150, outer leg cuff 140 or transverse barrier may comprise anelastomeric laminate comprising a Cantilever Bending of less than about40 mm or alternatively less than about 35 mm in other embodiments theCantilever Bending may be less than 30 mm or alternatively less than 25mm. The elastomeric laminate 302 of the present disclosure may haveCantilever Bending of from about 15 mm to about 30 mm.

Any one of the belt 430, side panel 330, ear panel 530, chassis 200,topsheet 124, backsheet 125, waistband 122, waistcap 123, inner leg cuff150, outer leg cuff 140 or transverse barrier may comprise anelastomeric laminate comprising a Percent Contact Area of greater thanabout 13% at 100 um and/or greater than about 27% at 200 um and/orgreater than about 39% at 300 um and/or a 2%-98% Height Value of <1.6mm. Alternatively, any one of the belt 430, side panel 330, ear panel530, chassis 200, topsheet 124, backsheet 125, waistband 122, waistcap123, inner leg cuff 150, outer leg cuff 140 or transverse barrier maycomprise an elastomeric laminate comprising a Percent Contact Area ofgreater than about 10% at 100 um and/or greater than about 20% at 200 umand/or greater than about 30% at 300 um and/or a 2%-98% Height Value of<2.2 mm. Comparative difference in Percent Contact Area are show inFIGS. 100, 100A for elastomeric laminates 302 of the present disclosureand FIGS. 101 and 101A for elastic laminates of the prior art, currentlymarketed products. The elastomeric laminate 302 of the presentdisclosure may have a 2-98% Height Value of between 0.3 to about 3.0.

Any one of the belt 430, side panel 330, ear panel 530, chassis 200,topsheet 124, backsheet 125, waistband 122, waistcap 123, inner leg cuff150, outer leg cuff 140 or transverse barrier may comprise anelastomeric laminate comprising a Rugosity Frequency of from about 0.2mm⁻¹ to about 1 mm⁻¹ and a Rugosity Wavelength of from about 0.5 mm toabout 5 mm.

It is also to be appreciated that any one of the belt 430, side panel330, ear panel 530, chassis 200, topsheet 124, backsheet 125, waistband122, waistcap 123, inner leg cuff 150, outer leg cuff 140 or transversebarrier may comprise an elastomeric laminate comprising one or more ofthe parametric values and ranges cited herein above.

An absorbent article of the present disclosure may have an elastomericlaminate 302 forming at least a portion of one or more of a belt 430,side panel 330, ear panel 530, waistband 122, chassis 200, topsheet 124and backsheet 125. The elastomeric laminate 302 may comprise a pluralityof elastics 316 having a specific Average-Dtex, nonwoven type, nonwovenbasis weight, Average-Strand-Spacing and Average-Pre-Strain. And, thearticle may comprise two or more absorbent article components (includinga belt 430, side panel 330, ear panel 530, waistband 122, chassis 200,topsheet 124 and backsheet 125) comprising an elastomeric laminate 302having one or more identical or substantially identical laminateelements (including Average-Dtex, nonwoven type, nonwoven basis weight,Average-Strand-Spacing and Average-Pre-Strain).

Beyond the beamed elastic strands 316 that may be used in each of theabsorbent article components, other elastic components such as elasticnonwovens, elastomeric films, elastomeric foams, elastomeric scrims, andelastomeric ribbons, or combinations thereof, may be used with thebeamed elastics 316.

In one embodiment, an absorbent article comprising an elastomericlaminate 302 and the elastomeric laminate may form at least a portion ofone or more of the group of article components including a belt 430, aside panel 330, chassis 200, a topsheet 124, backsheet 125, and an earpanel 530. The elastomeric laminate 302 may comprise a plurality ofelastics 316 having from about 40 to about 1000 elastic strands or fromabout 100 to about 650 elastic strands or from about 150 to about 475elastic strands. The plurality of elastics 316 may have anAverage-Strand-Spacing from about 0.25 mm to about 4 mm or from about0.5 mm to about 3.5 mm or from about 0.75 mm to about 2.5 mm. Theplurality of elastics 316 may comprise elastic having an Average-Dtexfrom about 10 to about 500 or from about 30 to about 400 or from about50 to about 250. The plurality of elastic 316 may also have anAverage-Pre-Strain from about 50% to about 400% or from about 75% toabout 300% or from about 100% to about 250%. The elastomeric laminatemay also comprise a first substrate layer 306 and/or a second substratelayer 308 wherein each may have a basis weight from about 6 grams persquare meter to about 30 grams per square meter. The elastomericlaminate 302 comprising the plurality of elastics 316 may havePressure-Under-Strand from about 0.1 psi to about 1 psi, or from about0.2 psi to about 0.8 psi. The elastomeric laminate may comprise an AirPermeability at 0 gf/mm (no extension) of greater than about 40 cubicmeters/square meter/minute and/or a level of Air Permeability at 3 gf/mm(slight extension) of greater than about 60 cubic meters/squaremeter/minute and/or a level of Air Permeability at 7 gf/mm (moderateextension) of greater than about 80 cubic meters/square meter/minute.The elastomeric laminate may comprise a Water Vapor Transmission Rate ofgreater than 2000 g/m2/24 hrs, greater than 4000 g/m2/24 hrs or greaterthan 6000 g/m2/24 hrs. The elastomeric laminate having a Caliper at 0gf/mm (no extension) of from about 0.5 mm to about 4 mm and/or a CaliperRetention Value at 3 gf/mm (slight extension) of from about 60% to about95% and/or a Caliper Retention Value at 7 gf/mm (moderate extension) offrom about 40% to about 90%. The elastomeric laminate may comprise aCantilever Bending of less than about 40 mm, alternatively less thanabout 35 mm. The elastomeric laminate may also comprise a PercentContact Area of greater than about 10% at 100 um and/or greater thanabout 20% at 200 um and/or greater than about 28% at 300 um and/or a2%-98% Height Value of <1.8 mm. Alternatively, the elastomeric laminatemay comprise a Percent Contact Area of greater than about 11% at 100 umand/or greater than about 28% at 200 um and/or greater than about 51% at300 um and/or a 2%-98% Height Value of <1.6 mm. The elastomeric laminatehaving a Rugosity Frequency of from about 0.2 mm⁻¹ to about 1 mm⁻¹ and aRugosity Wavelength of from about 0.5 mm to about 5 mm. In alternativeembodiments, the elastomeric laminate may comprise a Rugosity Frequencyfrom about 0.2 mm⁻¹ to about 0.85 mm⁻¹ and Rugosity Wavelengths of fromabout 1.2 mm to about 5 mm. The elastomeric laminate may also have aSection-Modulus of from about 2 gf/mm to about 15 gf/mm, alternativelyfrom about 3 gf/mm to about 12 gf/mm, in alternative embodiments fromabout 4 gf/mm to about 10 gf/mm. The elastomeric laminate may also havean Open Area of greater than about 60%, alternatively greater than about75% or greater than about 90%.

In another embodiment, an absorbent article comprising an elastomericlaminate 302 and the elastomeric laminate may form at least a portion ofone or more of the group of article components including a waistband122, waistcap 123, inner leg cuff 150, outer leg cuff 140 and atransverse barrier 16. The elastomeric laminate 302 may comprise aplurality of elastics 316 having from about 10 to about 400 elasticstrands or from about 15 to about 300 elastic strands or from about 20to about 225 elastic strands or from about 25 to about 150 elasticstrands. The plurality of elastics 316 may have anAverage-Strand-Spacing from about 0.25 mm to about 4 mm or from about0.5 mm to about 3.5 mm or from about 0.75 mm to about 2.5 mm. Theplurality of elastics 316 may comprise elastic having an Average-Dtexfrom about 10 to about 500 or from about 30 to about 400 or from about50 to about 250. The plurality of elastic 316 may also have anAverage-Pre-Strain from about 50% to about 400% or from about 75% toabout 300% or from about 100% to about 250%. The elastomeric laminatemay also comprise a first substrate layer 306 and/or a second substratelayer 308 wherein each may have a basis weight from about 6 grams persquare meter to about 30 grams per square meter. The elastomericlaminate 302 comprising the plurality of elastics 316 may havePressure-Under-Strand from about 0.1 psi to about 1 psi, or from about0.2 psi to about 0.8 psi. The elastomeric laminate may comprise an AirPermeability at 0 gf/mm (no extension) of greater than about 40 cubicmeters/square meter/minute and/or a level of Air Permeability at 3 gf/mm(slight extension) of greater than about 60 cubic meters/squaremeter/minute and/or a level of Air Permeability at 7 gf/mm (moderateextension) of greater than about 80 cubic meters/square meter/minute.The elastomeric laminate may comprise a Water Vapor Transmission Rate ofgreater than 2000 g/m2/24 hrs, greater than 4000 g/m2/24 hrs or greaterthan 6000 g/m2/24 hrs. The elastomeric laminate having a Caliper at 0gf/mm (no extension) of from about 0.5 mm to about 4 mm and/or a CaliperRetention Value at 3 gf/mm (slight extension) of from about 60% to about95% and/or a Caliper Retention Value at 7 gf/mm (moderate extension) offrom about 40% to about 90%. The elastomeric laminate may comprise aCantilever Bending of less than about 40 mm, alternatively less thanabout 35 mm. The elastomeric laminate may also comprise a PercentContact Area of greater than about 10% at 100 um and/or greater thanabout 20% at 200 um and/or greater than about 28% at 300 um and/or a2%-98% Height Value of <1.8 mm. Alternatively, the elastomeric laminatemay comprise a Percent Contact Area of greater than about 11% at 100 umand/or greater than about 28% at 200 um and/or greater than about 51% at300 um and/or a 2%-98% Height Value of <1.6 mm. The elastomeric laminatehaving a Rugosity Frequency of from about 0.2 mm⁻¹ to about 1 mm⁻¹ and aRugosity Wavelength of from about 0.5 mm to about 5 mm. In alternativeembodiments, the elastomeric laminate may comprise a Rugosity Frequencyfrom about 0.2 mm⁻¹ to about 0.85 mm⁻¹ and Rugosity Wavelengths of fromabout 1.2 mm to about 5 mm. The elastomeric laminate may also have aSection-Modulus of from about 2 gf/mm to about 15 gf/mm, alternativelyfrom about 3 gf/mm to about 12 gf/mm, in alternative embodiments fromabout 4 gf/mm to about 10 gf/mm. The elastomeric laminate may also havean Open Area of greater than about 60%, alternatively greater than about75% or greater than about 90%.

In another embodiment, an absorbent article 100 comprising a chassis 200having a topsheet 124, a backsheet 125 and an absorbent core 128disposed between the topsheet 124 and the backsheet 125 and anelastomeric laminate 302 joined to the chassis 200 whereby theelastomeric laminate 302 comprises a first plurality of elastics 316disposed between first and second substrate layers 306 and 308. Theelastomeric laminate 302 may form at least a portion of at least one ofthe group consisting of a chassis 200, belt 430, a side panel 330,topsheet 124, backsheet 125 and an ear panel 530. The first plurality ofelastics 316 of the elastomeric laminate 302 may comprise from about 40to about 1000 elastic strands disposed at an Average-Strand-Spacing fromabout 0.25 mm to about 4 mm having an Average-Dtex from about 10 toabout 600 thereby providing an Pressure-Under-Strand from about 0.1 toabout 1 psi. The elastomeric laminate 302 may also have an AirPermeability at 0 gf/mm of from about 40 to about 120 m3/m2/min.

In an alternative embodiment, the absorbent article 100 comprising achassis 200 having a topsheet 124, a backsheet 125 and an absorbent core128 disposed between the topsheet 124 and the backsheet 125 and anelastomeric laminate 302 joined to the chassis 200 whereby theelastomeric laminate 302 comprises a first plurality of elastics 316disposed between first and second substrate layers 306 and 308. Theelastomeric laminate 302 may form at least a portion of at least one ofthe group consisting of a chassis 200, belt 430, a side panel 330,topsheet 124, backsheet 125 and an ear panel 530. The first plurality ofelastics 316 of the elastomeric laminate 302 may comprise from about 100to about 600 elastic strands disposed at an Average-Strand-Spacing fromabout 0.5 mm to about 2.5 mm having an Average-Dtex from about 25 toabout 250 thereby providing an Pressure-Under-Strand from about 0.2 toabout 0.8 psi. The elastomeric laminate 302 may also have an AirPermeability at 3 gf/mm of from about 50 to about 150 m3/m2/min.

In another embodiment, an absorbent article 100 comprising a chassis 200having a topsheet 124, a backsheet 125 and an absorbent core 128disposed between the topsheet 124 and the backsheet 125 and anelastomeric laminate 302 joined to the chassis 200 whereby theelastomeric laminate 302 comprise a first plurality of elastics 316disposed between first and second substrate layers 306 and 308. Theelastomeric laminate 302 may form at least a portion of at least one ofthe group consisting of a waistband 122, a waistcap 123, an inner legcuff 150, an outer leg cuff 140, and a transverse barrier 165. The firstplurality of elastics 316 of the elastomeric laminate 302 may comprisefrom about 10 to about 400 elastic strands disposed at anAverage-Strand-Spacing from about 0.25 mm to about 5 mm having anAverage-Dtex from about 10 to about 600 thereby providing a Pressure-Under-Strand from about 0.1 to about 1 psi. The elastomericlaminate 302 may also have an Air Permeability at 0 gf/mm of from about40 to about 120 m3/m2/min.

In an alternative embodiment, the absorbent article 100 comprising achassis 200 having a topsheet 124, a backsheet 125 and an absorbent core128 disposed between the topsheet 124 and the backsheet 125 and anelastomeric laminate 302 joined to the chassis 200 whereby theelastomeric laminate 302 comprise a first plurality of elastics 316disposed between first and second substrate layers 306 and 308. Theelastomeric laminate 302 may form at least a portion of at least one ofthe group consisting of a waistband 122, a waistcap 123, an inner legcuff 150, an outer leg cuff 140, and a transverse barrier 165. The firstplurality of elastics 316 of the elastomeric laminate 302 may comprisefrom about 20 to about 225 elastic strands disposed at anAverage-Strand-Spacing from about 0.5 mm to about 2.0 mm having anAverage-Dtex from about 50 to about 250 thereby providing anPressure-Under-Strand from about 0.1 to about 1 psi. The elastomericlaminate 302 may also have an Air Permeability at 0 gf/mm of from about50 to about 150 m3/m2/min.

In another embodiment, an absorbent article 100 comprising a chassis 200having a topsheet 124, a backsheet 125 and an absorbent core 128disposed between the topsheet 124 and the backsheet 125, the chassisfurther comprises a front waist region and a back waist region. Theabsorbent article 100 may comprise a back belt 430 joined to the backwaist region 38 of the chassis 200. The back belt 430 extending outboardof the back waist region 38 of the chassis 200. The back belt 430 isformed at least in part by an elastomeric laminate 302 comprising afirst plurality of elastics 316 disposed between a first substrate layer306 and a second substrate layer 308 the first plurality of elastics 316comprising greater than about 40 elastic strands having anAverage-Strand-Spacing of less than 4 mm. The first plurality ofelastics 316 of the belt is disposed between first and second substratelayers, wherein the substrate layers may have differences incomposition, polymer type, fiber diameter, fiber shape, bond pattern,color, nonwoven type (e.g. spunbond, carded, etc.) and/or basis weight.The back belt 430 may be joined at or adjacent the side edges of thebelt 437 to another portion of the absorbent article 100 to form aclosed-form pant. Alternatively, the back belt 430 at or adjacent theend edges 437 may remain unattached, e.g. unfastened, to other parts ofthe absorbent article 100 and thus may be packaged in an open-form.

In another embodiment, an absorbent article 100 may comprise a chassis200 having a topsheet 124, a backsheet 125 and an absorbent core 128disposed between the topsheet 124 and the backsheet 125, the chassisfurther comprising a front waist region and a back waist region. Theabsorbent article 100 may comprise a front belt 430F joined to the frontwaist region and a back belt 430B joined to the back waist region 38 ofthe chassis 200. The front belt 430F extending outboard of the frontwaist region 36 of the chassis 200 and the back belt 430B extendingoutboard of the back waist region 38 of the chassis 200. The back belt430B may be formed at least in part by an elastomeric laminate 302comprising a first plurality of elastics 316 a disposed between a firstsubstrate layer 306 and a second substrate layer 308 the first pluralityof elastics 316 a comprising greater than about 40 elastic strandshaving an Average-Strand-Spacing of less than 4 mm andAverage-Pre-Strain from about 75% to about 300%. The first plurality ofelastics 316 a of the back belt 430B is disposed between first andsecond substrate layers 306 and 308, wherein the substrate layers mayhave differences in composition, polymer type, fiber diameter, fibershape, bond pattern, color, nonwoven type (e.g. spunbond, carded, etc.)and/or basis weight. The front belt 430F may be formed at least in partby an elastomeric laminate 302 comprising a second plurality of elastics316 b disposed between a first substrate layer 306 and a secondsubstrate layer 308 the second plurality of elastics 316 b comprisinggreater than about 40 elastic strands having an Average-Strand-Spacingof less than 4 mm and Average-Pre-Strain from about 75% to about 300%.The second plurality of elastics 316 b of the front belt 430F isdisposed between first and second substrate layers 306 and 308, whereinthe substrate layers may have differences in composition, polymer type,fiber diameter, fiber shape, bond pattern, color, nonwoven type (e.g.spunbond, carded, etc.) and/or basis weight. The front belt 430F andback belt 430B may be joined to each other at or adjacent the respectiveside edges of the belt 437 to form a closed-form pant. Alternatively,the front belt 430F and back belt 430B may remain unattached, e.g.unfastened, at or adjacent the end edges 437 and thus may be packaged inan open-form. The first plurality of elastics 316 a and the secondplurality of elastics 316 b may have one or more of substantially thesame number of elastics, substantially the same Average-Strand-Spacing,substantially the same Average-Pre-Strain and/or Average-Dtex.Alternatively, the first plurality of elastics 316 a and the secondplurality of elastics 316 b may have one or more of a different numberof elastics, different Average-Strand-Spacing, differentAverage-Pre-Strain and/or different Average-Dtex.

In another embodiment, an absorbent article 100, comprising a chassis200 having a topsheet 124, a backsheet 125 and an absorbent core 128disposed between the topsheet 124 and the backsheet 125. The absorbentarticle having first and second side panels 330 wherein the proximalside edges of the side panels 330 are joined to the chassis 200 at oradjacent the laterally opposing side edges 237 of the chassis 200 in theback waist region 38. The first and second side panels 330 may comprisean elastomeric laminate 302 having a first plurality of elastics 316disposed between a first substrate layer 306 and a second substratelayer 308. The first plurality of elastics 316 comprising greater thanabout 40 elastic strands and an Average-Strand-Spacing of less than 4mm. The absorbent article 100 may also comprise a waistband 122 disposedin the back waist region 38 of the center chassis 200 between but notoverlapping with the first and second side panels 330. Alternatively,the waistband 122 may overlap with a portion of the first and secondside panels 330. The waistband 122 may comprise an elastomeric laminate302 having a plurality of elastics 316 comprising greater than about 10elastic strands having an Average-Strand-Spacing of less than 4 mm andan Average-Pre-Strain from about 75% to about 300%. 19. The first andsecond substrate layers 306 and 308 may each have a basis weight fromabout 6 grams per square meter to about 30 grams per square meter. Theabsorbent article 100 may also comprise a waistband 122 disposed in theback waist region 38 of the center chassis 200 between but notoverlapping with the first and second side panels 330. Alternatively,the waistband 122 may overlap with a portion of the first and secondside panels 330. The waistband 122 may comprise an elastomeric laminate302 having a plurality of elastics 316 comprising greater than about 10elastic strands having an Average-Strand-Spacing of less than 4 mm andAverage-Pre-Strain from about 75% to about 300%. 19. The first andsecond substrate layers 306 and 308 may each have a basis weight fromabout 6 grams per square meter to about 30 grams per square meter. Thefirst and second side panels 330 may be joined to a portion of theabsorbent article 100 at or adjacent the respective distal side edges ofthe of the side panel 330 to form a closed-form pant. Alternatively, theside panels 330 may remain unattached, e.g. unfastened, at or adjacentthe distal side edges of the side panel and thus may be packaged in anopen-form.

In another embodiment, an absorbent article 100, comprising a chassis200 having a topsheet 124, a backsheet 125 and an absorbent core 128disposed between the topsheet 124 and the backsheet 125. The absorbentarticle having first and second side panels 330 wherein the proximalside edges of the first and second side panels 330 are joined to thechassis 200 at or adjacent the laterally opposing side edges 237 of thechassis 200 in the back waist region 38. The first and second sidepanels 330 may comprise an elastomeric laminate 302 having a firstplurality of elastics 316 disposed between a first substrate layer 306and a second substrate layer 308. The first plurality of elastics 316comprising greater than about 50 elastic strands and anAverage-Strand-Spacing of less than 2.5 mm and an Average-Pre-Strainfrom about 75% to about 300%. The absorbent article also having thirdand fourth side panels 330 wherein the proximal side edges of the thirdand fourth side panels 330 are joined to the chassis 200 at or adjacentthe laterally opposing side edges 237 of the chassis 200 in the frontwaist region 36. The third and fourth side panels 330 may comprise anelastomeric laminate 302 having a second plurality of elastics 316disposed between a first substrate layer 306 and a second substratelayer 308. The second plurality of elastics 316 comprising greater thanabout 50 elastic strands and an Average-Strand-Spacing of less than 2.5mm and an Average-Pre-Strain from about 75% to about 300%. The absorbentarticle 100 may also comprise a waistband 122 disposed in one or both ofthe front waist region 36 and the back waist region 38 of the centerchassis 200 and the waistband 122 may be disposed between but notoverlapping with the first, second, third or fourth side panels 330.Alternatively, the waistband 122 may overlap with a portion of one ormore of the first, second, third and fourth side panels 330. Thewaistband 122 may comprise an elastomeric laminate 302 having aplurality of elastics 316 comprising greater than about 10 elasticstrands having an Average-Strand-Spacing of less than 5 mm andAverage-Pre-Strain from about 75% to about 300%. 19. The first andsecond substrate layers 306 and 308 may each have a basis weight fromabout 6 grams per square meter to about 30 grams per square meter. Thefirst and second side panels 330 in the back waist region 38 may bejoined to the third and fourth side panels 330 in the front waist region36 at or adjacent their respective distal side edges to form aclosed-form pant. Alternatively, the first and second side panels 330may remain unattached, e.g. unfastened, to the third and fourth sidepanels 330 and thus may be packaged in an open-form.

In another embodiment, an absorbent article 100 comprising a chassis 200having a topsheet 124, a backsheet 125 and an absorbent core 128disposed between the topsheet 124 and the backsheet 125 and one or moreelastomeric laminates 302 joined to or forming a portion of the chassis200. The elastomeric laminate 302 comprising a first plurality ofelastics 316 disposed between a first substrate layer 306 and a secondsubstrate layer 308 wherein the first plurality of elastics 316comprises greater than 40 elastic strands having anAverage-Strand-Spacing of less than about 3 mm, an Average-Dtex of lessthan about 600, an Average-Pre-Strain of less than about 350%. Theelastomeric laminate 302 may form at least a portion of at least one ofthe group consisting of a belt 430, a side panel 330, a topsheet 124,backsheet 125 and an ear panel 530. The elastomeric laminate 302 maycomprise one or more sections having a Section-Modulus of less thanabout 15 gf/mm, alternatively from about 3 gf/mm to about 12 gf/mm. Theelastomeric laminate 302 having an Open Area greater than about 70%,alternatively from about 75% to about 90%. The elastomeric laminate 302having a Pressure-Under-Strand of less than about 1.0 psi alternativelyfrom about 0.2 psi to about 0.8 psi.

In another embodiment, an absorbent article 100 comprising a chassis 200having a topsheet 124, a backsheet 125 and an absorbent core 128disposed between the topsheet 124 and the backsheet 125 and one or moreelastomeric laminates 302 joined to or forming a portion of the chassis200. The elastomeric laminate 302 comprising a first plurality ofelastics 316 disposed between a first substrate layer 306 and a secondsubstrate layer 308 wherein the first plurality of elastics 316comprises from about 42 to about 1000 elastic strands having anAverage-Strand-Spacing from about 0.125 mm to about 2.9 mm, anAverage-Dtex from about 10 to about 500 and an Average-Pre-Strain ofless than about 150%. The elastomeric laminate 302 may form at least aportion of at least one of the group consisting of a belt 430, a sidepanel 330, a topsheet 124, backsheet 125 and an ear panel 530. Theelastomeric laminate 302 may comprise one or more sections having aSection-Modulus of less than about 15 gf/mm, alternatively from about 3gf/mm to about 12 gf/mm. The elastomeric laminate 302 having an OpenArea greater than about 70%, alternatively from about 75% to about 90%.The elastomeric laminate 302 having a Pressure-Under-Strand of less thanabout 1.0 psi alternatively from about 0.2 psi to about 0.8 psi.

In another embodiment, an absorbent article 100 comprising a chassis 200having a topsheet 124, a backsheet 125 and an absorbent core 128disposed between the topsheet 124 and the backsheet 125 and one or moreelastomeric laminates 302 joined to or forming a portion of the chassis200. The elastomeric laminate 302 comprising a first plurality ofelastics 316 disposed between a first substrate layer 306 and a secondsubstrate layer 308 wherein the first plurality of elastics 316comprises from about 125 to about 625 elastic strands having anAverage-Strand-Spacing of less than about 1.0 mm, an Average-Dtex fromabout 20 to about 350 and an Average-Pre-Strain from about 75% to about300%. The elastomeric laminate 302 may form at least a portion of atleast one of the group consisting of a belt 430, a side panel 330, atopsheet 124, backsheet 125 and an ear panel 530. The elastomericlaminate 302 may comprise one or more sections having a Section-Modulusof less than about 15 gf/mm, alternatively from about 3 gf/mm to about12 gf/mm. The elastomeric laminate 302 having an Open Area greater thanabout 70%, alternatively from about 75% to about 90%. The elastomericlaminate 302 having a Pressure-Under-Strand of less than about 1.0 psialternatively from about 0.2 psi to about 0.8 psi.

In another embodiment, an absorbent article 100 comprising a chassis 200having a topsheet 124, a backsheet 125 and an absorbent core 128disposed between the topsheet 124 and the backsheet 125 and one or moreelastomeric laminates 302 joined to or forming a portion of the chassis200. The elastomeric laminate 302 comprising a first plurality ofelastics 316 disposed between a first substrate layer 306 and a secondsubstrate layer 308 wherein the first plurality of elastics 316comprises from about 44 to about 350 elastic strands having anAverage-Strand-Spacing from about 0.375 mm to about 2.7 mm, anAverage-Dtex of less than about 155 and an Average-Pre-Strain from about75% to about 300%. The elastomeric laminate 302 may form at least aportion of at least one of the group consisting of a belt 430, a sidepanel 330, a topsheet 124, backsheet 125 and an ear panel 530. Theelastomeric laminate 302 may comprise one or more sections having aSection-Modulus of less than about 15 gf/mm, alternatively from about 3gf/mm to about 12 gf/mm. The elastomeric laminate 302 having an OpenArea greater than about 70%, alternatively from about 75% to about 90%.The elastomeric laminate 302 having a Pressure-Under-Strand of less thanabout 1.0 psi alternatively from about 0.2 psi to about 0.8 psi.

In another embodiment, an absorbent article 100 comprising a chassis 200having a topsheet 124, a backsheet 125 and an absorbent core 128disposed between the topsheet 124 and the backsheet 125 and one or moreelastomeric laminates 302 joined to or forming a portion of the chassis200. The elastomeric laminate 302 comprising a first plurality ofelastics 316 disposed between a first substrate layer 306 and a secondsubstrate layer 308 wherein the first plurality of elastics 316comprises from about 10 to about 200 elastic strands having anAverage-Strand-Spacing from about 0.25 mm to about 5 mm, an Average-Dtexfrom about 25 to about 500 and an Average-Pre-Strain from about 75% toabout 300%. The elastomeric laminate 302 may form at least a portion ofat least one of the group consisting of a waistband 122, a waistcap 123,an inner leg cuff 150, an outer leg cuff 140, and a transverse barrier165. The elastomeric laminate 302 may comprise one or more sectionshaving a Section-Modulus of less than about 15 gf/mm, alternatively fromabout 3 gf/mm to about 12 gf/mm. The elastomeric laminate 302 having anOpen Area greater than about 70%, alternatively from about 75% to about90%. The elastomeric laminate 302 having a Pressure-Under-Strand of lessthan about 1.0 psi alternatively from about 0.2 psi to about 0.8 psi.

Surface Topography

In the Surface Topography Method, an elastic laminate specimen isremoved from an absorbent article and extended across and in contactwith the convex surface of a transparent horizontal cylindrical tubingsegment, allowing the areal surface topology of the body facing side ofthe laminate to be measured through the transparent tubing segment usingoptical profilometry. The 3D surface data are then sampled and processedto extract several parameters that describe the Percent Contact Area and2-98% Height of the elastic laminate specimen surface as well as theRugosity frequency and Rugosity Wavelength.

The epidermis is the outermost layer of the skin. Categorized into fivehorizontal layers, the epidermis actually consists of anywhere between50 cell layers (in thin areas) to 100 cell layers (in thick areas). Theaverage epidermal thickness is 0.1 millimeters or 100 micrometers, whichis about the thickness of one sheet of paper. The dermis which is thelayer immediately below the epidermis can have a thickness of between1.0 mm and 1.5 mm. For comparison, we have selected a first setting todetermine the Percent Contact Area corresponding with the thickness ofthe epidermis, 100 micrometers, a second setting at 2X the epidermis or200 micrometers and a third setting at 3X the epidermis of 300micrometers.

It is apparent from the surface topography measurements that theinventive elastomeric laminate 302 examples have significantly greaterPercent Contact Area at 100 um (1.5× to 1.9×), 200 um (1.8× to 2.5×) and300 um (1.9× to 2.7×) compared to the prior art structures in table 8for both waistband 122 applications as well as belt 430 applications(see FIGS. 100, 100A, 101 and 101A). In addition, the 2%-98% HeightValue which is derived from the surface topography data also shows asignificant difference is surface smoothness for the inventiveelastomeric laminate 302 examples versus the prior art structures. Thesedifferences in increased surface contact as well as surface smoothnesswill have a direct and significant impact on minimizing or eliminatingskin marking of the various structures that can me created from theinventive elastomeric laminates 302, such as belts 430, side panels 330,ear panels 530, waistbands 122, waistcaps 123, topsheets 124,backsheets, 125, inner leg cuffs 150, outer leg cuffs 140 and transversebarriers 165. In contrast, the data above 2% to 98% Height Value showsthat the prior art product have a much rougher surface due in part totheir larger decitex elastic and larger spacing which results in largeruncontrolled rugosities. Combine the larger uncontrolled rugosities withthe significantly lower surface contact and one can see that thepressure on the skin and skin marking is likely to be significantlygreater for the prior art product executions.

In addition to surface topography, it is also important to ensure theskin maintains the proper level of hydration and does not become overlyhydrated such as by occlusion. Overly hydrated skin such as skin thathas been occluded especially in warmer climates can be more prone toskin marking and damage. Thus, it is also an objective of such inventiveelastomeric laminate 302 to provide adequate breathability, AirPermeability through the structure, to help maintain the skin at theproper hydration level working collaboratively with the smooth surfaceof the inventive elastomeric laminate to provide optimum skin conditionwith no skin marking or damage. Therefore, it is desirable for theinventive elastomeric laminate 302 to have a level of Air Permeabilityat 0 gf/mm (no extension) of greater than about 40 cubic meters/squaremeter/minute and/or a level of Air Permeability at 3 gf/mm (slightextension) of greater than about 60 cubic meters/square meter/minuteand/or a level of Air Permeability at 7 gf/mm (moderate extension) ofgreater than about 80 cubic meters/square meter/minute.

Therefore, it would be beneficial to have an absorbent article 100comprising a chassis 200 having a topsheet 124, a backsheet 125 and anabsorbent core 128 disposed between the topsheet 124 and the backsheet125 and an elastomeric laminate 302 joined to the chassis 200 wherebythe elastomeric laminate 302 comprises a first plurality of elastics 316disposed between first and second substrate layers 306 and 308. Theelastomeric laminate 302 may form at least a portion of at least one ofthe group consisting of a belt 430, a side panel 330, topsheet 124, andan ear panel 530. The elastomeric laminate 302 may have a percentsurface contact at 100 um of greater than about 10% and/or a percentsurface contact at 200 um of greater than about 20% and/or a percentsurface contact at 300 um or greater than about 28%. In addition, theelastomeric laminate 302 may have a 2%-98% Height Value of less thanabout 1.6. The elastomeric laminate 302 may have a level of AirPermeability at 0 gf/mm (no extension) of from about 40 cubicmeters/square meter/minute to about 80 cubic meters/square meter/minuteand/or a level of Air Permeability at 3 gf/mm (slight extension) of fromabout 60 cubic meters/square meter/minute to about 120 cubicmeters/square meter/minute and/or a level of Air Permeability at 7 gf/mm(moderate extension) of from about 80 cubic meters/square meter/minuteto about 160 cubic meters/square meter/minute. The elastomeric laminate302 may also have an Air Permeability at 0 gf/mm of from about 40 toabout 120 m3/m2/min.

It would also be beneficial to have an absorbent article 100 comprisinga chassis 200 having a topsheet 124, a backsheet 125 and an absorbentcore 128 disposed between the topsheet 124 and the backsheet 125 and anelastomeric laminate 302 joined to the chassis 200 whereby theelastomeric laminate 302 comprises a first plurality of elastics 316disposed between first and second substrate layers 306 and 308. Theelastomeric laminate 302 may form at least a portion of at least one ofthe group consisting of a waistband 122, a waistcap 123, an inner legcuff 150, an outer leg cuff 140, and a transverse barrier 165. Theelastomeric laminate 302 may have a percent surface contact at 100 um ofgreater than about 13% and/or a percent surface contact at 200 um ofgreater than about 27% and/or a percent surface contact at 300 um ofgreater than about 39%. In addition, the elastomeric laminate 302 mayhave a 2%-98% Height Value of less than about 1.6. The elastomericlaminate 302 may have a level of Air Permeability at 0 gf/mm (noextension) of greater than about 40 cubic meters/square meter/minuteand/or a level of Air Permeability at 3 gf/mm (slight extension) ofgreater than about 60 cubic meters/square meter/minute and/or a level ofAir Permeability at 7 gf/mm (moderate extension) of greater than about80 cubic meters/square meter/minute. The elastomeric laminate 302 mayalso have an Air Permeability at 0 gf/mm of from about 40 to about 120m3/m2/min.

In addition to the skin health and skin marking benefits associated withthe smooth textures enabled by the elastomeric laminate 302 asillustrated above by the profilometry data the structure of theelastomeric laminate 302 also delivers a significant improvement ingraphics clarity and control. Many absorbent articles, taped diapers andpants, intended for use on infants and young children comprise a largenumber of graphical elements disposed on the outer surface of thearticle as well as the inner surface. Many elastomeric structures suchas the belts 430 of the prior art have structures that are course withlarge rugosities and undulating surfaces which distort the graphics onthe surface of the article. The surface of the elastomeric laminate 302of the present invention is significantly smoother and as a result doesnot distort or mask the graphics on the surface. The magnitude of thedifference is captured in Table 6 below.

The measurement involves stretching the article to its full width andscribing a line on the outer surface of the article extending from theupper left corner of the belt at or adjacent the intersection of theside seam and the waist edge to the lower right corner of the belt at oradjacent the intersection of the side seam and the leg edge. For theexamples in Table 6, a 6 mm wide line was scribed on the surface. Thearticle is then allowed to return to its relaxed state. A rectangularbox is created based on the dimensions of the contracted line. The widthof the box if measured and reported above. A distortion factor is thencalculated by taking the final box dimension and dividing it by theoriginal width of the line. I can be seen from the data above that theinventive elastomeric laminate 302 has a distortion factor of 1 meaningit demonstrated little or no distortion from the fully extended state tothe contracted state. The elastic belt 430 products of the prior arthave significantly higher distortion factors with all of the sampleshaving a distortion factor of 4 or greater, 4 to 5 time higher than thedistortion factor of the inventive elastomeric laminate 302.

Therefore, it would be beneficial to have an absorbent article 100comprising a chassis 200 having a topsheet 124, a backsheet 125 and anabsorbent core 128 disposed between the topsheet 124 and the backsheet125 and an elastomeric laminate 302 joined to the chassis 200 wherebythe elastomeric laminate 302 comprises a first plurality of elastics 316disposed between first and second substrate layers 306 and 308. Theelastomeric laminate 302 may form at least a portion of at least one ofthe group consisting of a belt 430, a side panel 330, topsheet 124, andan ear panel 530. The elastomeric laminate 302 may have a percentsurface contact at 100 um of greater than about 10% and/or a percentsurface contact at 200 um of greater than about 20% and/or a percentsurface contact at 300 um or greater than about 28%. In addition, theelastomeric laminate 302 may have a 2%-98% Height Value of less thanabout 1.6. The elastomeric laminate 302 may also have a GraphicDistortion Ratio (illustrated in FIGS. 102, 102A, 103 and 103A) of lessthan about 4, less than about 3 or less than about 2 or from about 1 toabout 3. Contracted graphics (symbolized by scribed lines 1001′ and1002′) are less distorted when placed on the inventive elastomericlaminates 302 of the present disclosure versus currently marketedstranded laminates.

Absorbent Article Sections

Components of absorbent articles comprising elastomeric laminates 302may be sectioned to enable measurement and detailed characterization ofthe structure. Waistband 122 (see FIGS. 7 and 46), waistcap 123 (seeFIG. 39), inner leg cuff 150, outer leg cuff 140, and transverse barrier165 all comprise 1 section. With regard to the waistband 122, waistcap123, inner leg cuff 150, outer leg cuff 140 and transverse barrier 165the section is defined as the region disposed between and including thedistal most elastic and the proximal most elastic.

Other components such as the chassis 200, topsheet 124 (see FIG. 57C),backsheet 125 (see FIGS. 57C and 57D), side panel 330 (see FIG. 2), earpanel 530 (FIGS. 39, 45, and 46), and belt panel 430 (see FIG. 55) allcomprise multiple sections as described herein. With regard to the sidepanel 330, ear panel 530 and belt panel 430 the portion of the componentto be sectioned is defined as the region disposed between and includingthe distal most elastic of the elastomeric laminate 302 and the proximalmost elastic of the elastomeric laminate 302. The region is defined by afirst line extending parallel to the lateral axis 44 and passing throughthe distal most point of the distal most elastic and a second lineextending parallel to the lateral axis and passing through the proximalmost point of the proximal most elastic. For each of these elements, theregion is then divided into 4 equal sections, defined by three linesdisposed parallel to the lateral axis 44 and disposed at 25%, 50% and75% of the distance between the first line and second line. The regioncomprises a first section which includes the distal most elastic, afourth section which includes the proximal most elastic, a secondsection disposed adjacent the first section and a third section disposedbetween the second section and the fourth section.

With regard to the chassis 200, topsheet 124 (see FIG. 57C), andbacksheet 125 (see FIG. 57C) wherein the elastics 316 of the elastomericlaminate 302 extend in a substantially longitudinal orientation, theportion of the component to be sectioned is defined as the regiondisposed between and including the distal most elastic of theelastomeric laminate 302 on a first side of the longitudinal axis 42 andthe distal most elastic of the elastomeric laminate 302 on a second sideof the longitudinal axis 42. The region is defined by a first lineextending parallel to the longitudinal axis 42 and passing through thedistal most point of the distal most elastic on a first side of thelongitudinal axis 42 and a second line extending parallel to thelongitudinal axis 42 and passing through the distal most point of thedistal most elastic on a second side of the longitudinal axis 42. Foreach of these elements, the region is then divided into 4 equalsections, defined by three lines disposed parallel to the longitudinalaxis 42 and disposed at 25%, 50% and 75% of the distance between thefirst line and second line. The region comprises a first section whichincludes the distal most elastic on the first side of the longitudinalaxis, a fourth section which includes the distal most elastic on thesecond side of the longitudinal axis, a second section disposed adjacentthe first section and a third section disposed between the secondsection and the fourth section.

With regard to the chassis 200, topsheet 124, and backsheet 125 (seeFIG. 57D) wherein the elastics 316 of the elastomeric laminate 302extend in a substantially lateral orientation, the portion of thecomponent to be sectioned is defined as the region disposed between andincluding the distal most elastic of the elastomeric laminate 302 on afirst side of the lateral axis 44 and the distal most elastic of theelastomeric laminate 302 on a second side of the lateral axis 44. Theregion is defined by a first line extending parallel to the lateral axis44 and passing through the distal most point of the distal most elasticon a first side of the lateral axis 44 and a second line extendingparallel to the lateral axis 44 and passing through the distal mostpoint of the distal most elastic on a second side of the lateral axis44. For each of these elements, the region is then divided into 4 equalsections, defined by three lines disposed parallel to the lateral axis44 and disposed at 25%, 50% and 75% of the distance between the firstline and second line. The region comprises a first section whichincludes the distal most elastic on the first side of the lateral axis,a fourth section which includes the distal most elastic on the secondside of the lateral axis, a second section disposed adjacent the firstsection and a third section disposed between the second section and thefourth section.

TABLE 1 Inventive Belt Elastic Profiles Average- Pressure- Average-Strand- Open Section- Under- Number of Average- Pre- Spacing AreaModulus Strand Section Elastics Dtex Strain (mm) (%) (gf/mm) (psi) AFront Belt 1 40 140 100% 0.6 79.2% 10.9 0.328 2 40 70 150% 0.6 85.3% 5.50.463 3 40 70 150% 0.6 85.3% 5.5 0.463 4 40 140 100% 0.6 79.2% 10.90.328 Back Belt 4 40 140 100% 0.6 79.2% 10.9 0.328 3 40 70 150% 0.685.3% 5.5 0.463 2 40 70 150% 0.6 85.3% 5.5 0.463 1 40 140 100% 0.6 79.2%10.9 0.328 B Front Belt 1 50 70 175% 0.5 82.4% 6.6 0.386 2 50 70 175%0.5 82.4% 6.6 0.386 3 50 70 175% 0.5 82.4% 6.6 0.386 4 50 70 175% 0.582.4% 6.6 0.386 Back Belt 4 50 70 175% 0.5 82.4% 6.6 0.386 3 50 70 175%0.5 82.4% 6.6 0.386 2 50 70 175% 0.5 82.4% 6.6 0.386 1 50 70 175% 0.582.4% 6.6 0.386 C Front Belt 1 30 70 200% 0.8 89.0% 4.1 0.618 2 20 210150% 1.1 86.1% 8.9 0.490 3 30 70 200% 0.8 89.0% 4.1 0.618 4 30 70 200%0.8 89.0% 4.1 0.618 Back Belt 4 30 70 200% 0.8 89.0% 4.1 0.618 3 30 70200% 0.8 89.0% 4.1 0.618 2 30 70 200% 0.8 89.0% 4.1 0.618 1 30 210 150%1.1 86.1% 8.9 0.490

TABLE 2 Inventive Ear/Side Panel Elastic Profiles Average- Pressure-Average- Strand- Open Section- Under- Number of Average- Pre- SpacingArea Modulus Strand Section Elastics Dtex Strain (mm) (%) (gf/mm) (psi)A 1 30 140 125% 1.0 87.5% 6.6 0.546 2 30 140 125% 0.8 84.4% 8.2 0.437 330 140 125% 1.0 87.5% 6.6 0.546 4 30 140 125% 1.0 87.5% 6.6 0.546 B 1 6070 125% 0.5 82.4% 6.6 0.386 2 60 70 125% 0.5 82.4% 6.6 0.386 3 60 70125% 0.5 82.4% 6.6 0.386 4 60 70 125% 0.5 82.4% 6.6 0.386 C 1 15 210165% 2.0 92.4% 4.9 0.892 2 15 210 165% 1.1 86.1% 8.9 0.490 3 15 210 165%2.0 92.4% 4.9 0.892 4 15 210 165% 2.0 92.4% 4.9 0.892

TABLE 3 Inventive Waistband Elastic Profiles Average Strand- OpenSection- Pressure- Number of Average- Average- Spacing Area ModulusUnder-Strand Section Elastics Dtex Pre-Strain (mm) (%) (gf/mm) (psi) A 140 111 100% 0.6 81.5% 8.7 0.368 B 1 50 90 110% 0.5 80.0% 8.4 0.341 C 135 120 200% 0.7 83.5% 8.0 0.413

TABLE 4 Inventive Cuff Elastic Profiles Average Strand- Open Section-Pressure- Number of Average- Average- Spacing Area Modulus Under-StrandSection Elastics Dtex Pre-Strain (mm) (%) (gf/mm) (psi) A Inner 50 30200% 0.5 88.5% 2.8 0.590 Outer 50 70 200% 0.5 82.4% 6.6 0.386 B Inner 2570 170% 0.5 82.4% 6.6 0.386 Outer 25 140 200% 1.0 87.5% 6.6 0.546 CInner 25 140  85% 0.5 75.1% 13.1 0.273 Outer 25 140 200% 1.0 87.5% 6.60.546

TABLE 5 Performance Characteristics of Existing and Inventive BeltSections Average- Pressure- Strand- Open Section- Under- Average-Spacing Area Modulus Strand Example Belt Sections Dtex (mm) (%) (gf/mm)(psi) Currently Marketed Product A 1100 9.0 96.1% 5.7 1.753 (examplesection 1 of 4) Currently Marketed Product A 940 9.0 96.4% 7.3 1.897(example section 2 of 4) Currently Marketed Product A 680 9.0 97.0% 3.52.230 (example section 3 of 4) Currently Marketed Product B 800 7.095.7% 5.4 1.599 (example section 1 of 4) Currently Marketed Product B680 7.0 96.1% 4.6 1.734 (example section 2 of 4) Currently MarketedProduct C 470 4.0 94.3% 5.5 1.192 (example section 1 of 4) CurrentlyMarketed Product C 680 4.0 93.1% 8.0 0.991 (example section 2 of 4)Inventive Example 160 0.5 73.4% 15.0 0.255 (example section 1 of 4)Inventive Example 140 0.5 75.1% 13.1 0.273 (example section 2 of 4)Inventive Example 250 0.8 79.2% 14.6 0.327 (example section 3 of 4)

TABLE 6 Inventive Elastomeric Laminate and Prior Art Comparison Average-Strand- Section- Cantilever Graphic Estimated Avg. Spacing Modulus BendDistortion Avg. Fibers/ Product (mm) (gf/mm) (mm) Ratio Dtex StrandCurrently Marketed Product 1 (Baby) 8.5 6.7 28.96 5.0 940 56 CurrentlyMarketed Product 2 (Baby) 5.2 5.6 38.06 4.7 625 55 Currently MarketedProduct 3 (Baby) 5.3 3.9 35.27 4.0 450 56 Currently Marketed Product 4(Baby) 4.8 5.4 29.15 5.0 550 56 Currently Marketed Product 5 (Adult) 6.83.4 36.87 490 43 Currently Marketed Product 6 (Adult) 3.6 6.9 25.95 52543 Inventive Elastomeric Laminate 120 0.5 7.9 24.67 1.0 85 5 InventiveElastomeric Laminate 150 0.5 7.9 23.13 85 5 Inventive ElastomericLaminate UB 0.5 7.9 85 5 Currently Marketed Product 7 (Baby) 5.6 5.2 62042 Currently Marketed Product 8 (Baby) 8.3 2.9 510 43

TABLE 7 Inventive Elastomeric Laminate and Prior Art Comparison CaliperCaliper Caliper Caliper Retention Caliper Retention @ @ Value @ @ Value@ 0 gf/mm 3 gf/mm 3 gf/mm 7 gf/mm 7 gf/mm Product (mm) (mm) (%) (mm) (%)Currently Marketed Product 1 (Baby) 2.8 2.4 84 1.8 65 Currently MarketedProduct 2 (Baby) 4.5 2.4 54 1.1 23 Currently Marketed Product 3 (Baby)3.4 3.0 89 2.5 75 Currently Marketed Product 4 (Baby) 2.4 2.2 92 1.9 80Currently Marketed Product 5 (Adult) 2.4 1.9 81 1.0 40 CurrentlyMarketed Product 6 (Adult) 1.4 1.3 90 0.9 65 Inventive ElastomericLaminate 120 1.2 1.1 90 1.1 86 Currently Marketed Product 7 (Baby) 1.91.7 89 1.1 58 Currently Marketed Product 8 (Baby) 0.9 0.3 38 0.3 32

TABLE 8 Inventive Elastomeric Laminate and Prior Art Comparison PercentPercent Percent Contact Contact Contact Rugosity Rugosity Area Area Area2-98% Frequency Wavelength 100 um 200 um 300 um Height Product (1/mm)(mm) (%) (%) (%) (mm) Currently Marketed Product 1 (Baby) 0.288 3.47 9.819.1 27.3 2.667 Currently Marketed Product 2 (Baby) 0.210 4.77 7 15.824.6 3.092 Currently Marketed Product 3 (Baby) 0.210 4.77 6.5 16.1 24.72.292 Currently Marketed Product 4 (Baby) 0.459 2.18 5.3 11.6 19 2.260Currently Marketed Product 5 (Adult) 0.249 4.02 6.2 14.9 24.4 1.841Currently Marketed Product 6 (Adult) 0.524 1.91 7.3 16.2 26.9 1.619Inventive Elastomeric Laminate 120 0.616 1.62 19.7 53.1 80.5 0.614Inventive Elastomeric Laminate 150 0.721 1.39 17.1 43 67.9 0.503Inventive Elastomeric Laminate UB 0.367 2.73 20.6 32.7 40.8 1.286Currently Marketed Product 7 (Baby) 0.315 3.18 12.2 26.2 38.6 1.714Currently Marketed Product 8 (Baby) 0.341 2.93 9.4 18.9 26.9 1.661

TABLE 9 Inventive Elastomeric Laminate and Prior Art Comparison Air AirAir Water Vapor Pressure- Permeability Permeability PermeabilityTransmission Under- 0 gf/mm 3 gf/mm 7 gf/mm Rate Open Strand (m3/m2/(m3/m2/ (m3/m2/ (g/m2/ Area Product (psi) min) min) min) 24 hrs) (%)Currently Marketed Product 1 (Baby) 1.578 75 104 109 5279 95.7%Currently Marketed Product 2 (Baby) 1.344 43 64 70 5021 94.9% CurrentlyMarketed Product 3 (Baby) 1.626 48 68 70 4568 95.8% Currently MarketedProduct 4 (Baby) 1.323 69 121 110 4616 94.9% Currently Marketed Product5 (Adult) 1.987 55 83 86 4654 96.6% Currently Marketed Product 6 (Adult)1.001 111 146 146 5234 93.2% Inventive Elastomeric Laminate 120 0.351 4058 58 4684 80.6% Inventive Elastomeric Laminate 150 0.351 4670 InventiveElastomeric Laminate UB 0.351 88 105 91 4586 80.6% Currently MarketedProduct 7 (Baby) 1.451 120 100 92 95.3% Currently Marketed Product 8(Baby) 2.368 91 92 85 97.1%

Tables 6-9 illustrate combinations of structural parameters enabled bythe inventive elastomeric laminates of the present disclosure thatcannot be realized by elastic structures of the prior art or currentlymarketed products. For example, although the inventive elastomericlaminate of the present invention in the tables have a Section-Modulusof 7.9 gf/mm, higher than any of the prior art references and theinventive elastomeric laminate also has the lowest Pressure-Under-Strand0.35 psi. The inventive elastomeric laminates also have a very smoothsurface delivering higher Percent Contact Area than any other prior artproduct in the tables above and the highest Rugosity Frequency all whiledelivering the unique combination of low Caliper (thinness) and highCaliper Retention Value. All of these inventive elastomeric laminatebenefits are derived from Average-Dtex lower than any of the prior artreferences, combined with Average-Strand-Spacing lower than any of theprior art references.

Example 1—Belt Pant Article (See, for Example, FIG. 11)

Example 1 is a belted pant absorbent article. The pant comprises a beltlaminate disposed in both the waist regions and the following materialsand construction.

Outer Belt Layer (first substrate layer 306): 13 gsm spunbond nonwovenInner Belt Layer (second substrate layer 308): 13 gsm spunbond nonwovenBacksheet Film 126: 12 gsm liquid impermeable polyethylene filmCore Wrap: 10 gsm hydrophilic spunbond nonwovenAGM: absorbent gelling materialDistribution Layer: crosslinked cellulosic fiberAcquisition Layer: 43 gsm synthetic acquisition layerTopsheet 124: 12 gsm hydrophilic spunbond nonwovenBelt Elastic Profile: Table 1, group BCuff Elastic Profile: Table 4, group CThe belt 430 of Example 1 may present on a wearer consistent with theimages of FIGS. 72B, and 73B. Further, the cuffs 52 of Example 1 maypresent consistent with the images of FIGS. 76B, and 77B.

Example 2—Taped Article (See, for Example, FIG. 46)

Example 2 is a side panel taped absorbent article. The taped articlecomprises a pair of side panels disposed in a first waist region and thefollowing materials and construction.

Elastomeric Ear Panel Outer Layer (first substrate layer 306): 17 gsmcarded nonwovenElastomeric Ear Panel Inner Layer (second substrate layer 308): 17 gsmspunbond nonwovenBacksheet Film 126: 12 gsm liquid impermeable polyethylene filmCore Wrap: 10 gsm hydrophilic spunbond nonwovenAGM: absorbent gelling materialDistribution Layer: crosslinked cellulosic fiberAcquisition Layer: 43 gsm synthetic acquisition layerTopsheet 124: 12 gsm hydrophilic spunbond nonwovenSide Panel Elastic Profile: Table 2, group ACuff Elastic Profile: Table 4, group BFront Waistband: Table 3, group ABack Waistband: Table 3, group AThe elastomeric ear panels 530 of Example 2 may present on a wearerconsistent with the images in FIGS. 70B, and 71B. Further, the cuffs 52of Example 2 may present consistent with the images of FIGS. 76B, and77B. Still further, the front and back waistbands 122 of Example 2 maypresent consistent with the images of FIGS. 74B, and 75B.

Example 3—Taped Article with Belt (See, for Example, FIG. 43)

Example 3 is a belted taped absorbent article. The taped articlecomprises a belt disposed in a first waist region and the followingmaterials and construction.

Outer Belt Layer (first substrate layer 306): 15 gsm spunbond nonwovenInner Belt Layer (second substrate layer 308): 10 gsm spunbond nonwovenBacksheet Film 126: 12 gsm liquid impermeable polyethylene filmCore Wrap: 10 gsm hydrophilic spunbond nonwovenAGM: absorbent gelling materialDistribution Layer: crosslinked cellulosic fiberAcquisition Layer: 43 gsm synthetic acquisition layerTopsheet 124: 12 gsm hydrophilic spunbond nonwovenBelt Elastic Profile: Table 1, group BCuff Elastic Profile: Table 4, group AFront Waistband: Table 3, group BThe belt 430 of Example 3 may present on a wearer consistent with theimages of FIGS. 72B, and 73B. Further, the cuffs 52 of Example 3 maypresent consistent with the images of FIGS. 76B, and 77B. Still further,the front waistband 122 of Example 3 may present consistent with theimages of FIGS. 74B, and 75B.

Example 4—Side Panel Pant Article (See, for Example, FIG. 2)

Example 4 is a side panel pant absorbent article. The pant article has apair of side panels disposed in each waist region and comprises thefollowing materials and construction.

Side Panel Outer Layer (first substrate layer 306): 17 gsm cardednonwovenSide Panel Inner Layer (second substrate layer 308): 17 gsm spunbondnonwovenBacksheet Film 126: 12 gsm liquid impermeable polyethylene filmCore Wrap: 10 gsm hydrophilic spunbond nonwovenAGM: absorbent gelling materialDistribution Layer: crosslinked cellulosic fiberAcquisition Layer: 43 gsm synthetic acquisition layerTopsheet 124: 12 gsm hydrophilic spunbond nonwovenFront Side Panel Elastic Profile: Table 2, group BBackSide Panel Elastic Profile: Table 2, group BCuff Elastic Profile: Table 4, group AFront Waistband: Table 3, group CBack Waistband: Table 3, group CThe side panels 330 of Example 4 may present on a wearer consistent withthe images in FIGS. 70B, and 71B. Further, the cuffs 52 of Example 4 maypresent consistent with the images of FIGS. 76B, and 77B. Still further,the front and back waistbands 122 of Example 4 may present consistentwith the images of FIGS. 74B, and 75B.

Example 5—Targeted Force Belt Pant Article (See, for Example, FIG. 17)

Example 5 is a belted pant absorbent article. The pant comprises a beltlaminate disposed in both the waist regions and the following materialsand construction.

Outer Belt Flap Layer (first substrate layer 306): 13 gsm spunbondnonwovenInner Belt Flap Layer (second substrate layer 308): 13 gsm spunbondnonwovenBacksheet Film 126: 12 gsm liquid impermeable polyethylene filmCore Wrap: 10 gsm hydrophilic spunbond nonwovenAGM: absorbent gelling materialDistribution Layer: crosslinked cellulosic fiberAcquisition Layer: 43 gsm synthetic acquisition layerTopsheet 124: 12 gsm hydrophilic spunbond nonwovenBelt Elastic Profile: Table 1, group CCuff Elastic Profile: Table 4, group BThe belt 430 of Example 5 may present on a wearer consistent with theimages of FIGS. 72B, and 73B. Further, the cuffs 52 of Example 5 maypresent consistent with the images of FIGS. 76B, and 77B.

EXAMPLE CLAIM COMBINATIONS Example Claim Set 1

1. An absorbent article, comprising:

a chassis comprising a topsheet, a backsheet and an absorbent coredisposed between the topsheet and the backsheet;

a first belt;

a longitudinal centerline extending from the midpoint of a front waistedge of the absorbent article to a midpoint of a back waist edge of theabsorbent article;

a lateral centerline extending perpendicular to the longitudinalcenterline through a midpoint of the longitudinal centerline;

wherein the first belt is formed at least in part by an elastomericlaminate comprising a first substrate layer, a second substrate layerand a first plurality of elastics disposed between the first and secondsubstrate layers;

wherein the first plurality of elastics comprises greater than about 40elastic strands disposed at an Average-Strand-Spacing of less than 4 mm,having an Average-Dtex of less than 600, and having anAverage-Pre-Strain of less than 400%; and

wherein a basis weight of each of the first and second substrate layersis from about 6 grams per square meter to about 30 grams per squaremeter.

2. The absorbent article of claim 1, wherein the first plurality ofelastics comprises greater than about 100 strands.

3. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics is disposed at anAverage-Strand-Spacing of less than 3 mm.

4. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics has an Average-Dtex of less than400.

5. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics has an Average-Pre-Strain ofless than 350%.

6. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics is disposed at anAverage-Strand-Spacing of less than 2 mm.

7. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics has an Average-Dtex of less than300.

8. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics has an Average-Pre-Strain ofless than 300%.

9. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the elastomeric laminate comprising the first plurality ofelastics has an Pressure-Under-Strand of less than about 1 psi.

10. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics comprises greater than about 150strands.

11. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics is disposed at anAverage-Strand-Spacing of less than 1.5 mm.

12. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics has an Average-Dtex of less than250.

13. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics has an Average-Pre-Strain ofless than 300%.

14. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics comprises greater than about 200strands.

15. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics is disposed at anAverage-Strand-Spacing of less than 1 mm.

16. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics has an Average-Dtex of less than200.

17. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics has an Average-Pre-Strain ofless than 250%.

18. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics comprises greater than about 250strands.

19. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics is disposed at anAverage-Strand-Spacing of less than 0.75 mm.

20. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics has an Average-Dtex of less than150.

21. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics has an Average-Pre-Strain ofless than 200%.

22. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics comprises greater than about 500strands.

23. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics is disposed at anAverage-Strand-Spacing of less than 0.5 mm.

24. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics has an Average-Dtex of less than125.

25. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics has an Average-Pre-Strain ofless than 175%.

26. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the elastomeric laminate comprising the first plurality ofelastics has a Pressure-Under-Strand of less than about 0.75 psi.

27. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics, the second plurality ofelastics, and the third plurality of elastics each comprise PolyUrethaneUrea.

28. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics, the second plurality ofelastics, and the third plurality of elastics each comprise a siliconeoil coating.

29. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics, the second plurality ofelastics, and the third plurality of elastics each are joined to theinner and outer nonwoven layers via an adhesive.

30. The absorbent article according to any one of claims 29, wherein theadhesive is selected from the group consisting of Styrenic blockcopolymers, Polyolefins, Ethylene-vinyl Acetates, Polyurethanes,Ethylene-propylene copolymers, Propylene-ethylene copolymers, Polyolefinblock polymers, Polyolefin homo-polymers, Polyesters, Polyamides,Silicones, Cyano acrylics, Acrylics, butyl rubber, and combinationsthereof.

31. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics, the second plurality ofelastics, and the third plurality of elastics each consists essentiallyof PolyUrethane Urea.

32. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics, the second plurality ofelastics, and the third plurality of elastics each consists ofPolyUrethane Urea.

33. The absorbent article according to any one of claims 29, wherein theadhesive is selected from the group consisting of thermoplastic,thermoset, hot-melt, pressure sensitive, solvent-based, and reactivethermoset.

34. A method for producing the disposable absorbent article of any ofthe preceding claims, comprising the step of unwinding the firstplurality of elastics are unwound from a single beam to form theelastomeric laminate.

Example Claim Set 2

1. An absorbent article, comprising:

a chassis comprising a topsheet, a backsheet and an absorbent coredisposed between the topsheet and the backsheet;

a first panel that may be a first side panel or an a first ear panel;

a second panel that may be a second side panel or a second ear panel;

a longitudinal centerline extending from a midpoint of a front waistedge of the absorbent article to a midpoint of a back waist edge of theabsorbent article;

a lateral centerline extending perpendicular to the longitudinalcenterline through the midpoint of the longitudinal centerline;

wherein the first and second panels are formed at least in part by anelastomeric laminate comprising a first substrate layer, a secondsubstrate layer, and a first plurality of elastics disposed between thefirst and second substrate layers;

wherein the first plurality of elastics comprises greater than about 10elastic strands disposed at an Average-Strand-Spacing of less than 4 mm,and having an Average-Dtex of less than 600 and an Average-Pre-Strain ofless than 400%; and

wherein a basis weight of each of the first and second substrate layersis from about 6 grams per square meter to about 30 grams per squaremeter.

2. The absorbent article of claim 1, wherein the first plurality ofelastics comprises greater than about 20 strands.

3. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics is disposed at anAverage-Strand-Spacing of less than 3 mm.

4. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics has an Average-Dtex of less than400.

5. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics has an Average-Pre-Strain ofless than 350%.

6. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics is disposed at anAverage-Strand-Spacing of less than 2 mm.

7. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics has an Average-Dtex of less than300.

8. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics has an Average-Pre-Strain ofless than 300%.

9. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the elastomeric laminate comprising the first plurality ofelastics has an Pressure-Under-Strand of less than about 1 psi.

10. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics comprises greater than about 40strands.

11. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics is disposed at anAverage-Strand-Spacing of less than 1.5 mm.

12. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics has an Average-Dtex of less than250.

13. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics has an Average-Pre-Strain ofless than 300%.

14. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics comprises greater than about 80strands.

15. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics is disposed at anAverage-Strand-Spacing of less than 1 mm.

16. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics has an Average-Dtex of less than200.

17. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics has an Average-Pre-Strain ofless than 250%.

18. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics comprises greater than about 115strands.

19. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics is disposed at anAverage-Strand-Spacing of less than 0.75 mm.

20. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics has an Average-Dtex of less than150.

21. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics has an Average-Pre-Strain ofless than 200%.

22. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics comprises greater than about 150strands.

23. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics is disposed at anAverage-Strand-Spacing of less than 0.5 mm.

24. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics has an Average-Dtex of less than125.

25. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics has an Average-Pre-Strain ofless than 175%.

26. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the elastomeric laminate comprising the first plurality ofelastics has an Pressure-Under-Strand of less than about 0.75 psi.

27. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics, the second plurality ofelastics, and the third plurality of elastics each comprise PolyUrethaneUrea.

28. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics, the second plurality ofelastics, and the third plurality of elastics each comprise a siliconeoil coating.

29. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics, the second plurality ofelastics, and the third plurality of elastics each are joined to theinner and outer nonwoven layers via an adhesive.

30. The absorbent article according to any one of claims 29, wherein theadhesive is selected from the group consisting of Styrenic blockcopolymers, Polyolefins, Ethylene-vinyl Acetates, Polyurethanes,Ethylene-propylene copolymers, Propylene-ethylene copolymers, Polyolefinblock polymers, Polyolefin homo-polymers, Polyesters, Polyamides,Silicones, Cyanoacrylics, Acrylics, butyl rubber, and combinationsthereof.

31. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics, the second plurality ofelastics, and the third plurality of elastics each consists essentiallyof PolyUrethane Urea.

32. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics, the second plurality ofelastics, and the third plurality of elastics each consists ofPolyUrethane Urea.

33. The absorbent article according to any one of claims 29, wherein theadhesive is selected from the group consisting of thermoplastic,thermoset, hot-melt, pressure sensitive, solvent-based, and reactivethermoset.

34. A method for producing the disposable absorbent article of any ofthe preceding claims, comprising the step of unwinding the firstplurality of elastics are unwound from a single beam to form theelastomeric laminate.

Example Claim Set 3

1. An absorbent article, comprising:

a chassis comprising a topsheet, a backsheet and an absorbent coredisposed between the topsheet and the backsheet;

an elastomeric laminate forming at least a portion of one or moreabsorbent article components selected from the group consisting of awaistband, a waistcap, an inner leg cuff, an outer leg cuff, and atransverse barrier;

a longitudinal centerline extending from a midpoint of a front waistedge of the absorbent article to a midpoint of a back waist edge of theabsorbent article;

a lateral centerline extending perpendicular to the longitudinalcenterline through a midpoint of the longitudinal centerline;

wherein the elastomeric laminate comprises a first substrate layer, asecond substrate layer and a first plurality of elastics disposedbetween the first and second substrate layers;

wherein the first plurality of elastics comprises from about 10 to about200 elastic strands disposed at an Average-Strand-Spacing of from about0.25 to about 5 mm, and having an Average-Dtex from about 10 to about600 and an Average-Pre-Strain of from about 75% to about 400%; and

wherein a basis weight of each of the first and second substrate layersis from about 6 grams per square meter to about 30 grams per squaremeter.

2. The absorbent article of claim 1, wherein the first plurality ofelastics comprises from about 15 to about 175 elastic strands.

3. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics is disposed at anAverage-Strand-Spacing of less than 3 mm.

4. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics has an Average-Dtex of less than400.

5. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics has an Average-Pre-Strain ofless than 350%.

6. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics is disposed at anAverage-Strand-Spacing of less than 2 mm.

7. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics has an Average-Dtex of less than300.

8. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics has an Average-Pre-Strain ofless than 300%.

9. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the elastomeric laminate comprising the first plurality ofelastics has an Pressure-Under-Strand of less than about 1 psi.

10. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics comprises from about 20 to about160 elastic strands.

11. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics is disposed at anAverage-Strand-Spacing of less than 1.5 mm.

12. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics has an Average-Dtex of less than250.

13. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics has an Average-Pre-Strain ofless than 300%.

14. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics comprises from about 25 to about140 elastic strands.

15. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics is disposed at anAverage-Strand-Spacing of less than 1 mm.

16. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics has an Average-Dtex of less than200.

17. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics has an Average-Pre-Strain ofless than 250%.

18. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics comprises from about 35 to about120 elastic strands.

19. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics is disposed at anAverage-Strand-Spacing of less than 0.75 mm.

20. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics has an Average-Dtex of less than150.

21. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics has an Average-Pre-Strain ofless than 200%.

22. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics comprises from about 45 to about100 elastic strands.

23. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics is disposed at anAverage-Strand-Spacing of less than 0.5 mm.

24. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics has an Average-Dtex of less than125.

25. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics has an Average-Pre-Strain ofless than 175%.

26. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the elastomeric laminate comprising the first plurality ofelastics has an Pressure-Under-Strand of less than about 0.75 psi.

27. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics, the second plurality ofelastics, and the third plurality of elastics each comprise PolyUrethaneUrea.

28. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics, the second plurality ofelastics, and the third plurality of elastics each comprise a siliconeoil coating.

29. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics, the second plurality ofelastics, and the third plurality of elastics each are joined to theinner and outer nonwoven layers via an adhesive.

30. The absorbent article according to any one of claims 29, wherein theadhesive is selected from the group consisting of Styrenic blockcopolymers, Polyolefins, Ethylene-vinyl Acetates, Polyurethanes,Ethylene-propylene copolymers, Propylene-ethylene copolymers, Polyolefinblock polymers, Polyolefin homo-polymers, Polyesters, Polyamides,Silicones, Cyanoacrylics, Acrylics, butyl rubber, and combinationsthereof.

31. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics, the second plurality ofelastics, and the third plurality of elastics each consists essentiallyof PolyUrethane Urea.

32. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding claims,wherein the first plurality of elastics, the second plurality ofelastics, and the third plurality of elastics each consists ofPolyUrethane Urea.

33. The absorbent article according to any one of claims 29, wherein theadhesive is selected from the group consisting of thermoplastic,thermoset, hot-melt, pressure sensitive, solvent-based, and reactivethermoset.

34. A method for producing the disposable absorbent article of any ofthe preceding claims, comprising the step of unwinding the firstplurality of elastics are unwound from a single beam to form theelastomeric laminate.

Methods General Sample Preparation

The General Sample Preparation is intended to be used for methods thatdo not have specific sample preparation instructions within the methoditself.

The When collecting a specimen for testing, the specimen must contain aplurality of elastic strands and/or an elastic material; film, elasticscrim, elastic foam, elastic ribbons, elastic strips, etc. In situationswhere the elastic material and/or elastic strands is not fully securedwithin the sample, the test specimen must be obtained in a way thatelastic material and/or elastic strands within the test region of thespecimen are as they were intended and not altered as a result ofcollection of the specimen. If the elastic material or any elasticstrands release, creep or become separated within or from the laminate,the specimen is discarded and a new specimen prepared.

For pants, remove the side panels where they are attached to the chassisand separate the side panels at the side seams. Identify the elasticmaterial that transverses the entire width of the panel. Identify thelongitudinally distal most edge of the elastic material or elasticstrand (closest to the waist edge) and the longitudinally proximal mostedge of the elastic material or elastic strand (closest to the leg edge)determine the midpoint between the distal most elastic strand or elasticmaterial edge and the proximal most elastic strand or elastic materialedge. Cut a 40 mm wide strip laterally across the entire panel centeredat the midpoint. Repeat for each front and rear side panel that containselastic material and/or elastic strands.

For taped, remove ear panels where they are attached to the chassis.Identify the elastic material that transverses the entire width of thepanel. Identify the distal most elastic material edge or elastic strand(closest to the waist edge) and the proximal most elastic material edgeor elastic strand (closest to the leg edge) determine the midpointbetween the distal most elastic strand or elastic material edge and theproximal most elastic strand or elastic material edge. Cut a 40 mm widestrip laterally across the entire ear panel centered at the midpoint.Repeat for each front and rear ear panel that contains elastic materialand/or elastic strands.

For a belted article, mark the product on the front and back byextending a line from along the side of the core to the waist edge.Remove the belt from the article, using an appropriate means (e.g.freeze spray), taking care not to delaminate the belt or release theelastics. Separate the front belt from the back belt along any seams.Identify the distal most elastic material edge or elastic strand(closest to the waist edge) and the proximal most elastic material edgeor strand (closest to the leg edge) determine the midpoint between thedistal most elastic strand or elastic material edge and the proximalmost elastic strand or elastic material edge. Cut a 40 mm wide stripparallel to the waist edge if linear or to the elastic strands if linearand centered at the midpoint, across the entire belt portion. If thestrip has a region that does not contain elastic strands or elasticmaterial (e.g., a portion that overlapped the core, etc.) cut along theends of the elastic strands/elastic material, to remove the non-elasticregion and treat as two specimens.

For waistbands, they are tested as a single piece of material. Removethe belt from the article, using an appropriate means (e.g. freezespray), taking care not to delaminate the belt or release the elastics.

For the leg cuffs, each of the leg cuffs are tested as a single piece ofmaterial. The inner leg cuff sample is considered to be the portion ofthe inner leg cuff that extends from the proximal most edge of the innerleg cuff to and including the distal most elastic of the inner leg cuffand extending longitudinally to the front and back waist edges of thechassis. The outer leg cuff sample is considered to be the portion ofthe outer leg cuff that extends from the distal most edge of the outerleg cuff to and including the proximal most elastic of the outer legcuff and extending longitudinally to the front and back waist edges ofthe chassis.

For all specimen strips calculate a Span Corrected Width (SCW) iscalculated as:

${{Span}\mspace{14mu}{Corrected}\mspace{14mu}{Width}} = {d\left( \frac{n}{n - 1} \right)}$

where d is the distance (mm) between the two distal strands, and n isthe number of strands, when n>1. Clamp the strip at each end and measurethe length between the clamps to the nearest 1 mm. Apply a weight equalto 3 g/mm SCW. After 10 seconds measure the final weight to the nearest1 mm. Calculate the elongation as (Final Length—Initial Length)/Initiallength.

Product Measurement Preparation for Donning-Ratio, ProductLength-to-Waist Silhouette and Product Hip-to-Waist Silhouette

All measurements are conducted at 22° C.+/−2° and 50% RH+/−20%.

Purpose

This method is used to prepare pant type products for subsequentdimensional measurement. The method provides a consistent means ofopening a product that has been removed from a bag. This method isapplicable to all forms of pant products. A constant rate of extensiontensile testing machine with computer interface is used.

A load cell is chosen so that the load cell capacity ensures accuracy ofa 5N load to within 0.1N.

Sample Holder Apparatus

“C” (604) and “O” (605) Bar attachments each with a rod radius of 9.50mm that extend longer than the length of the longest side seam. Refer toFIG. 30A. The bars are mounted horizontally in the tensile tester withtheir longitudinal axes in the same vertical plane and with upper barmounted directly above the lower bar.

Equipment Set Up

Calibrate tensile tester equipment according to the instrumentmanufacturer's recommendations.

The initial gauge length is determined by removing 10 sample productsfrom the bag, unfolding the pant products (607) and laying them flat asillustrated in FIG. 90, below and measuring the distance between thesides of the pant at the waist as shown (606). The average of the waistmeasurement will be used as the initial gauge length for the specificset of specimens. The initial gauge length is the distance from theuppermost edge of the upper bar to the lowermost edge of the lower bar.

Apply the whole product (607) to the bars as shown in FIG. 30B whileminimizing manipulation of the specimen.

Pull Sample to 5N Force then hold for 10 seconds. Return to initialgauge length.Crosshead Speed=254.0 mm/min, Data acquisition rate=50 Hz.

Cycles=1

Remove the specimen from the bars while minimizing manipulation. Lay thespecimen flat with the front side facing upward as shown in FIG. 90.

Repeat for all 10 specimens

Physical Measurements

Each of the measurements below is to be conducted on 10 separate likespecimens and the average of the 10 separate like specimens isconsidered to be the measurement for that specific specimen set.

Relaxed Product Length (600)

Relaxed Product Length is the longitudinal distance between thelongitudinally distal most point in the crotch region and thelongitudinally distal most point along the front waist edge. Thelongitudinal distance is measured parallel to the longitudinal axis ofthe product. Refer to FIG. 90.

Relaxed Product Hip Width (601)

Relaxed Product Hip Width is the lateral distance from the laterallydistal most point of the left side edge of the product at the upper edgeof the left leg opening to the laterally distal most point of the rightside edge of the product at the upper edge of the right leg opening.Refer to FIG. 90. The lateral distance is measured perpendicular to thelongitudinal axis of the product.

Relaxed Product Waist Width (602)

Relaxed Product Waist Width is the lateral distance from the distal mostpoint at the right side of the front waist edge to the distal most pointat the left side of the front waist edge. The lateral distance ismeasured perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the product. Refer toFIG. 90.

Relaxed Product Crotch Width (608)

Relaxed Product Crotch Width is the lateral distance from the laterallydistal most point of the left side edge of the product at the lower edgeof the left leg opening to the laterally distal most point of the rightside edge of the product at the lower edge of the right leg opening.Refer to FIG. 90. The lateral distance is measured perpendicular to thelongitudinal axis of the product.

Cantilever Bending

The Bending Length and Flexural Rigidity at the waist is measured as thecantilever bending value as determined using ASTM Method D1388, Option ACantilever Test with the modifications described below. The testapparatus described in the D1388 is used without modification. Articlesare conditioned at 23° C.±2 C.° and 50%±2% relative humidity for 2 hrprior to analysis and then tested under the same environmentalconditions.

The method is applied to a dry nonwoven laminate specimen dissected froman absorbent article rather than a fabric. For a belted article cut thebelt at the side seams and remove the belt from the rest of the articleusing for example a cryogenic spay (e.g. Quick-Freeze, Miller-StephensonCompany, Danbury, Conn.). For pants, remove the side panel from thechassis and separate/cut along the side seam. The specimen is cut as a25.4 mm strip parallel to the longitudinal axis of the product, startingat the waist and extending toward the crotch of the product. The lengthof the specimen can be less than the 200 mm cited in D1388, but must beat least 10 mm longer than the overhang length determined duringtesting. If the waist of the specimen is folded over, leave the foldintact for testing.

The specimen is placed on the platform with the garment facing side downand the end proximal to the waist as the leading edge. The bend isperformed as described in D1388. Record the overhang length (OL) to thenearest 1 mm. Calculate the Bending Length (BL) as the Overhang Lengthdivided by 2 and report to the nearest 1 mm. Take the specimen andmeasure the overhang length from the leading edge and cut across thestrip. Measure and record the mass of the overhang piece and record tothe nearest 0.001 g. From the mass and the dimensions of the overhangpiece calculate the basis weight (BW) and record to the nearest 0.01g/m².

Water Vapor Transmission Rate

Water Vapor Transmission Rate (WVTR) is measured using the wet cupapproach to determine the rate for a stretch laminate under strain. Acylindrical cup is filled with water, maintaining a constant headspacebetween the water surface and a specimen sealed over the cup's upperopening. The vapor loss is measured gravimetrically after heating theassembled cup for a specified time in an oven. Glass straight walled,cylindrical vials, 95 mm tall with a 17.8 mm internal diameter at theopening are used as WVTR test cup. Articles are preconditioned at 23°C.±2 C.° and 50%±2% relative humidity for two hours prior to testing andall testing is performed under the same environmental conditions.

The test is intended for use with stretch laminate of the sample articlesuch as belts, side panels, ears, waist bands, cuffs etc. tested intheir relaxed state. Specimens are prepared as describe in GeneralSample Preparation force 3 articles for each test set.

One edge of laminate that is perpendicular to the machine direction (MD)of the laminate is secured to a lab bench. The specimen is then extendedin the machine direction to a length equivalent to 3 gf per mm width andsecured. A circle is marked on the laminate with a diametercorresponding to the diameter of the test cup. A test cup is filled withdistilled water accurately to a level 25.0 mm±0.1 mm from the upper lipof the cup's opening. The specimen is placed, body-facing surface of thelaminate downward, over the cup's opening. The specimen is extended suchthat the marked circle aligns with the cup's opening and secured aroundthe vial's circumference with an elastic band. The specimen is furthersealed by wrapping 0.25″ wide Teflon tape around the cup'scircumference. The Teflon tape is applied up to the top edge of the vialbut should not cover any portion of the vial's opening. The mass of thecup assembly is weighed to the nearest 0.0001 gram. This is the startingmass (SM). The cup assemblies are placed upright in a mechanicalconvection oven (e.g. Lindberg/BlueM oven available from ThermoScientific or equivalent) maintained at 38° C.±2 C.° for 12 hours,taking care to avoid contact between the water in the cups and thespecimens. After 24 hours has elapsed, the cup assemblies are removedfrom the oven and allowed to come to room temperature. The mass of eachcup assembly is measured to the nearest 0.0001 gram. This is the finalmass (FM). The WVTR is calculated using the following equation:

WVTR (g/m²/24 hrs)=([SM (g)−FM (g)]/surface area (m²))/24 hrs

In like fashion, analyze a total of 3 replicates for each stretchlaminate and record their WVTR result. Calculate the arithmetic meanWVTR for each stretch laminate set and reported to the nearest 1 g/m²/24hrs.

Air Permeability

Air permeability is tested using a TexTest FX3300 Air PermeabilityTester (available from Advanced Testing Instruments, Greer, S.C.) with acustom made 1 cm² aperture (also available from Advanced TestingInstruments). Standardize the instrument according to the manufacturer'sprocedures. Precondition the articles at about 23° C.±2 C.° and about50%±2% relative humidity for two hours prior to testing. Articles arepreconditioned at 23° C.±2 C.° and 50%±2% relative humidity for twohours prior to testing and all testing is performed under the sameenvironmental conditions.

The test is intended for use with stretch laminate of the sample articlesuch as belts, side panels, ears, waist bands, etc. Stretch componentsare removed from the article using, for example, cryogenic spay (e.g.Quick-Freeze, Miller-Stephenson Company, Danbury, Conn.) or cutting.Specimens are dissected from the laminate avoiding material seams orother structures not integral to the stretch. Stretch laminates areharvested from 3 articles for each test set.

Cut a specimen from the stretch region of the laminate that is 25 mm by25 mm. For a specimen with unevenly spaced strands, a Span CorrectedWidth (SCW) is calculated as:

${{Span}\mspace{14mu}{Corrected}\mspace{14mu}{Width}} = {d\left( \frac{n}{n - 1} \right)}$

where d is the distance (mm) between the two distal strands, and n isthe number of strands, when n>1. Using the Span Corrected Widthdetermine the elongation need to achieve 3 g/mm SCW and 7 g/mm SCW byhanging weights on a substantially similar specimen and measuring theelongation.

The on the instrument's air pressure is set for 125 Pa. Place a specimenin its relaxed state with the body-facing side downward on the portplate. The stretch region must completely cover the instruments port.Close the sample ring and adjust the measuring range until it is withinspecification. Record the air permeability for the un-extended specimento the nearest 0.1 m³/m²/min.

Select one of the edges of laminate that is perpendicular to the machinedirection (MD) and secure it to the port plate of the instrument usingadhesive tape. The specimen is then extended in the machine direction toa length equivalent to 3 gf/mm and secured. The stretch region mustcompletely cover the port. Close the sample ring and adjust themeasuring range until the it is within specification. Record the airpermeability for the 3 g/mm to the nearest 0.1 m³/m²/min. Repeat in likefashion for the 7 g/mm extension and record the air permeability for the3 g/mm to the nearest 0.1 m³/m²/min.

A total of five measures are made on replicate specimens for eachstretch laminate. Calculate and report the arithmetic average for airpermeability at the 0 gf/mm, 3 gf/mm, and 7 gf/mm elongation and reporteach to the nearest 0.1 m3/m2/min.

Caliper (Caliper Retention Value)

Caliper is measured using a foot and anvil type digital caliper such asan Ono Sokki GS 503/DG 3610 caliper gage or equivalent. The instrumentis operated and calibrated as per the manufacturer's instructions. Acircular 25.4 mm diameter foot that applies a confining pressure of 0.69kPa.

The test is intended for use with stretch laminate of the sample articlesuch as belts, side panels, ears, waist bands, cuffs etc. tested intheir relaxed state. Specimens are prepared as describe in GeneralSample Preparation force 3 articles for each test set.

Place the specimen, with the body-facing side downward on the anvil. Themiddle of the test strip is centered underneath the foot. Lower the footat approximately 0.5 mm sec, and read the value after 5.0 sec. Record asthe caliper for 0 gf/mm elongation to the nearest 0.01 mm.

Select one of the edges of laminate that is perpendicular to theprominent stretch direction and secure it to the anvil using adhesivetape. The specimen is then extended in the machine direction to a lengthequivalent to 3 gf/mm and secured. The equivalent target site iscentered under the foot. Lower the foot at approximately 0.5 mm sec, andread the value after 5.0 sec. Record as the caliper for 3 gf/mmelongation to the nearest 0.01 mm. Repeat in like fashion for the 7 g/mmextension and record the caliper for the 7 g/mm to the nearest 0.01 mm.

A total of five measures are made on replicate specimens for eachstretch laminate. Calculate and report the arithmetic average forcaliper at the 0 gf/mm, 3 gf/mm, and 7 gf/mm elongation and report eachto the nearest 0.01 mm. The percentage at 3 gf/mm and 7 gf/mm isconsidered to be the Caliper Retention Value.

Average-Strand-Spacing

Using a ruler calibrated against a certified NIST ruler and accurate to0.5 mm, measure the distance between the two distal strands within asection to the nearest 0.5 mm, and then divide by the number of strandsin that section−1

Average-Strand-Spacing=d/(n−1) where n>1

report to the nearest 0.1 mm.

Pressure-Under-Strand (Also Referred to as AveragePressure-Under-Strand)

Defined as the average pressure imparted by each individual elasticstrand of a section under specific conditions. These conditions aredefined as (refer to FIG. 92):

-   -   The section is pulled to a Stress of 7 gf/mm (within a consumer        preferred range of stresses as determined experimentally)    -   The section is pulled over a cylinder whose circumference is        defined as a Representative-Circumference

Where:

-   -   Pressure-Under-Strand        (psi)=1.422*Strand-Force/(2*Representative-Radius*Average-Strand-Diameter)    -   Representative-Radius (mm)=Representative-Circumference/(2*pi)    -   Representative-Circumference (mm)=460 mm    -   Stress (gf/mm)=(Summation of Strand-Forces within a        section)/(Section-Width)    -   Section-Width (mm)=(Number of Elastics in the        section)*Average-Strand-Spacing (mm)    -   Strand-Force (gf)=Strand-Strain (%)*0.046875*Average-Dtex    -   Strand-Strain (%)=strain in each elastic strand within a section    -   Average-Strand-Diameter (mm)=2*sqrt        (Strand-Cross-Sectional-Area/pi)    -   Strand-Cross-Sectional-Area        (mm²)=Average-Dtex/Strand-Density/10,000    -   Strand-Density (g/cc)=1.15 g/cc (industry standard for        PolyUrethaneUrea based spandex elastics)    -   Dtex (g/10,000 m)=Standard textile unit of measure. Dtex is        weight in grams for 10,000 m of the material    -   Average-Pre-Strain=Amount of stretch in elastic strands in a        section prior to combining with substrate layer(s).    -   Maximum-Strain=Average-Pre-Strain. This is the maximum amount of        strain each section can be pulled to. It cannot exceed the        Average-Pre-Strain.    -   Maximum-Section-Force=Summation of each strand in the section        pulled to the Maximum-Strain.

Section-Modulus

Defined as the modulus of a given section. Section-Modulus (alsoreferred to as modulus) is the linear slope of the stress vs strain dataof the section between 3 gf/mm and 7 gf/mm (refer to FIG. 93).Section-Modulus is calculated as:

Section-Modulus=[7 gf/mm−3 gf/mm]/[(section strain at 7 gf/mm)−(sectionstrain at 3 gf/mm)]

Where:

-   -   section strain at 7 gf/mm=7        gf/mm*(Average-Strand-Spacing)/DTEX-FACTOR    -   section strain at 3 gf/mm=3        gf/mm*(Average-Strand-Spacing)/DTEX-FACTOR    -   Average-Strand-Spacing (mm)=d/(n−1)    -   d is the distance (mm) between the two distal strands of the        section    -   n is the number of strands, when n>1    -   DTEX-FACTOR=37.5*Average-Dtex/800 (dtex as measured, specified)    -   Section-Modulus is reported in units of (gf/mm)

Average Decitex (Average-Dtex)

The Average Decitex Method is used to calculate the Average-Dtex on alength-weighted basis for elastic fibers present in an entire article,or in a specimen of interest extracted from an article. The decitexvalue is the mass in grams of a fiber present in 10,000 meters of thatmaterial in the relaxed state. The decitex value of elastic fibers orelastic laminates containing elastic fibers is often reported bymanufacturers as part of a specification for an elastic fiber or anelastic laminate including elastic fibers. The Average-Dtex is to becalculated from these specifications if available. Alternatively, ifthese specified values are not known, the decitex value of an individualelastic fiber is measured by determining the cross-sectional area of afiber in a relaxed state via a suitable microscopy technique such asscanning electron microscopy (SEM), determining the composition of thefiber via Fourier Transform Infrared (FT-IR) spectroscopy, and thenusing a literature value for density of the composition to calculate themass in grams of the fiber present in 10,000 meters of the fiber. Themanufacturer-provided or experimentally measured decitex values for theindividual elastic fibers removed from an entire article, or specimenextracted from an article, are used in the expression below in which thelength-weighted average of decitex value among elastic fibers present isdetermined.

The lengths of elastic fibers present in an article or specimenextracted from an article is calculated from overall dimensions of andthe elastic fiber pre-strain ratio associated with components of thearticle with these or the specimen, respectively, if known.Alternatively, dimensions and/or elastic fiber pre-strain ratios are notknown, an absorbent article or specimen extracted from an absorbentarticle is disassembled and all elastic fibers are removed. Thisdisassembly can be done, for example, with gentle heating to softenadhesives, with a cryogenic spray (e.g. Quick-Freeze, Miller-StephensonCompany, Danbury, Conn.), or with an appropriate solvent that willremove adhesive but not swell, alter, or destroy elastic fibers. Thelength of each elastic fiber in its relaxed state is measured andrecorded in millimeters (mm) to the nearest mm.

Calculation of Average-Dtex

For each of the individual elastic fibers f_(i) of relaxed length L_(i)and fiber decitex value d_(i) (obtained either from the manufacturer'sspecifications or measured experimentally) present in an absorbentarticle, or specimen extracted from an absorbent article, theAverage-Dtex for that absorbent article or specimen extracted from anabsorbent article is defined as:

${{Average}\text{-}{Dtex}} = \frac{\sum\limits_{i = 1}^{n}\left( {L_{i} \times d_{i}} \right)}{\sum\limits_{i = 1}^{n}L_{i}}$

where n is the total number of elastic fibers present in an absorbentarticle or specimen extracted from an absorbent article. TheAverage-Dtex is reported to the nearest integer value of decitex (gramsper 10000 m).If the decitex value of any individual fiber is not known fromspecifications, it is experimentally determined as described below, andthe resulting fiber decitex value(s) are used in the above equation todetermine Average-Dtex.

Experimental Determination of Decitex Value for a Fiber

For each of the elastic fibers removed from an absorbent article orspecimen extracted from an absorbent article according to the proceduredescribed above, the length of each elastic fiber L_(k) in its relaxedstate is measured and recorded in millimeters (mm) to the nearest mm.Each elastic fiber is analyzed via FT-IR spectroscopy to determine itscomposition, and its density ρ_(k) is determined from availableliterature values. Finally, each fiber is analyzed via SEM. The fiber iscut in three approximately equal locations perpendicularly along itslength with a sharp blade to create a clean cross-section for SEManalysis. Three fiber segments with these cross sections exposed aremounted on an SEM sample holder in a relaxed state, sputter coated withgold, introduced into an SEM for analysis, and imaged at a resolutionsufficient to clearly elucidate fiber cross sections. Fiber crosssections are oriented as perpendicular as possible to the detector tominimize any oblique distortion in the measured cross sections. Fibercross sections may vary in shape, and some fibers may consist of aplurality of individual filaments. Regardless, the area of each of thethree fiber cross sections is determined (for example, using diametersfor round fibers, major and minor axes for elliptical fibers, and imageanalysis for more complicated shapes), and the average of the threeareas a_(k) for the elastic fiber, in units of micrometers squared (m²),is recorded to the nearest 0.1 μm². The decitex d_(k) of the kth elasticfiber measured is calculated by:

d _(k)=10000 m×a _(k)×ρ_(k)×10⁻⁶

where d_(k) is in units of grams (per calculated 10,000 meter length),a_(k) is in units of μm², and ρ_(k) is in units of grams per cubiccentimeter (g/cm³). For any elastic fiber analyzed, the experimentallydetermined L_(k) and d_(k) values are subsequently used in theexpression above for Average-Dtex.

Surface Topography (Percent Contact Area, Rugosity Frequency, RugosityWavelength and 2-98% Height Value)

In the Surface Topography Method, an elastic laminate specimen isremoved from an absorbent article and extended across and in contactwith the convex surface of a transparent horizontal cylindrical tubingsegment, allowing the areal surface topology of the body facing side ofthe laminate to be measured through the transparent tubing segment usingoptical profilometry. The 3D surface data are then sampled and processedto extract several parameters that describe the percent contact area andheight of the elastic laminate specimen surface as well as the frequencyand wavelength of its associated rugosities. All sample preparation andtesting is performed in a conditioned room maintained at about 23±2° C.and about 50±2% relative humidity, and samples are equilibrated in thisenvironment for at least 24 hours prior to testing.

Sample Preparation

Specimen Prep Description

Each elastic laminate specimen extracted from an article is mounted on ahorizontal tubing segment as described below. The tubing segment is cutfrom a sufficient length of optically clear, colorless cast acryliccylindrical tubing having an outer diameter of 8.0 inches (203 mm) and awall thickness of 0.1875 inches (4.76 mm). The segment has a dimensionof 4.0 inches (102 mm) along an axis parallel to the central cylindricalaxis of the parent tubing and a circumferential outer arc length of 5.5inches (140 mm).

The elastic laminate specimen is extended in its primary stretchdirection to a ratio corresponding to its extension at 3 g/mm (mass perlinear width), where its width is determined by the Span Corrected Widthmetric as defined in the Caliper Test Method, and in which the extensionis the average ratio measured under static load for the first tenseconds during which it is applied. In this extended state, the extendedelastic laminate specimen is oriented such that its body-facing surfaceis in contact with the convex surface of the tubing segment and that theaxis of extension is oriented around the circumference of the tubingsegment. The extended laminate is secured at both ends to thetransparent tubing segment such that the body-facing surface of thelaminate is viewable through the concave side of the transparent tubingsegment.

Five replicate elastic laminate specimens are isolated and prepared inthis way from five equivalent absorbent articles for analysis.

3D Surface Image Acquisition

A three-dimensional (3D) surface topography image of the body facingsurface of the extended elastic laminate specimen is obtained using aDLP-based, structured-light 3D surface topography measurement system (asuitable surface topography measurement system is the MikroCAD Premiuminstrument commercially available from LMI Technologies Inc., Vancouver,Canada, or equivalent). The system includes the following maincomponents: a) a Digital Light Processing (DLP) projector with directdigital controlled micro-mirrors; b) a CCD camera with at least a1600×1200 pixel resolution; c) projection optics adapted to a measuringarea of at least 60 mm×45 mm; d) recording optics adapted to a measuringarea of 60 mm×45 mm; e) a table tripod based on a small hard stoneplate; f) a blue LED light source; g) a measuring, control, andevaluation computer running surface texture analysis software (asuitable software is MikroCAD software with Mountains Map technology, orequivalent); and h) calibration plates for lateral (XY) and vertical (Z)calibration available from the vendor.

The optical 3D surface topography measurement system measures thesurface height of a sample using the digital micro-mirror pattern fringeprojection technique. The nature of this pattern projection techniqueallows the surface topography of a specimen to be interrogated through atransparent material. The result of the measurement is a 3D data set ofsurface height (defined as the Z-axis) versus displacement in thehorizontal (XY) plane. This 3D data set can also be thought of as animage in which every pixel in the image there is associated an XYdisplacement, and the value of the pixel is the recorded Z-axis heightvalue. The system has a field of view of 60×45 mm with an XY pixelresolution of approximately 37 microns, and a height resolution of 0.5microns, with a total possible height range of 32 mm.

The instrument is calibrated according to manufacturer's specificationsusing the calibration plates for lateral (XY plane) and vertical(Z-axis) available from the vendor.

The elastic laminate specimen mounted on the transparent tubing segmentis positioned with the concave surface of the tubing segment surfacefacing upward so that the body facing surface is facing upward andvisible through the transparent material. The tubing segment is placedon a stand such that the convex (downward-facing) specimen surface inthe region to be analyzed is suspended freely and not resting on asurface. The tubing segment is oriented such that its circumferentialdirection (that direction or axis along which the laminate is stretched)is centered and perpendicular relative to the long axis of the camera'sfield of view (or either of the central axes if the field of view issquare). A 3D surface topology image of the elastic laminate specimen iscollected by following the instrument manufacturer's recommendedmeasurement procedures, which may include focusing the measurementsystem and performing a brightness adjustment. No pre-filtering optionsare used. The collected height image file is saved to the evaluationcomputer running the surface texture analysis software.

If the field of view of the 3D surface topography measurement systemexceeds the evaluation region on the elastic laminate specimen the imagemay be cropped to remove extraneous areas and retain a rectangular fieldof view of the relevant portion, while maintaining the XY resolution,prior to performing the analysis.

3D Surface Image Analysis

The 3D surface topography image is opened in the surface textureanalysis software. The following filtering procedure is then performedon each image: 1) removal of invalid or non-measured points; 2) a 5×5pixel median filter to remove noise; 3) a 5×5 pixel mean filter tosmooth the surface; and 4) subtraction of a two-dimensional,second-order polynomial (determined via least-squares fit of the surfacetopology image) to remove the general form and flatten the surface. Thesecond-order polynomial is defined by the following equation:

f(x,y)=c ₁ +c ₂ x+c ₃ y+c ₄ x ² +c ₅ y ² +c ₆ xy

Each data set that has been processed to this point as described aboveis referred to as a “preprocessed specimen data set.” The highest pointsof the resulting topology image correspond to those areas in contactwith the convex surface of the tubing segment, and the lowest points arethose points most distal below the convex surface of the tubing segment.

Contact Surface Areas and 2-98% Height Value

For each of the 3D surface topography images of the five replicatespecimens, the following analysis is performed on preprocessed specimendata sets. The Percent Surface Contact Area and 2-98% Heightmeasurements are derived from the Areal Material Ratio(Abbott-Firestone) curve described in the ISO 13565-2:1996 standardextrapolated to surfaces. This curve is the cumulative curve of thesurface height distribution histogram versus the range of surfaceheights measured. A material ratio is the ratio, expressed as a percent,of the area corresponding to points with heights equal to or above anintersecting plane passing through the surface at a given height, or cutdepth, to the cross-sectional area of the evaluation region (field ofview area). The height at a material ratio of 2% is initiallyidentified. A cut depth of 100 μm below this height is then identified,and the material ratio at this depth is recorded as the Percent SurfaceContact Area at 100 p.m. This procedure is repeated at a cut depth of200 μm and 300 μm below the identified height at a material ratio of 2%,and the material ratio at these depths are recorded as the PercentSurface Contact Area at 200 μm and the Percent Surface Contact Area at300 μm respectively. All of the Percent Contact Area values are recordedto the nearest 0.1%.

The 2-98% Height of the specimen surface is defined as the difference inheights between two material ratios that exclude a small percentage ofthe highest peaks and lowest valleys. The 2-98% Height of the specimensurface is the height between the two cutting depths corresponding to amaterial ratio value of 2% to the material ratio of 98%, and is recordedto the nearest 0.01 mm.

Rugosity Frequency and Rugosity Wavelength

The preprocessed 3D surface topology images for each specimen aresubjected to Fourier transform spatial frequency analysis to determineRugosity Frequency and Rugosity Wavelength.

Each 3D surface topology image is deconstructed into individual lineprofiles by isolating each entire row of single data points that run inthe dimension parallel to the elastic strands (if present and evident)of the elastic laminate, or, more generally, perpendicular to therugosity exhibited by the elastic laminate in the relaxed state. Theseline profiles are therefore data sets in the form of height (inmillimeters) versus distance (in millimeters).

For each replicate 3D surface topology image deconstructed, each lineprofile is mean centered, and a fast Fourier transform (FFT) is appliedto calculate the frequency amplitude spectrum of each line profile. TheFourier transform amplitude versus spatial frequency spectra of allextracted line profiles are averaged, and the resulting averageamplitude versus spatial frequency spectrum is defined as F(1/d), where1/d is reciprocal distance in units of mm⁻¹. Finally, the functionP(1/d)=d×F²(1/d), the spatial frequency power spectral density with aprefactor of distance d to correct for the expected 1/d noise, isplotted versus 1/d. The value of reciprocal distance 1/d at which P(1/d)is at a maximum is defined as the Rugosity Frequency and is recorded inunits of mm⁻¹ to the nearest 0.001 mm⁻¹. The reciprocal of the RugosityFrequency is defined as the Rugosity Wavelength and is recorded in unitsof mm to the nearest 0.01 mm.

Reporting of Method Parameters

After the 3D surface image analysis described above is performed on 3Dsurface topology images of all five specimen replicates, the followingoutput parameters are defined and reported. The arithmetic mean of allfive Percent Surface Contact Area at 100 μm measurements is defined asthe Average Percent Surface Contact Area at 100 μm and is reported tothe nearest 0.1%. The arithmetic mean of all five Percent SurfaceContact Area at 200 μm measurements is defined as the Average PercentSurface Contact Area at 200 μm and is reported to the nearest 0.1%. Thearithmetic mean of all five Percent Surface Contact Area at 300 μmmeasurements is defined as the Average Percent Surface Contact Area at300 μm and is reported to the nearest 0.1%. The arithmetic mean of allfive 2-98% Height measurements is defined as the Average 2-98% Heightand is reported in units of mm to the nearest 0.01 mm. The arithmeticmean of all five Rugosity Frequency measurements is defined as theAverage Rugosity Frequency and is reported in units of mm to the nearest0.001 mm⁻¹. The arithmetic mean of all five Rugosity Wavelengthmeasurements is defined as the Average Rugosity Wavelength and isreported in units of mm to the nearest 0.01 mm.

Open Area

Defined as the percentage of a Section not occluded by elastic strands.Un-apertured films have an Open Area 0%. Apertured film Open Area=(areaoccupied by apertures)/(total film area). None of today's marketeddisposable absorbent articles comprising a film in one or more of abelt, sided panel, or ear panel, waistband, cuff, wing are believed tohave and Open Area above 50%. Open Area is defined as:

Open Area (%)=(Average-Strand-Diameter)/Average-Strand-Spacing

Average-Pre-Strain

The Average-Pre-Strain of a specimen are measured on a constant rate ofextension tensile tester (a suitable instrument is the MTS Insight usingTestworks 4.0 Software, as available from MTS Systems Corp., EdenPrairie, Minn.) using a load cell for which the forces measured arewithin 1% to 90% of the limit of the cell. Articles are conditioned at23° C.±2 C.° and 50%±2% relative humidity for 2 hours prior to analysisand then tested under the same environmental conditions.

Program the tensile tester to perform an elongation to break after aninitial gage length adjustment. First raise the cross head at 10 mm/minup to a force of 0.05N. Set the current gage to the adjusted gagelength. Raise the crosshead at a rate of 100 mm/min until the specimenbreaks (force drops 20% after maximum peak force). Return the cross headto its original position. Force and extension data is acquired at a rateof 100 Hz throughout the experiment.

Set the nominal gage length to 40 mm using a calibrated caliper blockand zero the crosshead. Insert the specimen into the upper grip suchthat the middle of the test strip is positioned 20 mm below the grip.The specimen may be folded perpendicular to the pull axis, and placed inthe grip to achieve this position. After the grip is closed the excessmaterial can be trimmed. Insert the specimen into the lower grips andclose. Once again, the strip can be folded, and then trimmed after thegrip is closed. Zero the load cell. The specimen should have a minimalslack but less than 0.05 N of force on the load cell. Start the testprogram.

From the data construct a Force (N) verses Extension (mm). TheAverage-Pre-Strain is calculated from the bend in the curvecorresponding to the extension at which the nonwovens in the elastic areengaged. Plot two lines, corresponding to the region of the curve beforethe bend (primarily the elastics), and the region after the bend(primarily the nonwovens). Read the extension at which these two linesintersect, and calculate the % Pre-Strain from the extension and thecorrected gage length. Record as % Pre-strain 0.1%. Calculate thearithmetic mean of three replicate samples for each elastomeric laminateand Average-Pre-Strain to the nearest 0.1%.

Force Relaxation Over Time

The Force Relaxation over Time of a specimen is measured on a constantrate of extension tensile tester (a suitable instrument is the MTSInsight using Testworks 4.0 Software, as available from MTS SystemsCorp., Eden Prairie, Minn.) using a load cell for which the forcesmeasured are within 1% to 90% of the limit of the cell. Articles areconditioned at 23° C.±2 C.° and 50%±2% relative humidity for 2 hoursprior to analysis and then tested under the same environmentalconditions. Prepare a sample size such that it enables a gauge length of25.4 mm (parallel to the elastic stretch) at a width of 12.7 mm.

Program the tensile tester to perform an elongation to determine theengineering strain at which the tensile force reaches 0.0294 N/mm.

Prepare and condition a second sample as described above for the ForceRelaxation over time test. The test is performed on the same equipmentas described above. It is performed at a temperature of 37.8° C. Extendthe sample to the strain as determined above. Hold the sample for 10hours and record the force at a rate of 100 Hz throughout the experimenta chart showing the data for an extruded strand prior art product and aninventive elastomeric laminate comprising beam elastic as describedherein is show in FIG. 104.

Graphic Distortion Ratio

The influence of the gathering of the belt or waist band of an absorbentarticle on the potential integrity of a Graphic on the front and back ofand absorbent article is measured by extending the article, applying amarker stripe and measuring the change in the area the stripe occupiesonce the tension is removed from the absorbent article. Articles areconditioned at 23° C.±2 C.° and 50%±2% relative humidity for 2 hr priorto analysis and then tested under the same environmental conditions.

Place the product on a bench with the front of the article facingupward. Secure the left side seam of the article to the bench andelongate the product to a force of 10 gf/mm of belt width and secure theright side seam to the bench. Using a black marker (e.g. A Sharpiechisel tip permanent marker, or equivalent) apply a continuous 6 mm widelinear stripe from the left hand upper corner to the right hand lowercorner of the belt, side panel, ear panel or waistband. Measure thedimensions of a bounding box around the marked stripe and record thelength (L1) and width (W1) of the bounding box to the nearest 1 mm.Sample preparation and measurement in the extended state should beperformed in less than 2 mins.

Unsecure the article and let the article retract to the untensionedstate (5 min.). Measure the dimensions of a bounding box applied aroundthe marked stripe the length (L2) and width (W2) of the bounding box andrecord to the nearest 1 mm.

Calculate the differences in the area of the figure as (L1×W1)−(L2×W2)and record to the nearest 1 mm². Repeat the measurement on 5 productsand record the average. Calculate the arithmetic average of the LengthsL1 and L2 and widths W1 and W2 and the differences in the areas for thereplicates and report the linear measures to the nearest 1 mm and theareas to the nearest mm². The Graphic Distortion Ratio is determined bydividing the final width W2 by the original width W1. Illustrations ofthe Graphic Distortion Ratio can be found in FIGS. 102, 102A, 103 and103A where 102 and 102A are illustrations of an article comprising anelastomeric laminate of the present invention and 103 and 103A areillustrations of an article of the prior art.

CONCLUSION

The dimensions and values disclosed herein are not to be understood asbeing strictly limited to the exact numerical values recited. Instead,unless otherwise specified, each such dimension is intended to mean boththe recited value and a functionally equivalent range surrounding thatvalue. For example, a dimension disclosed as “40 mm” is intended to mean“about 40 mm.”

Every document cited herein, including any cross referenced or relatedpatent or application and any patent application or patent to which thisapplication claims priority or benefit thereof, is hereby incorporatedherein by reference in its entirety unless expressly excluded orotherwise limited. The citation of any document is not an admission thatit is prior art with respect to any invention disclosed or claimedherein or that it alone, or in any combination with any other referenceor references, teaches, suggests or discloses any such invention.Further, to the extent that any meaning or definition of a term in thisdocument conflicts with any meaning or definition of the same term in adocument incorporated by reference, the meaning or definition assignedto that term in this document shall govern.

While particular embodiments of the present disclosure have beenillustrated and described, it would be obvious to those skilled in theart that various other changes and modifications can be made withoutdeparting from the spirit and scope of the invention. It is thereforeintended to cover in the appended claims all such changes andmodifications that are within the scope of this invention.

What is claimed is:
 1. An absorbent article, comprising: a chassiscomprising a topsheet, a backsheet and an absorbent core disposedbetween the topsheet and the backsheet; a first belt; a longitudinalcenterline extending from the midpoint of a front waist edge of theabsorbent article to a midpoint of a back waist edge of the absorbentarticle; a lateral centerline extending perpendicular to thelongitudinal centerline through a midpoint of the longitudinalcenterline; wherein the first belt is formed at least in part by anelastomeric laminate comprising a first substrate layer, a secondsubstrate layer and a first plurality of elastics disposed between thefirst and second substrate layers, wherein the first substrate layer isbonded directly with the second substrate layer in elastic regions ofthe elastomeric laminate; wherein the first plurality of elasticscomprises greater than about 40 elastic strands disposed at anAverage-Strand-Spacing of less than 4 mm, having an Average-Dtex of lessthan 600; and wherein the elastomeric laminate comprising the firstplurality of elastics has a Pres sure-Under-Strand of less than about1.0 psi.